888788918-LS5 RE Eng NEW

37527
LS-5 Series
Circuit Breaker Control
User Manual
Software Version 1.xxxx
Manual 37527
Manual 37527 LS-5 Series - Circuit Breaker Control
WARNING
Read this entire manual and all other publications pertaining to the work to be performed before instal-
ling, operating, or servicing this equipment. Practice all plant and safety instructions and precautions.
Failure to follow instructions can cause personal injury and/or property damage.
The engine, turbine, or other type of prime mover should be equipped with an overspeed (overtempera-
ture, or overpressure, where applicable) shutdown device(s), that operates totally independently of the
prime mover control device(s) to protect against runaway or damage to the engine, turbine, or other
type of prime mover with possible personal injury or loss of life should the mechanical-hydraulic gov-
ernor(s) or electric control(s), the actuator(s), fuel control(s), the driving mechanism(s), the linkage(s),
or the controlled device(s) fail.
Any unauthorized modifications to or use of this equipment outside its specified mechanical, electrical,
or other operating limits may cause personal injury and/or property damage, including damage to the
equipment. Any such unauthorized modifications: (i) constitute "misuse" and/or "negligence" within
the meaning of the product warranty thereby excluding warranty coverage for any resulting damage,
and (ii) invalidate product certifications or listings.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to a control system that uses an alternator or battery-charging device, make sure
the charging device is turned off before disconnecting the battery from the system.
Electronic controls contain static-sensitive parts. Observe the following precautions to prevent dam-
age to these parts.
Discharge body static before handling the control (with power to the control turned off, contact a
grounded surface and maintain contact while handling the control).
Avoid all plastic, vinyl, and Styrofoam (except antistatic versions) around printed circuit boards.
Do not touch the components or conductors on a printed circuit board with your hands or with
conductive devices.
OUT-OF-DATE PUBLICATION
This publication may have been revised or updated since this copy was produced. To verify that you
have the latest revision, be sure to check the Woodward website:
http://www.woodward.com/pubs/current.pdf
The revision level is shown at the bottom of the front cover after the publication number. The latest
version of most publications is available at:
http://www.woodward.com/publications
If your publication is not there, please contact your customer service representative to get the latest
copy.
Important definitions
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
Provides other helpful information that does not fall under the warning or caution categories.
Woodward reserves the right to update any portion of this publication at any time. Information provided by Woodward is believed to be
correct and reliable. However, Woodward assumes no responsibility unless otherwise expressly undertaken.
Woodward
All Rights Reserved.
Page 2/275 Woodward

Revision History
Rev. Date Editor Changes

NEW 11-02-28 TE Release
Content
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL INFORMATION ..................................................................................... 10

Document Overview ............................................................................................................................... 10
CHAPTER 2. INSTALLATION .................................................................................................... 11
Electrostatic Discharge Awareness ....................................................................................................... 11
Marine Usage (Pending) ........................................................................................................................ 12
Application ................................................................................................................................... 12
Housing Types ....................................................................................................................................... 13
Plastic Housing ............................................................................................................................ 14
Sheet Metal Housing.................................................................................................................... 18
Wiring Diagrams ..................................................................................................................................... 19
Connections ........................................................................................................................................... 20
Power Supply ......................................................................................................................................... 21
Voltage Measuring ................................................................................................................................. 22
Voltage Measuring: System A ..................................................................................................... 22
Voltage Measuring: System B ..................................................................................................... 28
Current Measuring ................................................................................................................................. 34
System A Current......................................................................................................................... 34
Power Measuring ................................................................................................................................... 36
Power Factor Definition .......................................................................................................................... 36
Discrete Inputs ....................................................................................................................................... 38
Discrete Inputs: Signal Polarity .................................................................................................... 38
Discrete Inputs: Operation Logic ................................................................................................. 39
Relay Outputs (LogicsManager) ............................................................................................................ 40
Interfaces................................................................................................................................................ 42
RS-485 Serial Interface................................................................................................................ 42
Service Port (RS-232) .................................................................................................................. 42
CAN Bus Interface ....................................................................................................................... 43
Bus Shielding ............................................................................................................................... 45
DPC - Direct Configuration Cable ................................................................................................ 46
CHAPTER 3. CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................ 47
Configuration Via Front Panel ................................................................................................................ 47
Configuration Via PC .............................................................................................................................. 48
Install ToolKit Configuration and Visualization Software ............................................................. 48
Install ToolKit Software ................................................................................................................ 48
Install ToolKit Configuration Files ................................................................................................ 49
Starting ToolKit Software ............................................................................................................. 50
Configure ToolKit Software .......................................................................................................... 51
Connect ToolKit and the LS-5 Unit .............................................................................................. 52
View LS-5 Data with ToolKit ........................................................................................................ 54
Configure the LS-5 with ToolKit ................................................................................................... 55
Woodward Page 3/275

Parameters ............................................................................................................................................ 56
Language / Clock Configuration .................................................................................................. 56
Display Configuration .................................................................................................................. 58
Enter Password ........................................................................................................................... 59
System Management................................................................................................................... 60
System Management: Password System ................................................................................... 61
Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 62
CHAPTER 4. OPERATION ...................................................................................................... 118
Screen Structure .................................................................................................................................. 121
Navigation ............................................................................................................................................ 122
Alarm List ................................................................................................................................... 122
Parameter .................................................................................................................................. 122
Main Menu ................................................................................................................................. 124
Display Messages ................................................................................................................................ 129
Status Messages ....................................................................................................................... 129
Alarm Messages ........................................................................................................................ 130
Restoring Language Setting ................................................................................................................ 132
LS-51x (ToolKit) ................................................................................................................................... 133
Special ToolKit Screens ............................................................................................................ 134
CHAPTER 5. APPLICATION ................................................................................................... 136
Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 136
Application Modes LS-5 ............................................................................................................ 136
Application Modes easYgen-3400/3500 Interacting With LS-5 ................................................. 138
Correlation Application Modes easYgen3500/3400 And LS-5 .................................................. 143
LS-5 Standalone Application ............................................................................................................... 144
Application Mode: Single LS5 | ........................................................................................ 144
LS-5 Series & easYgen-3400/500 Applications .................................................................................. 145
General ...................................................................................................................................... 145
The LS-5 Runs As A Slave Unit (Mode L-MCB ; Mode L-GGB ) ......................... 146
The LS-5 runs as independent unit (Mode LS5 )............................................................ 155
CHAPTER 6. INTERFACE ....................................................................................................... 179
Interfaces Overview ............................................................................................................................. 179
CAN Interface ............................................................................................................................ 180
Serial Interfaces......................................................................................................................... 181
Protocols Overview .............................................................................................................................. 182
CANopen ................................................................................................................................... 182
Modbus ...................................................................................................................................... 184
CHAPTER 7. TECHNICAL DATA ............................................................................................. 187
Environmental Data ............................................................................................................................. 190
Accuracy .............................................................................................................................................. 191
APPENDIX A. USEFUL INFORMATION ..................................................................................... 192
Connecting 24 V Relays ...................................................................................................................... 192
APPENDIX B. MISCELLANEOUS ............................................................................................ 194
Alarm Classes ...................................................................................................................................... 194
Page 4/275 Woodward

APPENDIX C. LOGICSMANAGER ........................................................................................... 195

Logical Symbols ................................................................................................................................... 196
Logical Outputs .................................................................................................................................... 197
Logical Outputs: Internal Flags .................................................................................................. 197
Logical Outputs: LS-5 Flags ...................................................................................................... 197
Logical Outputs: Internal Functions ........................................................................................... 198
Logical Outputs: Relay Outputs ................................................................................................. 199
Logical Command Variables ................................................................................................................ 200
Logical Command Variables: Group 00: Flags Condition 1....................................................... 201
Logical Command Variables: Group 01: Alarm System ............................................................ 202
Logical Command Variables: Group 02: Systems Condition..................................................... 203
Logical Command Variables: Group 04: Applications Condition ............................................... 204
Logical Command Variables: Group 05: Device Related Alarms .............................................. 205
Logical Command Variables: Group 06: System B Related Alarms ......................................... 205
Logical Command Variables: Group 07: System A Related Alarms ......................................... 205
Logical Command Variables: Group 08: System Related Alarms ............................................. 205
Logical Command Variables: Group 09: Discrete Inputs........................................................... 206
Logical Command Variables: Group 11: Clock and Timer ........................................................ 206
Logical Command Variables: Group 13: Discrete Outputs ........................................................ 206
Logical Command Variables: Group 24: Flags condition 2 ....................................................... 207
Logical Command Variables: Group 26: Flags of LS5 (33 to 48) .............................................. 207
Logical Command Variables: Group 27: Flags of LS5 (49 to 64) .............................................. 209
Logical Command Variables: Group 28: LS5 system conditions .............................................. 210
Logical Command Variables: Group 29: Commands of EG (1 to 16) ....................................... 210
Logical Command Variables: Group 30: Commands of EG (17 to 32) ..................................... 212
Factory Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 214
APPENDIX D. DATA PROTOCOLS .......................................................................................... 218
Modbus ...................................................................................................................................... 218
CAN Bus .................................................................................................................................... 242
APPENDIX E. EVENT HISTORY .............................................................................................. 255
Resetting the Event History ....................................................................................................... 255
APPENDIX F. PARAMETER LIST ............................................................................................ 257
Introduction........................................................................................................................................... 257
Parameter List Columns ............................................................................................................ 257
Parameter............................................................................................................................................. 258
APPENDIX G. SERVICE OPTIONS .......................................................................................... 270
Product Service Options ...................................................................................................................... 270
Returning Equipment For Repair ......................................................................................................... 270
Packing A Control ...................................................................................................................... 271
Return Authorization Number RAN ............................................................................................ 271
Replacement Parts ............................................................................................................................... 271
How To Contact Woodward ................................................................................................................. 272
Engineering Services ........................................................................................................................... 273
Technical Assistance ........................................................................................................................... 274
Woodward Page 5/275

Figures and Tables
Figures
Figure 2-1: Housing - panel-board cutout ................................................................................................................................. 14
Figure 2-2: Plastic housing LS-521 dimensions..................................................................................................................... 15
Figure 2-3: Plastic housing - drill plan ...................................................................................................................................... 17
Figure 2-4: Sheet metal housing LS-511 dimensions............................................................................................................. 18
Figure 2-5: Sheet metal housing - drill plan .............................................................................................................................. 18
Figure 2-6: LS-5 Series wiring diagram ................................................................................................................................. 19
Figure 2-7: Power supply .......................................................................................................................................................... 21
Figure 2-8: Power supply - crank waveform at maximum load ................................................................................................ 21
Figure 2-9: Voltage measuring system A ............................................................................................................................... 22
Figure 2-10: Voltage measuring system A windings, 3Ph 4W .............................................................................................. 23
Figure 2-11: Voltage measuring system A measuring inputs, 3Ph 4W .................................................................................. 23
Figure 2-16: Voltage measuring system A windings, 1Ph 2W (phase-neutral)...................................................................... 26
Figure 2-17: Voltage measuring system A measuring inputs, 1Ph 2W (phase-neutral) ......................................................... 26
Figure 2-18: Voltage measuring system A windings, 1Ph 2W (phase-phase)........................................................................ 27
Figure 2-19: Voltage measuring system A measuring inputs, 1Ph 2W (phase-phase) ........................................................... 27
Figure 2-20: Voltage measuring system B ............................................................................................................................. 28
Figure 2-21: Voltage measuring system B PT windings, 3Ph 4W ......................................................................................... 29
Figure 2-22: Voltage measuring system B measuring inputs, 3Ph 4W .................................................................................. 29
Figure 2-24: Voltage measuring system B measuring inputs, 3Ph 3W .................................................................................. 30
Figure 2-26: Voltage measuring - mains system B measuring inputs, 1Ph 3W ........................................................................ 31
Figure 2-27: Voltage measuring system B PT windings, 1Ph 2W (phase-neutral) ................................................................ 32
Figure 2-28: Voltage measuring system B measuring inputs, 1Ph 2W (phase-neutral) ......................................................... 32
Figure 2-29: Voltage measuring system B PT windings, 1Ph 2W (phase-phase) .................................................................. 33
Figure 2-30: Voltage measuring system B measuring inputs, 1Ph 2W (phase-phase) ........................................................... 33
Figure 2-31: Current measuring System A............................................................................................................................. 34
Figure 2-32: Current measuring system A, L1 L2 L3 ............................................................................................................ 35
Figure 2-33: Current measuring system A, phase Lx ............................................................................................................. 35
Figure 2-34: Power measuring - direction of power ................................................................................................................. 36
Figure 2-35: Discrete inputs - alarm/control input - positive signal .......................................................................................... 38
Figure 2-36: Discrete inputs - alarm/control input - negative signal ......................................................................................... 38
Figure 2-37: Discrete inputs - alarm/control inputs - operation logic ....................................................................................... 39
Figure 2-38: Relay outputs........................................................................................................................................................ 40
Figure 2-39: RS-485 - connection for half-duplex operation .................................................................................................... 42
Figure 2-40: RS-232 interface - overview................................................................................................................................. 42
Figure 2-41: Interfaces - CAN bus - termination ...................................................................................................................... 44
Figure 2-42: Interfaces shielding (external RC element) ....................................................................................................... 45
Figure 3-1: ToolKit - visualization screen ................................................................................................................................ 54
Figure 3-2: ToolKit - analog value trending screen .................................................................................................................. 54
Figure 3-3: ToolKit - configuration screen ............................................................................................................................... 55
Figure 3-4: Monitoring - phase shift ......................................................................................................................................... 84
Figure 3-5: Interfaces - Principle of RPDO mapping .............................................................................................................. 107
Figure 3-6: Interfaces - Principle of TPDO mapping .............................................................................................................. 108
Figure 4-1: Front panel and display ........................................................................................................................................ 118
Figure 4-2: Screen structure .................................................................................................................................................... 121
Figure 4-3: Front panel and display ........................................................................................................................................ 132
Figure 4-4: LS-51x front panel ............................................................................................................................................ 133
Figure 4-5: ToolKit screen states easYgen........................................................................................................................... 134
Figure 4-6: ToolKit screen states LS-5 ................................................................................................................................ 135
Figure 5-1: Application mode Single LS5 ........................................................................................................................... 144
Figure 5-2: Single or multiple easYgen with one external operated MCB.............................................................................. 146
Figure 5-3: Multiple easYgen with one GGB and one external operated MCB ...................................................................... 148
Figure 5-4: Multiple easYgen with one external operated GGB in isolated operation ............................................................ 150
Figure 5-5: Multiple easYgen with one external operated GGB and one external operated MCB.......................................... 152
Figure 5-6: Example ToolKit: Configure AMF start segments by clicking on the segment number ...................................... 158
Page 6/275 Woodward

Figure 5-7: LogicsManager system - easYgen information transport to LS-5 ........................................................................ 159
Figure 5-8: LogicsManager system LS-5 information transport to LS-5 and easYgen ........................................................ 160
Figure 5-9: Application H-Configuration with two easYgen and two incoming mains and tie-breaker .............................. 161
Figure 5-10: Application Multiple Mains/Generator with two easYgen and two incoming mains and different tie-breaker 168
Figure 6-1: Interface ovierview ............................................................................................................................................... 179
Figure 6-2: CAN interface 1 ................................................................................................................................................... 180
Figure 6-3: RS-232 interface ................................................................................................................................................... 181
Figure 6-4: RS-485 interface ................................................................................................................................................... 181
Figure 6-5: Visualization configurations................................................................................................................................. 185
Figure 7-1: Interference suppressing circuit - connection ....................................................................................................... 192
Figure 7-2: LogicsManager - function overview .................................................................................................................... 195
Figure 7-3: LogicsManager - display in ToolKit .................................................................................................................... 196
Figure 7-4: LogicsManager - display on LCD screen ............................................................................................................. 196
Woodward Page 7/275

Tables
Table 1-1: Manual - overview ................................................................................................................................................... 10
Table 2-1: Plastic housing - panel cutout .................................................................................................................................. 14
Table 2-2: Conversion chart - wire size .................................................................................................................................... 20
Table 2-3: Power supply - terminal assignment ........................................................................................................................ 21
Table 2-4: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system A voltage ................................................................................ 22
Table 2-5: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system A, 3Ph 4W .............................................................................. 23
Table 2-8: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system A, 1Ph 2W (phase-neutral) ..................................................... 26
Table 2-9: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system A, 1Ph 2W (phase-phase) ....................................................... 27
Table 2-10: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system B voltage .............................................................................. 28
Table 2-11: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system B, 3Ph 4W ............................................................................ 29
Table 2-14: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system B, 1Ph 2W (phase-neutral) ................................................... 32
Table 2-15: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system B, 1Ph 2W (phase-phase) ..................................................... 33
Table 2-16: Current measuring - terminal assignment system A current ............................................................................... 34
Table 2-17: Current measuring - terminal assignment system A, L1 L2 L3 .......................................................................... 35
Table 2-18: Current measuring - terminal assignment system A, phase Lx ........................................................................... 35
Table 2-19: Power measuring - terminal assignment ................................................................................................................ 36
Table 2-20: Discrete input - terminal assignment ..................................................................................................................... 38
Table 2-21: Relay outputs - terminal assignment ...................................................................................................................... 40
Table 2-22: RS-485 interface - pin assignment ......................................................................................................................... 42
Table 2-23: RS-232 interface (DPC) - pin assignment.............................................................................................................. 42
Table 2-24: CAN bus - pin assignment ..................................................................................................................................... 43
Table 2-25: Maximum CAN bus length .................................................................................................................................... 44
Table 2-26: Bus shielding ......................................................................................................................................................... 45
Table 3-1: Daylight saving time - configuration example ......................................................................................................... 58
Table 3-2: Daylight saving time - examplary dates................................................................................................................... 58
Table 3-3: Calculation of the phase angle deviation ................................................................................................................. 69
Table 3-4: Discrete inputs - parameter IDs ............................................................................................................................... 74
Table 3-5: Relay outputs - assignment ...................................................................................................................................... 75
Table 3-6: Discrete outputs - parameter IDs ............................................................................................................................. 75
Table 3-7: Internal flags - parameter IDs ................................................................................................................................ 113
Table 3-8: LS5 flags - parameter IDs ...................................................................................................................................... 113
Table 3-9: LED flags - parameter IDs ..................................................................................................................................... 114
Table 4-1: Measuring values ................................................................................................................................................... 120
Table 4-2: Message IDs for discrete inputs ............................................................................................................................. 131
Table 4-3: Icons states easYgen ........................................................................................................................................... 134
Table 4-4: Icons states LS-5................................................................................................................................................. 135
Table 6-1: Transfer syntax for data type UNSIGNEDn .......................................................................................................... 183
Table 6-2: Transfer syntax for data type INTEGERn ............................................................................................................. 183
Table 6-3: Address range ........................................................................................................................................................ 184
Table 6-4: Address range block read ...................................................................................................................................... 185
Table 6-5: Address calculation ............................................................................................................................................... 186
Table 6-6: Data types .............................................................................................................................................................. 186
Table 7-1: Interference suppressing circuit for relays ............................................................................................................. 193
Table 7-2: LogicsManager - command overview ................................................................................................................... 195
Table 7-3: LogicsManager - logical symbols.......................................................................................................................... 196
Table 7-4: Relay outputs - terminal assignment ...................................................................................................................... 199
Table 7-5: Load share message - example .............................................................................................................................. 251
Table 7-6: Load share line - max. length (32 participants) ..................................................................................................... 251
Table 7-7: Load share line - max. length (48 participants) ..................................................................................................... 252
Table 7-8: Event history - event list ........................................................................................................................................ 255
Page 8/275 Woodward

Glossary And List Of Abbreviations
CB Circuit Breaker
CL Code Level
CT Current Transformer
DI Discrete Input
DO Discrete (Relay) Output
ECU Engine Control Unit
FMI Failure Mode Indicator
GCB Generator Circuit Breaker
I Current
IOP Isolated Operation in Parallel
LDSS Load-Dependent Start/Stop operation
MCB Mains Circuit Breaker
MOP Mains Operation in Parallel
MPU Magnetic Pickup Unit
N.C. Normally Closed (break) contact
N.O. Normally Open (make) contact
OC Occurrence Count
P Real power
P/N Part Number
PF Power Factor
PF Power factor
PID Proportional Integral Derivative controller
PLC Programmable Logic Control
PT Potential (Voltage) Transformer
Q Reactive power
S Apparent power
S/N Serial Number
SPN Suspect Parameter Number
V Voltage
Woodward Page 9/275

Chapter 1.
General Information
Document Overview

This manual describes the LS-5 Series circuit breaker control.
Type English German
LS-5
LS-5 Series User Manual this manual 37527 -
easYgen-3400/3500 User Manual 37528 -
Table 1-1: Manual - overview
Intended Use The unit must only be operated in the manner described by this manual. The prerequisite for a
proper and safe operation of the product is correct transportation, storage, and installation as well as careful oper-
ation and maintenance.
NOTE
This manual has been developed for a unit fitted with all available options. Inputs/outputs, functions,
configuration screens, and other details described, which do not exist on your unit, may be ignored.
The present manual has been prepared to enable the installation and commissioning of the unit. Due to
the large variety of parameter settings, it is not possible to cover every combination. The manual is
therefore only a guide. In case of incorrect entries or a total loss of functions, the default settings may
be taken from the Parameter List which can be found in the appendix or from ToolKit and the respec-
tive *.SID file.
Page 10/275 Woodward

Chapter 2.
Installation
Electrostatic Discharge Awareness

All electronic equipment is static-sensitive, some components more than others. To protect these components
from static damage, you must take special precautions to minimize or eliminate electrostatic discharges.
Follow these precautions when working with or near the control.
1. Before doing maintenance on the electronic control, discharge the static electricity on your body to ground
by touching and holding a grounded metal object (pipes, cabinets, equipment, etc.).
2. Avoid the build-up of static electricity on your body by not wearing clothing made of synthetic materials.
Wear cotton or cotton-blend materials as much as possible because these do not store static electric
charges as easily as synthetics.
3. Keep plastic, vinyl, and Styrofoam materials (such as plastic or Styrofoam cups, cigarette packages, cello-
phane wrappers, vinyl books or folders, plastic bottles, etc.) away from the control, modules, and work
area as much as possible.
4. Opening the control cover may void the unit warranty.

Do not remove the printed circuit board (PCB) from the control cabinet unless absolutely necessary. If you
must remove the PCB from the control cabinet, follow these precautions:
Ensure that the device is completely voltage-free (all connectors have to be disconnected).
Do not touch any part of the PCB except the edges.
Do not touch the electrical conductors, connectors, or components with conductive devices or with
bare hands.
When replacing a PCB, keep the new PCB in the plastic antistatic protective bag it comes in until you
are ready to install it. Immediately after removing the old PCB from the control cabinet, place it in the
antistatic protective bag.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to electronic components caused by improper handling, read and observe the pre-
cautions in Woodward manual 82715, Guide for Handling and Protection of Electronic Controls, Printed
Circuit Boards, and Modules.
Woodward Page 11/275

Marine Usage (Pending)

CAUTION
The following notes are very important for marine usage of the LS-5 circuit breaker control and have to
be followed.
Application
The LS-5 Series has no internally isolated power supply.
For marine applications an EMI filter (i.e. SCHAFFNER - FN 2070-3-06) must be connected ahead of the power
supply input.
To meet the functional safety requirements of the application, the rules of marine classification independent protec-
tive devices must be applied.

Housing Types

The controls of the LS-5 Series are available with two different housing types.
LS-511 - Sheet metal housing. Back panel mounting. LS-521 - Plastic housing with LCD display. Front
panel mounting.

Plastic Housing
Panel Cutout
Figure 2-1: Housing - panel-board cutout
Measure Description Tolerance

H Height Total 171 mm ---
h Panel cutout 138 mm + 1.0 mm
h' Housing dimension 136 mm
W Width Total 219 mm ---
w Panel cutout 186 mm + 1.1 mm
w' Housing dimension 184 mm
Depth Total 61 mm ---
Table 2-1: Plastic housing - panel cutout
The maximum permissible corner radius is 3.5 mm.

Refer to Figure 2-3 on page 17 for a cutout drawing.

Dimensions
Figure 2-2: Plastic housing LS-521 dimensions

Clamp Fastener Installation
For installation into a panel door with the fastening clamps, please proceed as follows:
1. Panel cutout
Cut out the panel according to the dimensions in Figure 2-1.
Note: It is not necessary to drill the holes if the fastening clamps are used.
2. Remove terminals
Loosen the wire connection terminal screws on the back of the unit and
remove the wire connection terminal strip if required.
3. Insert screws in clamps

Insert the four clamping screws into the clamp inserts from the shown
side (opposite of the nut insert) until they are almost flush. Do not com-
pletely insert the screws into the clamp inserts.
4. Insert unit into cutout

Insert the unit into the panel cutout. Verify that the unit fits correctly in
the cutout. If the panel cutout is not big enough, enlarge it accordingly.
5. Attach clamp inserts
Re-install the clamp inserts by tilting the insert to a 45 angle. (1) Insert
the nose of the insert into the slot on the side of the housing. (2) Raise the
clamp insert so that it is parallel to the control panel.
6. Tighten clamping screws

Tighten the clamping screws (1) until the control unit is secured to the
control panel (2). Over tightening of these screws may result in the clamp
inserts or the housing breaking. Do not exceed the recommended tighten-
ing torque of 0.1 Nm (0.9 pound-force inches).
7. Reattach terminals
Reattach the wire connection terminal strip (1) and secure them with the
side screws.

Screw Kit Installation
In order to enhance the protection of the front to IP 65, it is possible to fasten the unit with a screw kit instead of
the clamp fastener hardware.
Proceed as follows to install the unit using the screw kit:
1. Cut out the panel and drill the holes according to the dimensions in Figure 2-3.
2. Insert the unit into the panel cutout. Verify that the unit fits correctly in the cutout. If the panel cutout is
not big enough, enlarge it accordingly.
3. Insert the screws and tighten to 0.6 Nm (5.3 pound inches) of torque. Tighten the screws with a cross-
wise pattern to ensure even pressure distribution.
NOTE
If the thickness of the panel sheet exceeds 2.5 mm, be sure to use screws with a length of the panel
sheet thickness + 4 mm.
Figure 2-3: Plastic housing - drill plan

Sheet Metal Housing

Dimensions
Figure 2-4: Sheet metal housing LS-511 dimensions
Installation
The unit is to be mounted to the switch cabinet back using four screws with a maximum diameter of 6 mm. Drill
the holes according to the dimensions in Figure 2-5 (dimensions shown in mm).
Figure 2-5: Sheet metal housing - drill plan

Wiring Diagrams

Figure 2-6: LS-5 Series wiring diagram

Connections

WARNING
All technical data and ratings indicated in this chapter are not definite! Only the values indicated in
Chapter 7: Technical Data on page 187 are valid!
The following chart may be used to convert square millimeters [mm] to AWG and vice versa:
AWG mm AWG mm AWG mm AWG mm AWG mm AWG mm

30 0.05 21 0.38 14 2.5 4 25 3/0 95 600MCM 300
28 0.08 20 0.5 12 4 2 35 4/0 120 750MCM 400
26 0.14 18 0.75 10 6 1 50 300MCM 150 1000MCM 500
24 0.25 17 1.0 8 10 1/0 55 350MCM 185
22 0.34 16 1.5 6 16 2/0 70 500MCM 240
Table 2-2: Conversion chart - wire size

Power Supply

WARNING Protective Earth / Function Earth
Protective Earth (PE) / Function Earth must be connected to the unit to avoid the risk of electric shock.
The conductor providing the connection must have a wire larger than or equal to 2.5 mm (14 AWG).
The connection must be performed properly.
LS-52x: This function earth connection will be made using the screw-plug-terminal 55.
LS-51x: The function earth terminal 55 is not connected on the LS-51x with sheet metal housing. The
protective earth connection at the sheet metal housing must be used instead (refer to Figure 2-5 on
page 18).
Figure 2-7: Power supply

Figure Terminal Description Amax
A 55 Function earth (LS-52x models only) 2.5 mm
B 53 12/24Vdc (8 to 40.0 Vdc) 2.5 mm
C 54 0 Vdc 2.5 mm
Table 2-3: Power supply - terminal assignment
Figure 2-8: Power supply - crank waveform at maximum load
NOTE
Woodward recommends to use one of the following slow-acting protective devices in the supply line to
terminal 53:
Fuse NEOZED D01 6A or equivalent
or
Miniature Circuit Breaker 6A / Type C (for example: ABB type: S271C6 or equivalent)

Voltage Measuring

NOTE
DO NOT use both sets of voltage measuring inputs. The control unit will not measure voltage correctly
if the 120 V and 480 V inputs are utilized simultaneously.
NOTE
Woodward recommends protecting the voltage measuring inputs with slow-acting fuses rated for 2 to
6 A.
Voltage Measuring: System A
Figure 2-9: Voltage measuring system A

A 14 120 Vac 2.5 mm
System A Voltage L1
B 15 480 Vac 2.5 mm
C 16 120 Vac 2.5 mm
System A Voltage L2
D 17 480 Vac 2.5 mm
E 18 120 Vac 2.5 mm
System A Voltage L3
F 19 480 Vac 2.5 mm
G 20 120 Vac 2.5 mm
System A Voltage N
H 21 480 Vac 2.5 mm
Table 2-4: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system A voltage
NOTE
If parameter 1800 ("SyA. PT sec. rated voltage", refer to Chapter 3: Configuration is configured with a
value between 50 and 130 V, the 120 V input terminals must be used for proper measurement.
If parameter 1800 ("SyA. PT sec. rated voltage", refer to Chapter 3: Configuration is configured with a

Voltage Measuring: System A, Parameter Setting '3Ph 4W' (3-phase, 4-wire)
A L1 A L1
A1
A1 A2
A2 A5
A6
N C6 N B6
C2 B2 C5 B5
C1 B1 C2 B2
C1 B1
B B
C L2 C L2
N N
L3 L3
A L1 A L1
C6 A1
A1 A5
C5 A2
A2 A6
N
N
C2 B6 C2 A5
C1 B5
C1 A6
C6 B2
C5 B1 B C B
C L2 L2
B6 B5 B2 B1
N L3
L3 N
Figure 2-10: Voltage measuring system A windings, 3Ph 4W
Figure 2-11: Voltage measuring system A measuring inputs, 3Ph 4W

3Ph 4W Wiring terminals Note
Rated voltage (range) [1] 120 V (50 to 130 Veff.) [5] 480 V (131 to 480 Veff.)
1
Measuring range (max.) [1] 0 to 150 Vac [5] 0 to 600 Vac
Figure A C E G B D F H
Terminal 14 16 18 20 15 17 19 21
Phase L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
Table 2-5: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system A, 3Ph 4W
1 For different voltage systems, different wiring terminals have to be used. Incorrect measurements are possible if both voltage systems use
the same N terminal.

A L1 A L1
C6 A1
C5 A2
C2 A1
C1 A2
C2 A5
C1 A6
B B
C L2 C L2
B2 B1 B6 B5 B2 B1
L3 L3

2
Terminal 14 16 18 20 15 17 19 21
Phase L1 L2 L3 --- L1 L2 L3 ---
2 For different voltage systems, different wiring terminals have to be used.


A L1
A1 A5
A2 A6
B5 C2 B1 C6
B6
N B5
B6 C1 B2 C5
B2
B1
C2
C C1
A L3
A1 A2 N A5 A6 C6
N C
C5
L3
L1 N

3
Terminal 14 16 18 20 15 17 19 21
Phase L1 N L3 N L1 N L3 N
NOTE
The 1-phase, 2-wire measurement may be performed phase-neutral or phase-phase. Please note to
configure and wire the LS-5 consistently. Refer to the Chapter 3: Configuration for more information.
'1Ph 2W' Phase-Neutral Measuring

L1
A
A1 B5
A2 B6
N
A N
A1 A2 A5 A6
N
L1 N
Figure 2-16: Voltage measuring system A windings, 1Ph 2W (phase-neutral)
Figure 2-17: Voltage measuring system A measuring inputs, 1Ph 2W (phase-neutral)

4
Terminal 14 16 18 20 15 17 19 21
Phase L1 N N N L1 N N N
Table 2-8: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system A, 1Ph 2W (phase-neutral)
'1Ph 2W' Phase-Phase Measuring

L1
A
A1 B5
A2 B6
B
A L2
A1 A2 A5 A6
B
L1 L2
Figure 2-18: Voltage measuring system A windings, 1Ph 2W (phase-phase)
Figure 2-19: Voltage measuring system A measuring inputs, 1Ph 2W (phase-phase)

5
Terminal 14 16 18 20 15 17 19 21
Phase L1 L2 --- --- L1 L2 --- ---
Table 2-9: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system A, 1Ph 2W (phase-phase)
Voltage Measuring: System B
Figure 2-20: Voltage measuring system B

A 22 120 Vac 2.5 mm
System B Voltage L1
B 23 480 Vac 2.5 mm
C 24 120 Vac 2.5 mm
System B Voltage L2
D 25 480 Vac 2.5 mm
E 26 120 Vac 2.5 mm
System B Voltage L3
F 27 480 Vac 2.5 mm
G 28 120 Vac 2.5 mm
System B Voltage N
H 29 480 Vac 2.5 mm
Table 2-10: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system B voltage
NOTE
If parameter 1803 ("SyB PT sec. rated voltage", refer to Chapter 3: Configuration) is configured with a
If parameter 1803 ("SyB PT sec. rated voltage", refer to Chapter 3: Configuration) is configured with a

Voltage Measuring: System B, Parameter Setting '3Ph 4W' (3-phase, 4-wire)
A L1 A L1
A1
A1 A2
A2 A5
A6
N C6 N B6
C2 B2 C5 B5
C1 B1 C2 B2
C1 B1
B B
C L2 C L2
N N
L3 L3
A L1 A L1
C6 A1
A1 A5
C5 A2
A2 A6
N
N
C2 B6 C2 A5
C1 B5
C1 A6
C6 B2
C5 B1 B C B
C L2 L2
B6 B5 B2 B1
N L3
L3 N
Figure 2-21: Voltage measuring system B PT windings, 3Ph 4W
Figure 2-22: Voltage measuring system B measuring inputs, 3Ph 4W

6
Terminal 22 24 26 28 23 25 27 29
Phase L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
Table 2-11: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system B, 3Ph 4W

A L1 A L1
C6 A1
C5 A2
C2 A1
C1 A2
C2 A5
C1 A6
B B
C L2 C L2
B2 B1 B6 B5 B2 B1
L3 L3
Figure 2-24: Voltage measuring system B measuring inputs, 3Ph 3W

7
Terminal 22 24 26 28 23 25 27 29
Phase L1 L2 L3 --- L1 L2 L3 ---
7 For different voltage systems, different wiring terminals have to be used.


A L1
A1 A5
A2 A6
B5 C2 B1 C6
B6
N B5
B6 C1 B2 C5
B2
B1
C2
C C1
A L3
A1 A2 N A5 A6 C6
N C
C5
L3
L1 N
Figure 2-26: Voltage measuring - mains system B measuring inputs, 1Ph 3W

8
Terminal 22 24 26 28 23 25 27 29
Phase L1 N L3 N L1 N L3 N
NOTE
The 1-phase, 2-wire measurement may be performed phase-neutral or phase-phase. Please note to
configure and wire the LS-5 consistently. Refer to the Chapter 3: Configuration for more information.
'1Ph 2W' Phase-Neutral Measuring

L1
A
A1 B5
A2 B6
N
A N
A1 A2 A5 A6
N
L1 N
Figure 2-27: Voltage measuring system B PT windings, 1Ph 2W (phase-neutral)
Figure 2-28: Voltage measuring system B measuring inputs, 1Ph 2W (phase-neutral)

9
Terminal 22 24 26 28 23 25 27 29
Phase L1 N N N L1 N N N
Table 2-14: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system B, 1Ph 2W (phase-neutral)
'1Ph 2W' Phase-Phase Measuring

L1
A
A1 B5
A2 B6
B
A L2
A1 A2 A5 A6
B
L1 L2
Figure 2-29: Voltage measuring system B PT windings, 1Ph 2W (phase-phase)
Figure 2-30: Voltage measuring system B measuring inputs, 1Ph 2W (phase-phase)

10
Terminal 22 24 26 28 23 25 27 29
Phase L1 L2 --- --- L1 L2 --- ---
Table 2-15: Voltage measuring - terminal assignment system B, 1Ph 2W (phase-phase)
Current Measuring

CAUTION
Before disconnecting the device, ensure that the current transformers/CT are short-circuited.
System A Current
NOTE
Generally, one line of the current transformers secondary is to be grounded close to the CT.
Figure 2-31: Current measuring System A

A 7 System A Current L3 2.5 mm
B 4 System A Current L3 (GND) 2.5 mm
C 6 System A Current L2 2.5 mm
D 4 System A Current L2 (GND) 2.5 mm
E 5 System A Current L1 2.5 mm
F 4 System A Current L1 (GND) 2.5 mm
Table 2-16: Current measuring - terminal assignment system A current

Current Measuring: System A, Parameter Setting 'L1 L2 L3'
Figure 2-32: Current measuring system A, L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3 Wiring terminals Notes
Terminal 4 5 4 6 4 7
Phase s1 (k) L1 s2 (l) L1 s1 (k) L2 s2 (l) L2 s1 (k) L3 s2 (l) L3
Table 2-17: Current measuring - terminal assignment system A, L1 L2 L3
Current Measuring: System A, Parameter Setting 'Phase L1', 'Phase L2' & 'Phase L3'
Phase L1 Phase L2 Phase L3

Figure 2-33: Current measuring system A, phase Lx
Wiring terminals Notes
Phase L1
Phase s1 (k) L1 s2 (l) L1 --- --- --- ---
Phase L2
Phase --- --- s1 (k) L2 s2 (l) L2 --- ---
Phase L3
Phase --- --- --- --- s1 (k) L3 s2 (l) L3
Phase L1 and L3 11
Phase s1 (k) L1 s2 (l) L1 --- --- s1 (k) L3 s2 (l) L3
Table 2-18: Current measuring - terminal assignment system A, phase Lx
11 This is valid if the generator voltage measurement is configured to 1Ph 3W (refer to

Voltage Measuring: System A, Parameter Setting '1Ph 3W' (1-phase, 3-wire) on page 20).
Power Measuring

If the unit's current transformers are wired according to the diagram shown, the following values are displayed.
Parameter Description Sign displayed

Positive real power Power flow from System B + Positive
to System A
Inductive (cos ) Inductive power flow from + Positive
System B to System A
Figure 2-34: Power measuring - direction of power

A 5 System A Current L1 2.5 mm
B 4 System A Current GND 2.5 mm
Table 2-19: Power measuring - terminal assignment
Power Factor Definition

The phasor diagram is used from the System B view. Power factor is defined as follows.
Power Factor is defined as a ratio of the real power to apparent power. In a purely resistive circuit, the voltage
and current waveforms are instep resulting in a ratio or power factor of 1.00 (often referred to as unity). In an in-
ductive circuit the current lags behind the voltage waveform resulting in usable power (real power) and unusable
power (reactive power). This results in a positive ratio or lagging power factor (i.e. 0.85lagging). In a capacitive
circuit the current waveform leads the voltage waveform resulting in usable power (real power) and unusable
power (reactive power). This results in a negative ratio or a leading power factor (i.e. 0.85leading).
Inductive: Electrical load whose current waveform Capacitive: Electrical load whose current waveform
lags the voltage waveform thus having a lagging pow- leads the voltage waveform thus having a leading
er factor. Some inductive loads such as electric motors power factor. Some capacitive loads such as capacitor
have a large startup current requirement resulting in banks or buried cable result in leading power factors.
lagging power factors.
Different power factor displays at the unit:
i0.91 (inductive) c0.93 (capacitive)

lg.91 (lagging) ld.93 (leading)
Reactive power display at the unit:
70 kvar (positive) -60 kvar (negative)
Output at the interface:
+ (positive) - (negative)
In relation to the voltage, the current is
lagging leading
The generator is
over excited under excited
Control: If the control unit is equipped with a power factor controller while in parallel with the utility:
A voltage lower "-" signal is output as long as the A voltage raise "+" signal is output as long as the
measured value is "more inductive" than the reference measured value is "more capacitive" than the refer-
setpoint ence setpoint
Example: measured = i0.91; setpoint = i0.95 Example: measured = c0.91; setpoint = c0.95
Phasor diagram:
inductive capacitive

Discrete Inputs

Discrete Inputs: Signal Polarity
The discrete inputs are electrically isolated which permits the polarity of the connections to be either positive or
negative.
NOTE
All discrete inputs must use the same polarity, either positive or negative signals, due to the common
ground.
Discrete Inputs: Positive Polarity Signal
Figure 2-35: Discrete inputs - alarm/control input - positive signal
Discrete Inputs: Negative Polarity Signal
Figure 2-36: Discrete inputs - alarm/control input - negative signal
Terminal Description Amax

Com. Term.
A B
44 Discrete input [DI 01] Lock monitoring *1 2.5 mm
*1
45 Discrete input [DI 02] Remote acknowledge 2.5 mm
43 46 Discrete input [DI 03] Enable decoupling *1 2.5 mm
47 Discrete input [DI 04] Immediate open CB A *1 2.5 mm
GND Reply: Isolation switch is
com- 48 Discrete input [DI 05] 2.5 mm
open *1
mon Open CB A
ground 49 Discrete input [DI 06] 2.5 mm
(with unloading) *1
50 Discrete input [DI 07] Enable to close CB A *1 2.5 mm
51 Discrete input [DI 08] Reply: CB A is open 2.5 mm
Table 2-20: Discrete input - terminal assignment
*1 = default value / configurable via LogicsManager

Discrete Inputs: Operation Logic

Discrete inputs may be configured to normally open (N.O.) or normally closed (N.C.) states. In the state N.O., no
potential is present during normal operation; if an alarm is issued or control operation is performed, the input is
energized. In the state N.C., a potential is continuously present during normal operation; if an alarm is issued or
control operation is performed, the input is de-energized.
The N.O. or N.C. contacts may be connected to the signal terminal as well as to the ground terminal of the dis-
crete input. See previous chapter Discrete Inputs: Signal on page 38 for details.
Figure 2-37: Discrete inputs - alarm/control inputs - operation logic

Relay Outputs
(LogicsManager)

Figure 2-38: Relay outputs

A C Form A, N.O. make contact Type

Fixed to
30 31 Relay output [R 01] N.O. 2.5 mm
Ready for operation
32 33 Relay output [R 02] Preconfigured to Horn SW 2.5 mm
Preconfigured to
34 35 Relay output [R 03] SW 2.5 mm
System B not OK
Preconfigured to
36 37 Relay output [R 04] SW 2.5 mm
System A not OK
A B C Form C, N.O. make contact, N.C. Type
Fixed to
38 39 40 Relay output [R 05] SW 2.5 mm
Open CB A
A C Form A, N.O. make contact Type

Fixed to Close CB A
in [CB A: Two relay]
mode
41 42 Relay output [R 06] N.O. 2.5 mm
otherwise
Preconfigured to
All alarm classes
LogicsManager.using the function LogicsManager it is possible to freely program the relays
All application modes

SW Switchable via software
N.O. Normally open (make) contact
Table 2-21: Relay outputs - terminal assignment

CAUTION
The discrete output "Ready for operation OFF" must be integrated into the alarm chain to make sure
that if this relay falls off and an appropriate action can be taken.
NOTE
Refer to Appendix A: Connecting 24 V Relays on page 192 for interference suppressing circuits when
connecting 24 V relays.

Interfaces

RS-485 Serial Interface

58 RS-485-B (TxD-) 2.5 mm
59 RS-485-A (TxD+) 2.5 mm
Table 2-22: RS-485 interface - pin assignment
RS-485 Half-Duplex
Figure 2-39: RS-485 - connection for half-duplex operation
Service Port (RS-232)
The optional Woodward Direct Configuration Cable (DPC) must be connected to the Service Port. The DPC
adapter has a single RS-232 interface which is used for the configuration setup of the LS-5 Series. (refer to DPC
- Direct Configuration Cable on page 46)
Figure 2-40: RS-232 interface - overview

1 not connected N/A
2 RxD (receive data) N/A
3 TxD (transmit data) N/A
4 not connected N/A
5 GND (system ground) N/A
6 not connected N/A
7 RTS (request to send) N/A
8 CTS (clear to send) N/A
9 not connected N/A
Table 2-23: RS-232 interface (DPC) - pin assignment

CAN Bus Interface

56 CAN-L 2.5 mm
57 CAN-H 2.5 mm
Table 2-24: CAN bus - pin assignment

CAN Bus Topology
NOTE
Please note that the CAN bus must be terminated with a resistor, which corresponds to the impedance
of the cable (e.g. 120 Ohms, 1/4 W) at both ends. The termination resistor is connected between CAN-H
and CAN-L.
Figure 2-41: Interfaces - CAN bus - termination
Troubleshooting Possible CAN Bus Problems
If data is not transmitting on the CAN bus, check the following for common CAN bus communication problems:
A T-structure bus is utilized

CAN-L and CAN-H are interchanged
Not all devices on the bus are using identical Baud rates
Terminating resistor(s) missing
The configured baud rate is too high for bus length
The CAN bus cable is routed in close proximity with power cables
Woodward recommends the use of shielded, twisted-pair cables for the CAN bus (i.e.: Lappkabel Unitronic
LIYCY (TP) 220.25, UNITRONIC-Bus LD 220.22).
Maximum CAN Bus Length
The maximum length of the communication bus wiring is dependent on the configured Baud rate. Refer to Table
2-25 for the maximum bus length (Source: CANopen; Holger Zeltwanger (Hrsg.); 2001 VDE VERLAG GMBH,
Berlin und Offenbach; ISBN 3-8007-2448-0).
Baud rate Max. length

1000 kbit/s 25 m
800 kbit/s 50 m
500 kbit/s 100 m
250 kbit/s 250 m
125 kbit/s 500 m
50 kbit/s 1000 m
20 kbit/s 2500 m
Table 2-25: Maximum CAN bus length
The maximum specified length for the communication bus wiring might not be achieved if poor quality wire is
utilized, there is high contact resistance, or other conditions exist. Reducing the baud rate may overcome these is-
sues.

NOTE
When you are using 20 kbit/s or 50 kbit/s together with Toolkit, we recommend to set Parameter 9921
Transfer rate fast message to 0,30 s.
Bus Shielding
The table below gives a detailed overview how the different interfaces needs to be shielded.
Device Interface Shielding

LS-5 Series CAN bus External RC element
Table 2-26: Bus shielding
Figure 2-42: Interfaces shielding (external RC element)

DPC - Direct Configuration Cable
The LS-5 provides a Service Port for connecting a computer via the DPC (direct configuration cable). The confi-
guration interface is the RJ45 socket on the side of the LS-5 housing.
NOTE
The connection cable delivered with the DPC must be used between DPC and LS-5 to ensure proper
functionality of the LS-5. An extension or utilization of different cable types for the connection between
LS-5 and DPC may result a malfunction of the LS-5. This may possibly result in damage to components
of the system. If an extension of the data connection line is required, only the serial cable (RS-232) be-
tween DPC and laptop/PC may be extended. It is recommended to use an industry standard cable for
this.
NOTE
For a continuous operation with the direct configuration cable DPC (e.g. remote control of the LS-5), it
is required to use at least revision F (P/N 5417-557 Rev. F) of the DPC. When using a DPC of an earlier
revision, problems may occur in continuous operation. It is recommended to use an industry standard
serial (RS-232) cable to connect the DPC with the laptop/PC for continuous operation. The shield con-
nector (6.3mm tab connector) at the DPC of revision F (P/N 5417-557 Rev. F) and above must be con-
nected to ground.

Chapter 3.
Configuration
Configuration Via Front Panel

Operation of the unit via the front panel is explained in Chapter 4: Operation. This chapter will familiarize you
with the unit, the meanings/functions of the buttons, and the display.

Configuration Via PC

Install ToolKit Configuration and Visualization Software
NOTE
Woodwards ToolKit software is required to configure the unit via PC.
ToolKit Version 3.5.3 or higher
Install ToolKit Software

1. Please insert the enclosed Product CD in the CD-ROM drive of your computer
2. The CD is going to start automatically (autostart function needs to be activated)
3. Please go to the section Software and follow the instructions described there
Alternatively ToolKit can be downloaded from our Website. Please proceed as follows:
1. Go to http://www.woodward.com/software
2. Select ToolKit in the list and click the Go button
3. Click More Info to get further information about ToolKit
4. Choose the preferred software version and click Download
5. Now you need to login with your e-mail address or register first
6. The download will start immediatly
Minimum system requirements for ToolKit:
Microsoft Windows 7, Vista, XP (32- & 64-bit)

Microsoft .NET Framework Ver. 3.5
600 MHz Pentium CPU
96 MB of RAM
Minimum 800 by 600 pixel screen with 256 colors
Serial Port
CD-ROM drive
NOTE
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 must be installed on your computer to be able to install ToolKit. If not al-
ready installed, Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 will be installed automatically. You must be connected
to the internet for this. Alternatively you can use the .NET Framework 3.5 installer which can be found
on the Product CD.

Install ToolKit Configuration Files

1. Please insert the enclosed Product CD in the CD-ROM drive of your computer
2. The CD is going to start automatically (autostart function needs to be activated)
3. Please go to the section Configuration Files and follow the instructions described there
Alternatively ToolKit configuration files can be downloaded from our Website. Please proceed as follows:
1. Go to http://www.woodward.com/software/configfiles/
2. Please insert the part number (P/N) and revision of your device into the corresponding fields
3. Select ToolKit in the application type list
4. Click Search
NOTE
ToolKit is using the following files:
*.WTOOL
1 2
File name composition: [P/N1]* -[Revision]_[Language ID]_[P/N2]* -[Revision]_[# of visualized
gens].WTOOL
Example file name: 8440-1234-NEW_US_5418-1234-NEW.WTOOL
Content of the file: Display screens and pages for online configuration, which are associated with
the respective *.SID file
*.SID
2
File name composition: [P/N2]* -[Revision].SID
Example file name: 5418-1234-NEW.SID
Content of the file: All display and configuration parameters available in ToolKit
*.WSET
File name composition: [user defined].WSET
Example file name: easYgen_settings.WSET
Content of the file: Default settings of the ToolKit configuration parameters provided by the SID
file or user-defined settings read out of the unit.
1
* P/N1 = Part number of the unit
2
* P/N2 = Part number of the software in the unit

Starting ToolKit Software

1. Start ToolKit via Windows Start menu -> Programs ->Woodward -> ToolKit 3.x
2. Please press the button Open Tool
3. Go to the Application folder and open then the folder equal to the part number (P/N) of your device
(e.g. 8440-1234). Select the wtool file (e.g. 8440-1234-NEW_US_5418-1234-NEW.wtool) and click
Open to start the configuration file
4. Now the home page of the ToolKit configuration screen appears

Configure ToolKit Software

1. Start the configuration by using the toolbar. Please go to Tools -> Options
2. The options window will be displayed
a. Adjust the default locations of the configuration files

b. The displayed language can be selected here
3. The changes become effective after clicking OK
NOTE
Please use the ToolKit online help for further information.

Connect ToolKit and the LS-5 Unit

For configuration of the unit via ToolKit please proceed as follows:
1. Connect the null modem communications cable between your laptop/PC and the DPC cable. Plug the
null modem cable into the RS-232 serial port of the DPC cable and the other side to a serial COM port
of the laptop/PC. If the laptop/PC does not have a serial port to connect the null modem cable to, use a
USB to serial adapter. Now connect the DPC cable to the LS-5.
2. Open ToolKit via Windows Start menu -> Programs -> Woodward -> ToolKit 3.x
3. From the main ToolKit window, click File then select Open Tool..., or click the Open Tool icon
on the tool bar.
4. Locate and select the desired tool file (*.WTOOL) in the ToolKit data file directory and click Open.
5. From the main ToolKit window, click Device then click Connect, or select the Connect icon on
the toolbar.
6. The connect dialog window will open if the option is enabled.
a. Select the COM port that is connected to the communication cable.

b. Click the Connect button.
7. The identifier of the device that ToolKit is connected to, will display in the status bar.
8. If the Communications window opens, select ToolConfigurator under Tool Device and close the
Communications window.
9. If the device is security enabled, the Login dialog will appear.

10. Now you are able to edit the LS-5 parameters in the main window. Any changes made are written to the
control memory automatically.

SID Files for Using ToolKit on the CAN Bus With Other CANopen Devices
If a PC with ToolKit is connected to the LS-5 via a CAN bus with other external CANopen devices (like a Phoe-
nix Contact I/O expansion board, for example), it may happen that ToolKit cannot establish a connection with the
LS-5 because it looks for a SID file for such an external device, which does not exist.
A special *.sid file can be created in this case. Contact Woodward for support or create a *.sid file with the fol-
lowing content:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>

<ServiceInterfaceDefinition xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" Identifier="[add the
required device application name here]" Specification="EmptyFile">
</ServiceInterfaceDefinition>
The file name must be the same as the Identifier plus the extension *.sid. The file must be stored to the confi-
gured SID file directory.
NOTE
Depending on the computer used and the installed operation system, problems with the communica-
tion via an infrared connection may occur.
NOTE
If your computer is equipped with a Bluetooth interface please deactivate it temporarily in the Windows
system control menu in the case that ToolKit is freezing building up a connection.
NOTE
It is also possible to connect to the unit via CAN bus. If a suitable CAN adapter is used, this may be se-
lected in the Connect window. We recommend to use the IXXAT USB-to-CAN converter using the VCI
V3 driver.
Be sure to configure the correct baud rate and timeout in the Properties dialog of the Connect window.
The Password for CAN Interface 1 (parameter 10402 on page 59) must be entered before being able to
edit the parameters.

View LS-5 Data with ToolKit

The following figure shows an example visualization screen of ToolKit:
Figure 3-1: ToolKit - visualization screen
Navigation through the various visualization and configuration screens is performed by clicking on
the and icons, by selecting a navigation button (e.g. ), or by selecting a screen from the drop-down
list to the right of the arrow icons.
It is possible to view a trend chart of up to eight values with the trending tool utility of ToolKit. The following
figure shows a trending screen of the measured battery voltage value:
Figure 3-2: ToolKit - analog value trending screen
Each visualization screen provides for trending of monitored values by right-clicking on a value and selecting the
"Add to trend" function. Trending is initiated by clicking on the Start button. Clicking the Export button will
save the trend data to a Comma Separated Values (CSV) file for viewing, editing or printing with office software,
like Microsoft Excel, etc. The Properties button is used to define high and low limits of the scale, sample rate,
displayed time span and color of the graph.

Configure the LS-5 with ToolKit

The following figure shows an example configuration screen of ToolKit:
Figure 3-3: ToolKit - configuration screen
Entering a new value or selecting a value from a defined list will change the value in a field. The new value is
written to the controller memory by changing to a new field or pressing the Enter key.
Navigation through the various configuration and visualization screens is performed by clicking on the
and icons, by selecting a navigation button (e.g. ), or by selecting a screen from the drop-down list to
the right of the arrow icons.

Parameters

To all parameters are assigned unique Parameter Identification Numbers (ID). The parameter identification
number may be used to reference individual parameters listed in this manual. This parameter identification num-
ber is also displayed in the ToolKit configuration screens next to the respective parameter.
Language / Clock Configuration
The following parameters are used to set the unit language, the current date and time, and the daylight saving
time feature.
NOTE
If an Asian language is configured, some parameter screens may be displayed with an empty space at
the bottom of the parameter list, which may be interpreted as an end of the list, although more parame-
ters exist and are displayed when scrolling down.
ID Parameter CL Setting range Default Description
1700 Language 0 Deutsch / Englisch The desired language for the unit display text is configured here.
English /
Chinese /
Portugus /
Japanese /
Russky /
Trke /
Espaol /
Franais /
Italiano /
Polski /
1710 Hour 0 0 to 23 h 0 The hour of the clock time is set here. Example:
0: 0th hour of the day (midnight).
23: 23rd hour of the day (11 pm).
1709 Minute 0 0 to 59 min - The minute of the clock time is set here. Example:
0: 0th minute of the hour.
1708 Second 0 0 to 59 s - The second of the clock time is set here. Example:
0: 0th second of the minute.
1698 Transfer time 0 Yes / No No Yes: Adjusted time will be transfered to the unit.
to clock No: Adjusted time will be not transfered to the unit.
NOTE: This parameter may only be configured using ToolKit.

1711 Day 0 1 to 31 - The day of the date is set here. Example:
1: 1st day of the month.
1712 Month 0 1 to 12 - The month of the date is set here. Example:
1: 1st month of the year.
12: 12th month of the year.
1713 Year 0 0 to 99 - The year of the date is set here. Example:
0: Year 2000.
99: Year 2099.
1699 Transfer date 0 Yes / No No Yes: Adjusted date will be transfered to the unit.
to clock No: Adjusted date will be not transfered to the unit.

The daylight saving time feature enables to automatically adjust the real-time clock to local daylight saving time
(DST) provisions. If daylight saving time is enabled, the real-time clock will automatically be advanced by one
hour when the configured DST begin date and time is reached and falls back again by one hour when the confi-
gured DST end date and time is reached. If the unit is used in the southern hemisphere, the DST function will be
inverted automatically, if the DST begin month is later in the year than the DST end month.
NOTE
Do not change the time manually during the hour of the automatic time change if DST is enabled to
avoid a wrong time setting.
Events or alarms, which occur during this hour might have a wrong time stamp.
NOTE
The following parameters will only be displayed, if Daylight saving time (parameter 4591) has been con-
figured to On and the enter button has been pressed.
4591 Daylight 2 On / Off Off Enables the daylight saving time.

saving time On: Daylight saving time is enabled.
Off: Daylight saving time is disabled.
4594 DST begin 2 0 to 23 h 2 The real-time clock will be advanced by one hour when this time is
time reached on the DST begin date. Example:
4598 DST begin 2 Sunday / Sunday The weekday for the DST begin date is configured here.
weekday Monday /
Tuesday /
Wednesday /
Thursday /
Friday /
Saturday
4592 DST begin 2 1st / Last The order number of the weekday for the DST begin date is confi-
nth weekday 2nd / gured here. Example:
3rd / 1st: DST starts on the 1st configured weekday of the DST begin
4th / month.
Last / 2nd: DST starts on the 2nd configured weekday of the DST begin
LastButOne / month.
LastButTwo / 3rd: DST starts on the 3rd configured weekday of the DST begin
LastButThree month.
4th: DST starts on the 4th configured weekday of the DST begin
month.
Last: DST starts on the last configured weekday of the DST begin
month.
LastButOne: DST starts on the last but one configured weekday
of the DST begin month.
LastButTwo: DST starts on the last but two configured weekday
of the DST begin month.
LastButThree: DST starts on the last but three configured week-
day of the DST begin month.
4593 DST begin 2 1 to 12 3 The month for the DST begin date is configured here. Example:
month 1: 1st month of the year.
4597 DST end 2 0 to 23 3 The real-time clock will fall back by one hour when this time is
time reached on the DST end date. Example:
4599 DST end 2 Sunday / Sunday The weekday for the DST end date is configured here.
weekday Monday /
Tuesday /
Wednesday /
Thursday /
Friday /
Saturday

4595 DST end nth 2 1st / Last The order number of the weekday for the DST end date is confi-
weekday 2nd / gured here. Example:
3rd / 1st: DST ends on the 1st configured weekday of the DST end
4th / month.
Last / 2nd: DST ends on the 2nd configured weekday of the DST end
LastButOne / month.
LastButTwo / 3rd: DST ends on the 3rd configured weekday of the DST end
LastButThree month.
4th: DST ends on the 4th configured weekday of the DST end
month.
Last: DST ends on the last configured weekday of the DST end
month.
LastButOne: DST ends on the last but one configured weekday
of the DST end month.
LastButTwo: DST ends on the last but two configured weekday
of the DST end month.
LastButThree: DST ends on the last but three configured week-
day of the DST end month.
4596 DST end 2 1 to 12 10 The month for the DST end date is configured here. Example:
month 1: 1st month of the year.
Example:
If daylight saving time starts at 2:00 am on the 2nd Sunday in March and ends at 2:00 am on the 1st Sunday in No-
vember, the unit has to be configured like shown in Table 3-1 to enable an automatic change to daylight saving
time and back to standard time.
ID Parameter Setting
4591 Daylight saving time On
4594 DST begin time 2
4598 DST begin weekday Sunday
4592 DST begin nth weekday 2nd
4593 DST begin month 3
4597 DST end time 2
4599 DST end weekday Sunday
4595 DST end sunday 1st
4596 DST end month 11
Table 3-1: Daylight saving time - configuration example
USA, Canada European Union

Year DST Begins 2 a.m. DST Ends 3 a.m. DST Begins 1 a.m. DST Ends 2 a.m.
(Second Sunday in (First Sunday in Novem- UTC=GMT UTC=GMT
March) ber) (Last Sunday in March) (Last Sunday in October)
2008 March 9, 2008 November 2, 2008 March 30, 2008 October 26, 2008
Table 3-2: Daylight saving time - examplary dates
Display Configuration
The contrast of the display may be adjusted using this screen.

Enter Password
The LS-5 Series utilizes a password protected multi-level configuration access hierarchy. This permits varying
degrees of access to the parameters being granted by assigning unique passwords to designated personnel. A dis-
tinction is made between the access levels as follows:
Code level CL0 (User Level) Standard password = none

This code level permits for monitoring of the system and limited access to the parameters. Configuration of the
control is not permitted. Only the parameters for setting the language, the date, the time, and the horn reset time
are accessible. The unit powers up in this code level.
Code level CL1 (Service Level) Standard password = "0 0 0 1"

This code level entitles the user to change selected non-critical parameters, such as setting the parameters access-
ible in CL0 plus Bar/PSI, C/F. The user may also change the password for level CL1. Access granted by this
password expires two hours after the password has been entered and the user is returned to the CL0 level.
Code level CL2 (Temporary Commissioning Level) No standard password available

This code level grants temporary access to most of the parameters. The password is calculated from the random
number generated when the password is initially accessed. It is designed to grant a user one-time access to a pa-
rameter without having to give him a reusable password. The user may also change the password for level CL1.
Access granted by this password expires two hours after the password has been entered and the user is returned to
the CL0 level. The password for the temporary commissioning level may be obtained from the vendor.
Code level CL3 (Commissioning Level) Standard password = "0 0 0 3"

This code level grants complete and total access to most of the parameters. In addition, the user may also change
the passwords for levels CL1, CL2 and CL3. Access granted by this password expires two hours after the pass-
word has been entered and the user is returned to the CL0 level.
NOTE
Once the code level is entered, access to the configuration menus will be permitted for two hours or
until another password is entered into the control. If a user needs to exit a code level then code level,
CL0 should be entered. This will block unauthorized configuration of the control. A user may return to
CL0 by allowing the entered password to expire after two hours or by changing any one digit on the
random number generated on the password screen and entering it into the unit.
It is possible to disable expiration of the password by entering "0000" after the CL1 or CL3 password
has been entered. Access to the entered code level will remain enabled until another password is en-
tered. Otherwise, the code level would expire when loading the standard values (default 0000) via
ToolKit.
10400 Password 0 0 to 9999 Random The password for configuring the control via the front panel must
display number be entered here.
10405 Code level 0 Info - This value displays the code level, which is currently enabled for
display access via the front panel display.
10402 Password 0 0000 to 9999 Random The password for configuring the control via the CAN interface #1
CAN 1 number must be entered here.
CAN 1 access via the CAN interface #1.
10401 Password 0 0000 to 9999 Random The password for configuring the control via RS-232 serial inter-
serial 1 number face #1 must be entered here.
serial 1 access via RS-232 serial interface #1.
10430 Password 0 0000 to 9999 Random The password for configuring the control via RS-485 serial inter-
serial 2 number face #1 must be entered here.
serial 2 access via RS-485 serial interface #1.

System Management
1702 Device 2 33 to 64 33 A unique address is assigned to the control though this parame-
number ter. This unique address permits the controller to be correctly iden-
tified on the CAN bus. The address assigned to the controller may
only be used once. All other bus addresses are calculated on the
number entered in this parameter.
NOTE: No access in the application modes L-MCB and L-

GGB .
NOTE: The unit must be restarted after changing the device num-
ber to ensure proper operation.
4556 Configure 2 Key actv. / Key actv. Key actv.: The display backlight will be dimmed, if no soft key is
display Off / pressed for the time configured in parameter ID 4557.
backlight On Off: The display backlight is always disabled.
On: The display backlight is always enabled.
4557 Time until 2 1 to 999 min 120 min If no soft key has been pressed for the time configured here, the
backlight display backlight will be dimmed.
shutdow
NOTE: This parameter is only effective, if parameter ID 4556 is
configured to Key actv..
12978 Lock keypad 2 LogicsManager FALSE Lock keypad
As long as the conditions of the LogicsManager have been ful-
filled:
True:
The buttons "MAN" and "AUTO" are locked.
The softkey "OPEN"/"CLOSE" are locked.
Acknowledge of alarms is blocked.
All parameters with the exception of display relevant pa-
rameters are not accessable.
False: Full access depending on code level.

10417 Factory 0 Yes / No No Yes: The following three parameters are visible and restoring the
default configured parameters to factory default values is enabled.
settings No: The following three parameters are invisible and restoring the
configured parameters to factory default values is not enabled.
NOTE: The following parameters will only be displayed, if Factory

default settings (parameter ID 10417) has been configured to
Yes and the enter button has been pressed.
1701 Set factory 0 Yes / No No Yes: All parameters, which the enabled access code grants privi-
default leges to, will be restored to factory default values.
values No: All parameters will remain as currently configured.
10500 Start boot- 2 23130 to 23130 42405 The bootloader is utilized for uploading application software only.
loader The proper enable code must be entered while the control is in
access code level CL3 or higher to perform this function.
ATTENTION: This function is used for uploading application soft-

ware and may only be used by authorized Woodward technicians!
1706 Clear even- 2 Yes / No No Yes: The event history will be cleared.
tlog No: The event history will not be cleared.

System Management: Password System
NOTE
The following passwords grant varying levels of access to the parameters. Each individual password
can be used to access the appropriate configuration level through multiple access methods and com-
munication protocols (via the front panel, via serial RS-232/485 interface, and via the CAN bus).
10415 Basic code 1 0000 to 9999 - Password: Service Level (CL1)

level The password for the code level "Service" is defined in this para-
meter. Refer to the Enter Password section on page 59 for default
values.
10413 Commission- 3 0000 to 9999 - Password: Commission (CL3)
ing code The password for the code level "Commission" is defined in this
level parameter. Refer to the Enter Password section on page 59 for
default values.
10414 Temp. com- 3 0000 to 9999 - Password: Temporary Commission (CL2)
missioning The algorithm for calculating the password for the code level
code level "Temporary Commissioning" is defined in this parameter.
10412 Temp. su- 5 0000 to 9999 - Password: Temporary Supercommissioning (CL4)
percomm. The algorithm for calculating the password for the code level
level code "Temporary Supercommissioning" is defined in this parameter.
10411 Supercom- 5 0000 to 9999 - Password: Supercommissioning" (CL5)
missioning The password for the code level "Supercommissioning" is defined
level code in this parameter. Refer to the Enter Password section on page 59
for default values.

Configuration
The configuration screen is accessed pressing the Configuration softkey in the parameter screen. The following
sub-menus are available to configure the unit:
Application configuration
Monitoring configuration
Measurement configuration
Interfaces configuration
LogicsManager configuration
Counters configuration
NOTE
This controller is available in two different hardware version with either 1A [../1] or 5A [../5] current
transformer inputs. Both versions are discussed in this manual. The setpoints for specific parameters
will differ depending upon the hardware version.
NOTE
It is absolutely essential that correct rated values to be entered when configuring the controller, as
many measurement and monitoring functions refer to these values.

Application Configuration
Application Mode LS-5 Configuration
8840 Application 1 Single LS5 / LS5 The unit can be configured to four different application modes. Re-
mode LS5 LS5 / fer to the Chapter 4: Operation for additional information.
L-MCB /
L-GGB Single LS5 : In this application mode, there is only one sin-
gle LS-5 unit.
LS5 : This is the application mode for multiple LS-5 units op-
eration. In this mode a PLC can control the LS-5 units.
L-MCB : In this application mode, the easYgen is controlling

the MCB via the LS-5. The operation mode is fixed to automatic.
L-GGB : In this application mode, the easYgen is controlling

the GGB via the LS-5. The operation mode is fixed to automatic.
NOTE: In the application modes L-MCB and L-GGB

some parameters are fixed to the corresponding parameters in the
easYgen.
NOTE: In the L-MCB and L-GGB mode some parame-

ters are preconfigured to fixed values. In this modes you cant
access these parameters via front panel or ToolKit. For this rea-
son you have check thefollowing parameters if you change the
application mode from L-MCB or L-GGB to LS5 or
Single LS5 mode.
Device number (1702) Variable system (8816)

Node-ID CAN bus 1 (8950) Synchonization mode (5728)
Startup in mode (8827) Mains power measurement
(8813)
Isolation switch (8815) Dead bus closure (8801)
Segment number System A Connect A dead to B dead
(8810) (8802)
Segment number System B Connect A dead to B alive
(8811) (8803)
Mains connection (8814) Connect A alive to B dead
(8804)
Open CBA in manual (8828) Connect synchronous mains
(8820)
Max. phase angle (8821) Delay time phi max. (8822)
The following parameters (LogicsManager) are hidden and have

no impact in the application modes L-MCB and L-GGB .
LM: Enable close CBA LM: Enable close CBA

(12945) (24.34)
LM: Open CBA immediately LM: Open CBA immediately
(12944) (24.33)
LM: Open CBA unload LM: Open CBA unload
(12943) (24.32)
LM: Operation mode AUTO LM: Operation mode MAN
(12510) (12520)
LM: Open CBA in MAN LM: Open CBA in MAN
(12957) (24.46, 11435)
LM: Close CBA in MAN LM: Close CBA in MAN
(12958) (24.47, 11436)
12950 Isol.sw open 2 LogicsManager LM 24.39 Isolation switch is open
As long as the conditions of the LogicsManager have been ful-
filled, the LS-5 assumes an open isolation switch (else a closed
isolation switch).

NOTE
Please refer to chapter Application on page 136 for details.

Breakers Configuration
Configure CBA
8800 CBA control 2 1 Relay / 2 Relays 1 Relay: A MCB is operated and if necessary monitored. Relay
2 Relays [R5] (38/39/40) is used and fixed to this function.
2 Relays: A MCB is operated and if necessary monitored. Relay
[R5] (38/39/40) is used for the open function, relay [R6] (41/42) to
close it. The opening and closing is carried out with the pulse me-
thod.
3417 CBA time 2 0.10 to 0.50 s 0.50 s Pulse duration to close the CBA
pulse The time of the pulse output may be adjusted to the breaker being
utilized.
5715 Closing time 2 40 to 300 ms 80 ms Inherent delay of CBA for synchronization
CBA The inherent closing time of the CBA corresponds to the lead-time
of the close command. The close command will be issued inde-
pendent of the differential frequency at the entered time before the
synchronous point.
3407 CBA auto 2 Yes / No No Switch unblocking CBA
unlock This is used for special circuit breakers to put the breaker into a
defined initial state or to enable closing at all.
Yes: Before every close-pulse, an open-pulse is issued for e.g. 1
second (depends on settings of parameter 5718). A CB close
pulse is enabled only after the open pulse is issued.
No: The CB close pulse is enabled without being preceded by a
CB open pulse.
5718 CBA open 2 0.10 to 9.90 s 1.00 s CBA open time pulse
time pulse This time defines the length of the CBA open time pulse, if the au-
tomatic switch unblocking CBA is activated.
8828 Open CBA in 2 Immediate / Im- Open CBA in manual
manual With unl. mediate Immediate: If there is an open command in manual mode, the
CBA will open immediately.
With unl.: If there is an open command in manual mode, the CBA
will open with unloading. If there is a further open command while
unloading (via LM or button) the CBA opens immediately.
NOTE: With the exception of the application mode Single LS5

, unloading is skipped, if no closed GCB in the relevant seg-
ments is detected.

GGB .
8820 Connect 2 Yes / No No Connect synchronous mains
synchronous No: Closing the CBA in case of synchronous mains (System A
mains and System B are mains connected) is not allowed.
Yes: Closing the CBA in case of synchronous mains is possible if
System A and System B are detected as mains con-
nected and
The angle is in the configuration window of parameter
8821 for at least the time configured in parameter 8822.
NOTE: If no closed GCB in the relevant segment is detected, un-

loading will be canceled and the breaker will be opend immediate-
ly (even if the command Open CBA with unloading is active).

GGB .
8821 Max phase 2 0 to 20 20 Maximum admissible angle between both voltage systems in case
angle of connecting synchronous mains.

GGB .

8822 Delay time 2 0 to 99 s 1s Defines the time how long the phase angle (parameter 8821) be-
phi max tween both voltage systems needs to be below the configured
maximum permissible angle before connecting synchronous
mains.

GGB .
12957 Open CBA in 2 LogicsManager - Open CBA in manual
MAN Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the
LS-5 opens the CBA immediately or with unloading (according to
parameter 8828), if no other LS-5 with higher priority likes to do
the same.
NOTE: If a close or open command is active but is blocked by

another device with higher priority the display shows CBA re-
quest.
NOTE: Only in operation mode MANUAL.

GGB .
12958 Close CBA in 2 LogicsManager - Close CBA in manual
MAN Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the
LS5 closes the CBA, if no other LS5 with higher priority likes to do
the same. (Provided the conditions for dead bus closure or syn-
chronization are true.)

quest.
NOTE: Only in operation mode MANUAL.

GGB .
12943 Open CBA 2 LogicsManager (09.06 & Open CBA with unloading
unload 1) &1 Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the
LS-5 opens the CBA with unloading, if no other LS-5 with higher
priority likes to do the same.

quest.
NOTE: Only in operation mode AUTOMATIC.

GGB .
12944 Open CBA 2 LogicsManager (09.04 & Open CBA immediately
immed. 1) &1 Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the
LS-5 opens the CBA immediately.

GGB .

12945 Enable close 2 LogicsManager (09.07 & Enable close CBA

CBA !08.07) & Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the
!07.05 LS-5 closes the CBA, if no other LS5 with higher priority likes to
do the same. (Provided the conditions for dead bus closure or
synchronization are true.)

quest.

GGB .

Synchronization CBA
5730 Synchroniza- 2 Slip freq / Ph. Slip freq Slip frequency: The LS-5 instructs the frequency controller (e.g.
tion CBA match easYgen) to adjust the frequency in a way, that the frequency of
the variable system is marginal greater than the target. When the
synchronizing conditions are reached, a close command will be
issued. The slipping frequency is positive to avoid reverse power.
Phase matching: The LS-5 instructs the frequency controller (e.g.
easYgen) to adjust the phase angle of the variable system to that
of the target, in view of turning the phase difference to zero.
5711 Pos. freq. 2 0.02 to 0.49 Hz 0.18 Hz Positive frequency differential CBA
differential The prerequisite for a connect command being issued for the CBA
CBA is that the differential frequency is below the configured differential
frequency. This value specifies the upper frequency (positive val-
ue corresponds to positive slip system B frequency is higher than
the system A frequency).
5712 Neg. freq. 2 -0.49 to 0.00 Hz -0.18 Hz Negative frequency differential CBA
differential The prerequisite for a connect command being issued for the CBA
CBA is that the differential frequency is above the configured differen-
tial frequency. This value specifies the lower frequency limit
(negative value corresponds to negative slip system B frequency
is less than the system A frequency).
5710 Voltage dif- 2 0.50 to 20.00 % 5.00 % The maximum permissible voltage differential for closing CBA is
ferential CBA configured here. If the difference between system A and system B
voltage does not exceed the value configured here and the sys-
tem voltages are within the operating voltage windows (parame-
ters 5800/5801/5810/5811 on page 90), the "Command: CBA
close" may be issued.
8825 Phase angle 2 On / Off Off On: If a transformer is located between systems A and B and if
compensa- the transformer has a vector group with a phase angle deviation,
tion then On should be configured in this parameter.
Off: If a transformer is not located between systems A and B or if
the transformer has a vector group without a phase angle devia-
tion, then Off should be configured in this parameter.
NOTE: This parameter defines if the parameter 8824 is valid or

not.
WARNING: Ensure this parameter is configured correctly to pre-

vent erroneous synchronization settings. Incorrect wiring of the
system cannot be compensated for with this parameter.
8824 Phase angle 2 -180 to 180 0 This parameter compensates phase angle deviations, which can
compensa- be caused by transformers (e.g. a delta to wye transformer) lo-
tion cated within the electrical system. Ensure the following parame-
ters are configured correctly to prevent erroneous synchronization
settings. Incorrect wiring of the system cannot be compensated for
with this parameter.
Please act as follows: If a transformer is not located between

systems A and B or if the transformer has a vector group without a
phase angle deviation, then a phase angle deviation of 0 should
be configured in this parameter.
NOTE: Further information can be found in chapter

Commissioning Note on page 69.
WARNING: Ensure this parameter is configured correctly to pre-

vent erroneous synchronization settings. Incorrect wiring of the
system cannot be compensated for with this parameter.

Commissioning Note
a) Interconnection of the mains voltage possible
With a phase angle deviation of 0 and sytem B not energized and system A energized, close the CBA. This will
result in system A and system B being at the same voltage potential. The phase angle deviation will now be dis-
played on the LS-5 screen (synchronization angle phi). Enter the displayed value into this parameter.
CAUTION
The correct setting must be validated in every control unit with a differential voltage measurement.
b) Interconnection of the mains voltage not possible

but the vector group of the transformer is known
The vector group of the transformer is known and states the phase angle deviation in multiplies of 30. Out of the
vector group the phase angle deviation can be calculated as an angle from 0 to 360. For this value the voltage
of the low voltage side is behind the voltage of the high voltage side phase angle deviation ! When cal-
culating the resulting value, the low voltage side of the transformer always lags behind the high voltage
side (phase angle deviation ).
The phase difference is to be calculated as follows:
High voltage side = System [A] High voltage side = System [B]
< 180 -
> 180 -360 + 360 -
Table 3-3: Calculation of the phase angle deviation

Phase Matching
5713 Max. positive 2 0.0 to 60.0 7.0 Max. permissible positive phase angle CBA
phase angle The prerequisite for a connect command being issued for the CBA
CBA is that the leading phase angle between system B and system A is
below the configured maximum permissible angle
5714 Max. nega- 2 -60.0 to 00.0 -7.0 Max. permissible negative phase angle CBA
tive phase The prerequisite for a connect command being issued for the CBA
angle CBA is that the lagging phase angle between system B and system A is
above the configured minimum permissible angle
5717 Phase 2 0.0 to 60.0 s 3.0 s Phase matching dwell time of CBA
matching This is the minimum time that the system A/B voltage, frequency,
CBA dwell and phase angle must be within the configured limits before the
time breaker will be closed.
Deadbus Closure CBA
8801 Dead bus 2 On / Off Off On: Dead bus closure possible according to the conditions de-
closure CBA fined by parameters 8802, 8803, 8804 and 5820.
Off: No dead bus closure possible.

GGB .
8802 Connect A 2 On / Off Off On: Dead bus closure of system A dead to system B dead is al-
dead to B lowed.
dead Off: Dead bus closure of system A dead to system B dead is not
allowed.

GGB .
8803 Connect A 2 On / Off Off On: Dead bus closure of system A dead to system B alive is al-
dead to B lowed.
alive Off: Dead bus closure of system A dead to system B alive is not
allowed.

GGB .
8804 Connect A 2 On / Off Off On: Dead bus closure of system A alive to system B dead is al-
alive to B lowed.
dead Off: Dead bus closure of system A alive to system B dead is not
allowed.

GGB .
8805 Dead bus 2 0.0 to 20.0 s 5.0 s To detect a dead bus condition of a system, the system voltage
closure de- must below the value defined by parameter 5820 for at least the
lay time time defined here.
5820 Dead bus de- 2 0 to 30 % 10 % If system A/B voltage falls below this percentage of system A/B
tection max. rated voltage for the time defined by parameter 8805, a dead bus
volt. condition is detected.
CAUTION
A dead bus closure can also be performed in the case of a mains failure. If the deadbus bus closure
should not be performed, the corresponding parameters must be switched Off (parameter 8802, 8803
or 8804).

Synchronization Configuration
5728 Synchroniza- 2 Off / Run Off: The synchronization is disabled; the frequency and voltage
tion mode Permissive / adaptation for synchronization is not active.
Check / Permissive: The unit acts as a synch check device. The unit will
Run / not issue speed or voltage bias commands to achieve synchroni-
Ctrl by LM zation, but if synchronization conditions are matched (frequency,
phase, voltage and phase angle), the control will issue a breaker
close command.
Check: Used for checking a synchronizer prior to commissioning.
The control actively synchronizes generator(s) by issuing speed
and voltage bias commands, but does not issue a breaker closure
command.
Run: Normal operating mode. The control actively synchronizes
and issues breaker closure commands.
Ctrl. by LM: The synchronization mode is controlled by Logics
Manager (12907, 12906 and 12908). If more than one LogicsMa-
nager are true, PERMISSIVE has the highest priority, RUN has
the lowest priority.

GGB .
12907 Syn. mode 2 LogicsManager (0 & 1) & Synchronization mode PERMISSIVE
PERM. 1 As long as the conditions of the LogicsManager have been ful-
filled, the LS-5 works in synchronization mode Permissive.
NOTE: Only valid if parameter 5728 is set to Ctrl by LM.

12906 Syn. mode 2 LogicsManager (0 & 1) & Synchronization mode CHECK
CHECK 1 As long as the conditions of the LogicsManager have been ful-
filled, the LS-5 works in synchronization mode Check.

12908 Syn. mode 2 LogicsManager (0 & 1) & Synchronization mode RUN
RUN 1 As long as the conditions of the LogicsManager have been ful-
filled, the LS-5 works in synchronization mode RUN.

Segment Configuration
8810 Segment 2 1 to 64 1 Segment number for system A.

number Sy.A
GGB .
8811 Segment 2 1 to 64 1 Segment number for system B.
number Sy.B
GGB .
8812 Segment 2 1 to 64 1 Segment number isolation switch (if available).
number isol.
Switch
8813 Mains pow. 2 Valid / Invalid Invalid Valid: The measured power is used for mains real power control.
measurem. Invalid: The measured power is not used for power control.

GGB .
8814 Mains 2 None / None None: No system is wired to mains directly. It can not be used for
connection System A / mains failure detection.
System B / System A: System A is wired to mains directly.
Isol.swi. System B: System B is wired to mains directly.
Isol. Switch: The system of the isolation switch is wired to mains.

GGB .
8815 Isol. switch 2 None / None None: No isolation switch at system A or system B.
System A / System A: Isolation switch is at system A.
System B System B: Isolation switch is at system B.

GGB .
8816 Variable 2 System A / System A One of the systems must be defined as a variable system. A vari-
system System B able system is defined as a system that can change in frequency
and voltage due to the easYgen control unit. In normal applica-
tions this is the frequency/voltage that is situated opposite the
mains voltage of the MCB. The opposite side of the CB is there-
fore either constant (mains voltage) or a controlled stable (bus
coupler) system.
System A: Variable system is system A.

System B: Variable system is system B.

GGB .

Inputs / Outputs Configuration
Discrete Inputs Configuration
NOTE
Please refer to chapter Discrete Inputs on page 38 for details.
1400 DI {x} Text T 4 to 16 character See pa- Message text

text rameter If the discrete input is enabled with alarm class, this text is dis-
list played on the control unit screen. The event history will store this
text message as well. The text may have 4 through 16 characters.
NOTE: If the DI is used as control input with the alarm class "Con-
trol", you may enter here its function (e.g. external acknowledge-
ment) for a better overview within the configuration.
1201 DI {x} Opera- 2 N.O. / N.C. N.O. The discrete inputs may be operated by a normally open (N.O.) or
tion normally closed (N.C.) contact. The idle circuit current input can
be used to monitor for a wire break. A positive or negative voltage
polarity referred to the reference point of the DI may be applied.
N.O.: The discrete input is analyzed as "enabled" by energizing
the input (normally open).
N.C.: The discrete input is analyzed as "enabled" by de-energizing
the input (normally closed).
1200 DI {x} Delay 2 0.08 to 650.00 s DI 01/04 A delay time in seconds can be assigned to each alarm or control
0.20 s input. The discrete input must be enabled without interruption for
the delay time before the unit reacts. If the discrete input is used
Other DIs within the LogicsManager this delay is taken into account as well.
0.50 s
1202 DI {x} Alarm 2 Class A / Control An alarm class may be assigned to the discrete input. The alarm
class Class B / class is executed when the discrete input is enabled.
Class C /
Class D / If "control" has been configured, there will be no entry in the event
Class E / history and a function out of the LogicsManager (description at
Class F / page 195) can be assigned to the discrete input.
Control
NOTE: See chapter "Alarm Classes" on page 194.
1203 DI {x} Moni- 2 Yes / No No Yes: Monitoring for fault conditions is only performed if Lock Moni-
toring toring Status 24.40 is false.
lockable No: Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled re-
gardless of Lock Monitoring Status 24.40.
1204 DI {x} Self 2 Yes / No No Yes: The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condi-
acknowledge tion is no longer detected.
No: The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the
fault condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowl-
edged and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or
by activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledge-
ment" (via a discrete input or via an interface).
If the DI is configured with the alarm class "Control", self acknowl-

edgement is always active.

The preceding parameters are used to configure the discrete inputs 1 through 7. The parameter IDs refer to DI 1.
Refer to Table 3-4 for the parameter IDs of the parameters DI 2 through DI 7.
DI 2 DI 3 DI 4 DI 5 DI 6 DI 7
Text 1410 1420 1430 1440 1450 1460
Operation 1221 1241 1261 1281 1301 1321
Delay 1220 1240 1260 1280 1300 1320
Alarm class 1222 1242 1262 1282 1302 1322
Monitoring lockable 1223 1243 1263 1283 1303 1323
Self acknowledged 1224 1244 1264 1284 1304 1324
Table 3-4: Discrete inputs - parameter IDs
NOTE
DI 8 is always used for the circuit breaker replies and cannot be configured.

Discrete Outputs Configuration (LogicsManager)
The discrete outputs are controlled via the LogicsManager.
Please note the description of the LogicsManager starting on page 195.
Relay Term.
Number
Internal relay outputs
[R1] 30/31 LogicsManager; combinated with 'Ready for operation OFF'
[R2] 32/33 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with 'Centralized alarm (horn)'
[R3] 34/35 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with 'System B not OK'
[R4] 36/37 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with 'System A not OK'
[R5] 38/39/40 Fixed to 'Open CBA'
[R6] 41/42 Fixed to 'Close CBA' if CBA is controlled by 2 relays otherwise LogicsManager pre-assigned with 'All
Alarm classes'
Table 3-5: Relay outputs - assignment
12580 Ready for 2 LogicsManager - The "Ready for operation OFF" relay is energized by default if the
op. Off power supply exceeds 8 V. Once the conditions of the LogicsMa-
nager have been fulfilled, the relay will be de-energized. This Lo-
gicsManager output may be configured with additional conditions,
which may signal a PLC an "out of operation" condition by de-
energizing the relay on terminals 30/31, like "alarm D" or no
"AUTO mode" present. The LogicsManager and its default set-
tings are explained on page 195 in Appendix C: "LogicsManager".
CAUTION: The discrete output "Ready for operation OFF" must

be wired in series with an emergency function. We recommend to
signal this fault independently from the unit if the availability of the
plant is important.
12110 Relay {x} 2 LogicsManager - Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the
relay will be energized. The LogicsManager and its default set-
tings are explained on page 195 in Appendix C: "LogicsManager".
Above parameter ID 12110 refers to Relay 2. Refer to Table 3-6 for the parameter IDs of the parameters for Re-
lay 3 to Relay 6.
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
Parameter ID 12580 12110 12310 12320 12130 12140
Table 3-6: Discrete outputs - parameter IDs

Automatic Run Configuration
8827 Startup in 2 AUTO / AUTO If the controller is powered down, the unit will start in the following
mode MAN / configured mode when it is powered up again.
Last
AUTO: The unit starts in the AUTOMATIC operating mode.
MAN: The unit starts in the MANUAL operating mode.
Last: The unit starts in the last operating mode the control was in
prior to being de-energized.

GGB .
12510 Operat. 2 LogicsManager - Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the
mode AUTO unit will change into operating mode AUTOMATIC. If AUTOMATIC
mode is selected via the LogicsManager it is not possible to
change operating modes via the front panel. The LogicsManager
and its default settings are explained on page 195 in Appendix C:
"LogicsManager".

GGB .
12520 Operat. 2 LogicsManager - Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the
mode MAN unit will change into operating mode MANUAL. If MANUAL mode
is selected via the LogicsManager it is not possible to change op-
erating modes via the front panel. The LogicsManager and its de-
fault settings are explained on page 195 in Appendix C: "Logics-
Manager".

GGB .

Monitoring Configuration
System A
1771 SyA. voltage 2 Phase - phase / Phase - The unit can either monitor the wye voltages (phase-neutral) or
monitoring Phase - neutral phase the delta voltages (phase-phase). The monitoring of the wye vol-
tage is above all necessary to avoid earth-faults in a compensated
or isolated network resulting in the tripping of the voltage protec-
tion.
Phase phase: The phase-phase voltage will be measured and

all subsequent parameters concerning voltage monitoring "System
A" are referred to this value (VL-L).
Phase neutral: The phase-neutral voltage will be measured and
all subsequent parameters concerning voltage monitoring "System
A" are referred to this value (VL-N).
WARNING: This parameter influences the protective functions.

2801 Mains set- 2 0 to 9999 s 20 s To end the emergency operation, the monitored mains must be
tling time within the configured operating parameters without interruption for
the minimum period of time set with this parameter without inter-
ruption. This parameter permits delaying the switching of the load
from the generator to the mains. The display indicates "Mains
settling" during this time.
Operating Voltage / Frequency
5810 Upper 2 100 to 150 % 110 % The maximum permissible positive deviation of the system A vol-
voltage limit tage from the system A rated voltage (parameter 1768 on page
99) is configured here. This value may be used as a voltage limit
switch. The conditional state of this switch may be used as a
command variable for the LogicsManager (02.09).
5814 Hysteresis 2 0 to 50 % 2% If the system A voltage has exceeded the limit configured in pa-
upper volt. rameter 5810, the voltage must fall below the limit and the value
limit configured here, to be considered as being within the operating
limits again.
5811 Lower 2 50 to 100 % 90 % The maximum permissible negative deviation of the system A vol-
voltage limit tage from the system A rated voltage (parameter 1768 on page
5815 Hysteresis 2 0 to 50 % 2% If the system A voltage has fallen below the limit configured in pa-
lower volt. rameter 5811, the voltage must exceed the limit and the value
limit configured here, to be considered as being within the operating
limits again.
5812 Upper 2 100 to 150 % 110 % The maximum permissible positive deviation of the system A fre-
frequency quency from the rated system frequency (parameter 1750 on page
limit 99) is configured here. This value may be used as a frequency
limit switch. The conditional state of this switch may be used as a
5816 Hysteresis 2 0 to 50 % 0.5 % If the system A frequency has exceeded the limit configured in pa-
upper freq. rameter 5812, the frequency must fall below the limit and the val-
limit ue configured here, to be considered as being within the operating
limits again.
5813 Lower 2 0 to 100 % 90 % The maximum permissible negative deviation of the system A fre-

5817 Hysteresis 2 0 to 50 % 0.5 % If the system A frequency has fallen below the limit configured in
lower freq. parameter 5813, the frequency must exceed the limit and the val-
limit ue configured here, to be considered as being within the operating
limits again.
Example:
If the system A rated voltage is 400 V, the upper voltage limit is 110 % (of the system A rated voltage, i.e.
440 V), and the hysteresis for the upper voltage limit is 5 % (of the mains rated voltage, i.e. 20 V), the system A
voltage will be considered as being out of the operating limits as soon as it exceeds 440 V and will be considered
as being within the operating limits again as soon as it falls below 420 V (440 V 20 V).
If the rated system frequency is 50 Hz, the lower frequency limit is 90 % (of the rated system frequency, i.e.
45 Hz), and the hysteresis for the lower frequency limit is 5 % (of the rated system frequency, i.e. 2.5 Hz), the
mains frequency will be considered as being out of the operating limits as soon as it falls below 45 Hz and will be
considered as being within the operating limits again as soon as it exceeds 47.5 Hz (45 Hz + 2.5 Hz).
NOTE
If system A is configured and wired for mains, the system A operating voltage/frequency parameters
can be used to trigger mains failure conditions and activate an emergency run. The system A values
must be within these ranges to synchronize the CBA. It is recommended to configure the operating lim-
its within the monitoring limits.

System A (SyA.) Decoupling
The system A decoupling function is intended for use in a mains parallel operation and monitors a series of sub-
ordinate mains protection thresholds. If a threshold is exceeded, the LS5 initiates a breaker opening and separates
the system B from the mains at the defined breaker.
The following thresholds are monitored:
Overfrequency level 1 (refer to page 80 for detailed information)
Overfrequency level 2 (refer to page 80 for detailed information)
Underfrequency level 1 (refer to page 81 for detailed information)
Underfrequency level 2 (refer to page 81 for detailed information)
Overvoltage level 1 if parameterized for decoupling (refer to page 82 for detailed information)
Overvoltage level 2 (refer to page 82 for detailed information)
Undervoltage level 1 if parameterized (refer to page 83 for detailed information)
Undervoltage level 2 (refer to page 83 for detailed information)
Phase shift or df/dt (refer to page 84 for detailed information)
Voltage increase if parameterized for decoupling
If one of these protective functions is triggered, the display indicates "SyA. decoupling" (the logical com-
mand variable "07.25" will be enabled) and the active level 2 alarm.
12942 Enable 2 LogicsManager - If LogicsManager 24.31 is true, decoupling is On.

SyA dec.
3058 Change of 2 Off / Ph. Shift / Ph. shift Off: Change of frequency is not monitored.
frequency df/dt Ph. Shift: Change of frequency is monitored on phase shift.
df/dt (ROCOF): Change of frequency is monitored on df/dt.
3111 Alarm class 2 Class A / Class B Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that spe-
Class B / cifies what action should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Class C /
Class D / NOTE: See chapter "Alarm Classes" on page 194.
Class E /
Class F
3112 Self 2 Yes / No No Yes: The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condi-
NOTE
The decoupling function is optimized on the relay output "CBA open". In case of using a free relay out-
put in conjunction with the command variable 07.25 an additional delay time of up to 20ms is to con-
sider.

Overfrequency (Levels 1 & 2) ANSI# 81O
There are two overfrequency alarm levels available in the control. Both alarms are definite time alarms and are il-
lustrated in the figure below. The figure diagrams a frequency trend and the associated pickup times and length of
the alarms. Monitoring of the frequency is accomplished in two steps.
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "SyA. overfreq. 1" or
"SyA. overfreq. 2" and the logical command variable "07.06" or "07.07" will be enabled.
2850 Monitoring 2 On / Off On On: Overfrequency monitoring is carried out according to the fol-
2856 (Limit 1 / lowing parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both
Limit 2) values may be configured independent from each other (prerequi-
site: limit 1 < Level 2 limit).
Off: Monitoring is disabled for limit 1 and/or Level 2 limit.
2854 Limit 2 100.0 to 140.0 % 100.4 % The percentage values that are to be monitored for each threshold
2860 (Limit 1 / 102.0 % limit are defined here. If this value is reached or exceeded for at
Limit 2) least the delay time without interruption, the action specified by
the alarm class is initiated.
NOTE: This value refers to the System rated frequency (parame-

ter 1750 on page 99).
2855 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s 0.06 s If the monitored system A frequency value exceeds the threshold
2861 (Limit 1 / value for the delay time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If
Limit 2) the monitored mains frequency falls below the threshold (minus
the hysteresis) before the delay expires the time will be reset.
2851 Alarm Class 2 Class A / Class A Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that spe-
2857 (Limit 1 / Class B / Class B cifies what action should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Limit 2) Class C /
Class E /
Class F
2852 Self 2 Yes / No Yes Yes: The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condi-
2858 acknowledge tion is no longer detected.
(Limit 1 / No: The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the
Limit 2) fault condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowl-
2853 Monitoring 2 Yes / No No Yes: Monitoring for fault conditions is only performed if Lock Moni-
2859 lockable toring Status 24.40 is false.
(Limit 1 / No: Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled re-
Limit 2) gardless of Lock Monitoring Status 24.40.
NOTE
The system A overfrequency Level 2 limit configuration parameters are located below the SyA. de-
coupling function menu on the display.

Underfrequency (Levels 1 & 2) ANSI# 81U
There are two underfrequency alarm levels available in the control. Both alarms are definite time alarms and are
illustrated in the figure below. The figure diagrams a frequency trend and the associated pickup times and length
of the alarms. Monitoring of the frequency is performed in two steps.
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "SyA. underfreq. 1" or
"SyA. underfreq. 2" and the logical command variable "07.08" or "07.09" will be enabled.
2900 Monitoring 2 On / Off On On: Underfrequency monitoring is carried out according to the fol-
Limit 2) values may be configured independent from each other (prerequi-
site: Level 1 > Level 2).
NOTE: This value refers to the System rated frequency (parame-

ter 1750 on page 99).
2905 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s 1.50 s If the monitored system A frequency value exceeds the threshold
2911 (Limit 1 / 0.06 s value for the delay time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If
Limit 2) the monitored system A frequency falls below the threshold (mi-
nus the hysteresis) before the delay expires the time will be reset.
Limit 2) Class C /
Class E /
Class F
NOTE
The system A underfrequency Level 2 limit configuration parameters are located below the SyA. de-
coupling function menu on the display.

Overvoltage (Levels 1 & 2) ANSI# 59
Voltage is monitored depending on parameter "System A voltage measuring" (parameter 1851 on page 100).
There are two overvoltage alarm levels available in the control. Both alarms are definite time alarms and are illu-
strated in the figure below. The figure diagrams a frequency trend and the associated pickup times and length of
the alarms. Monitoring of the voltage is done in two steps.
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "SyA. overvoltage 1" or
"SyA. overvoltage 2" and the logical command variable "07.10" or "07.11" will be enabled.
2950 Monitoring 2 On / Off On On: Overvoltage monitoring is carried out according to the follow-
2956 (Limit 1 / ing parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values
Limit 2) may be configured independent from each other (prerequisite: lim-
it 1 < Level 2 limit).
NOTE: This value refers to the System A rated voltage (parameter

1766 on page 99).
2955 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s 1.50 s If the monitored system A voltage exceeds the threshold value for
2961 (Limit 1 / 0.06 s the delay time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the mo-
Limit 2) nitored mains voltage falls below the threshold (minus the hyste-
resis) before the delay expires the time will be reset.
2951 Alarm Class 2 Class A / Class B Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that spe-
2957 (Limit 1 / Class B / cifies what action should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Limit 2) Class C /
Class E /
Class F
8845 SyA. de- 2 On / Off Off System A decoupling by overvoltage level 1
coupling On: Tripping of system A overvoltage level 1 causes decoupling
Off: Tripping of system A overvoltage level 1 dont causes de-
coupling.
NOTE
The system A overvoltage Level 2 limit configuration parameters are located below the SyA. decoupl-
ing function menu on the display.

Undervoltage (Levels 1 & 2) ANSI# 27
Voltage is monitored depending on parameter "System A voltage measuring" (parameter 1851 on page 100).
There are two undervoltage alarm levels available in the control. Both alarms are definite time alarms and are il-
lustrated in the figure below. The figure diagrams a frequency trend and the associated pickup times and length of
the alarms. Monitoring of the voltage is done in two steps.
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "SyA. undervoltage 1" or
"SyA. undervoltage 2" and the logical command variable "07.12" or "07.13" will be enabled.
3000 Monitoring 2 On / Off On On: Undervoltage monitoring is carried out according to the fol-
Limit 2) values may be configured independent from each other (prere-
quisite: Level 1 limit < Level 2 limit).
Off: Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.
3010 (Limit 1 / 90.0 % limit are defined here. If this value is reached or fallen below for at
NOTE: This value refers to the System A rated voltage (parameter

1766 on page 99).
3005 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s 1.50 s If the monitored system A voltage falls below the threshold value
3011 (Limit 1 / 0.06 s for the delay time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the
Limit 2) monitored mains voltage exceeds the threshold (plus the hystere-
sis) again before the delay expires the time will be reset.
Limit 2) Class C /
Class E /
Class F
8844 SyA. de- 2 On / Off Off System A decoupling by undervoltage level 1
coupling On: Tripping of system A undervoltage level 1 causes decoupling.
Off: Tripping of system A undervoltage level 1 dont causes de-
coupling.
NOTE
The System A undervoltage Level 2 limit configuration parameters are located below the SyA. decoupl-
ing function menu on the display.

Phase Shift
A vector/phase shift is defined as the sudden variation of the voltage curve which may be caused by a major ge-
nerator load change. It usually occurs, if the utility opens the MCB, which causes a load change for the genset.
The LS-5 measures the duration of a cycle, where a new measurement is started with each voltage passing
through zero. The measured cycle duration will be compared with an internal quartz-calibrated reference time to
determine the cycle duration difference of the voltage signal. A vector/phase shift as shown in Figure 3-4 causes
a premature or delayed zero passage. The determined cycle duration difference corresponds with the occurring
phase shift angle.
Figure 3-4: Monitoring - phase shift
The monitoring may be carried out three-phased or one/three-phased. Different limits may be configured for one-
phase and three-phase monitoring. The vector/phase shift monitor can also be used as an additional method to de-
couple from the mains. Vector/phase shift monitoring is only enabled after the monitored voltage exceeds 50% of
the PT secondary rated voltage.
Function: "Voltage cycle duration not within the permissible range" - The voltage cycle duration exceeds the
configured limit value for the phase/vector shift. The result is, that the power circuit breaker that disconnects
from the mains, is opened, the message "SyA. phase shift" is displayed, and the logical command variable
"07.14" is enabled.
3053 Monitoring 2 1/3-phase / 1/3-phase 1/3-phase: During single-phase voltage phase/vector shift moni-
3-phase toring, tripping occurs if the phase/vector shift exceeds the confi-
gured threshold value (parameter 3054) in at least one of the
three phases. Note: If a phase/vector shift occurs in one or two
phases, the single-phase threshold value (parameter 3054) is tak-
en into consideration; if a phase/vector shift occurs in all three
phases, the three-phase threshold value (parameter 3055) is tak-
en into consideration. Single phase monitoring is very sensitive
and may lead to nuisance tripping if the selected phase angle set-
tings are too small.
3-phase: During three-phase voltage phase/vector shift monitor-
ing, tripping occurs only if the phase/vector shift exceeds the spe-
cified threshold value (parameter 3055) in all three phases within
2 cycles.
3054 Limit 2 3 to 30 20 If the electrical angle of the system A voltage shifts more than this
1-phase configured value in any single phase, an alarm with the class con-
figured in parameter 3051 is initiated. The decoupling procedure
will open the CBA.

3055 Limit 2 3 to 30 8 If the electrical angle of the system A voltage shifts more than this
3-phase configured value in all three phases, an alarm with the class confi-
gured in parameter 3051 is initiated. The decoupling procedure
will open the CBA.
Class C /
Class E /
Class F
lockable toring Status 24.40 is false.
No: Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled re-
NOTE
The system A. phase shift configuration parameters are located below the system A decoupling func-
tion menu on the display.

Df/Dt (ROCOF) ANSI# 81RL
Function: "df/dt (ROCOF = Rate Of Change Of Frequency) is not within permissible limits" df/dt (ROCOF)
monitoring measures the stability of the frequency. The frequency of a source will vary due to changing loads
and other effects. The rate of these frequency changes due to the load variances is relatively high compared to
those of a large network. The control unit calculates the unit of measure per unit of time. The df/dt is measured
over 4 sine waves to ensure that it is differentiated from a phase shift. This results in a minimum response time of
approximately 100ms (at 50 Hz).
3104 Limit 2 0.1 to 9.9 Hz/s 2.6 Hz/s The df/dt threshold is defined here. If this value is reached or ex-
ceeded for at least the delay time without interruption, an alarm
with the class configured in parameter 3105 is initiated. The de-
coupling procedure will open the CBA.
3105 Delay 2 0.10 to 2.00 s 0.10 s If the monitored rate of df/dt exceeds the threshold value for the
delay time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the moni-
tored df/dt exceeds the threshold (plus the hysteresis) again be-
fore the delay expires the time will be reset.
Class C /
Class E /
Class F

System A (SyA.) Phase Rotation
CAUTION
Please ensure during installation that all voltages applied to this unit are wired correctly to both sides
of the circuit breaker. Failure to do so may result in damage to the control unit and/or generation
equipment due to closing the breaker asynchronous or with mismatched phase rotations and phase ro-
tation monitoring enabled at all connected components (generator, breakers, cable, busbars, etc.).
This function may block a connection of systems with wrong phases systems only under the following
conditions:
The voltages being measured are wired correctly with respect to the phase rotation at the
measuring points (i.e. the voltage transformer in front and behind the circuit breaker).
The measuring voltages are wired without angular phase shift or interruption from the measur-
ing point to the control unit.
The measuring voltages are wired to the correct terminals of the control unit.
The configured alarm class is of class C or D (breaker relevant alarm).
Correct phase rotation of the phase voltages ensures that damage will not occur during a breaker closure. The vol-
tage phase rotation alarm checks the phase rotation of the voltages and the configured phase rotation to ensure
they are identical. The directions of rotation are differentiated as "clockwise" and "counter clockwise". With a
clockwise field the direction of rotation is "L1-L2-L3"; with a counter clockwise field the direction of rotation is
"L1-L3-L2". If the control is configured for a clockwise rotation and the voltages into the unit are calculated as
counterclockwise the alarm will be initiated. The direction of configured rotation being monitored by the control
unit is displayed on the screen.
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "SyA.phase rotation" and the logical com-
mand variable "07.05" will be enabled.
NOTE
This monitoring function is only enabled if system A voltage measuring (parameter 1853) is configured
to "3Ph 4W" or "3Ph 3W" and the measured voltage exceeds 50 % of the rated voltage (parameter 1768)
or if Mains voltage measuring (parameter 1853) is configured to "1Ph 2W" (in this case, the phase rota-
tion is not evaluated, but defined by the 1Ph2W phase rotation (parameter 1859)).
3970 Monitoring 2 On / Off On On: Phase rotation monitoring is carried out according to the fol-
lowing parameters.
Off: No monitoring is carried out.
3974 SyA. Phase 2 CW / CCW CW CW: The three-phase measured mains voltage is rotating CW
rotation (clock-wise; that means the voltage rotates in L1-L2-L3 direction;
standard setting).
CCW: The three-phase measured mains voltage is rotating CCW
(counter clock-wise; that means the voltage rotates in L1-L3-L2 di-
rection).
Class C /
Class E /
Class F

System A (SyA.) Voltage Asymmetry
Voltage asymmetry is determined by calculating the negative sequence component of a three phase system. This
value is derived from the three delta voltages. The threshold is defined as the percentage of that value relative to
the nominal delta voltage. The protective function is triggered if this percentage value is exceeded. If this protec-
tive function is triggered, the display indicates "SyA. volt. asymmetry" and the logical command variable
"06.18" will be enabled.
NOTE
This monitoring function is only enabled if Generator voltage measuring (parameter 1851) is configured
to "3Ph 4W" or "3Ph 3W".
3921 Monitoring 2 On / Off On On: Voltage asymmetry monitoring is carried out according to the
following parameters.
limit are defined here. If this value is reached or exceeded for at
least the delay time without interruption, the action specified by
NOTE: This value refers to system A rated voltage (parameter

1766 on page 99).
3925 Delay 2 00.02 to 99.99 s 05.00 s If the monitored system A voltage asymmetry exceeds the thre-
shold value for the delay time configured here, an alarm will be is-
sued. If the monitored system A voltage asymmetry falls below the
threshold (minus the hysteresis) before the delay expires the time
will be reset.
Class C /
Class E /
Class F /
Control
3926 Monitoring 2 On / Off On Yes: Monitoring for fault conditions is only performed if Lock Moni-

System A (SyA.) Voltage Increase
This function allows to monitor the quality of the voltage over a longer time period. It is realized as a filter. The
function is only active if system A is in the operation window (voltage and frequency).
8806 Monitoring 2 On / Off Off On: Voltage increase monitoring is carried out according to the
following parameters.
8807 Limit 2 100 to 150 % 110 % The percentage value (related to SyB rated voltage) that is to be
monitored is defined here. If the voltage of at least one phase ex-
ceeds this value, an alarm SyA. volt. Incr. is tripped after a time
T depending:
On the parameter Response Time (8839)
and
The difference between this limit and the measured val-
ue. (the higher the difference, the faster the tripping.)
NOTE: This value refers to system A rated voltage (parameter

1766 on page 99).
8808 SyA 2 Yes / No No Yes: Voltage increase monitoring does cause a decoupling.
decoupling No: Voltage increase monitoring does not cause a decoupling.
volt. incr.
Class C /
Class E /
Class F /
Control
8839 Response 2 1 to 650 s 128 s Configures the response time of the filter. The higher the time, the
time slower the tripping.

System B
1770 SyB. Voltage 2 Ph Ph / Ph Ph The unit can either monitor the phase-neutral (wye) voltages or
monitoring Phase - N the phase-phase (delta) voltages. If the controller is used in a
compensated or isolated network, voltage protection monitoring
should be configured as phase-neutral to prevent earth-faults re-
sulting in tripping of the voltage protections.
Ph Ph (Phase phase): The phase-phase voltage will be

measured and all subsequent parameters concerning voltage
monitoring "generator" are referred to this value (VL-L).
Phase N (Phase neutral): The phase-neutral voltage will be
measured and all subsequent parameters concerning voltage
monitoring "System B" are referred to this value (VL-N).
WARNING: This parameter defines how the protective functions

operate.
Operating Voltage / Frequency
5800 Upper 2 100 to 150 % 110 % The maximum permissible positive deviation of the system B vol-
voltage limit tage from the system B rated voltage (parameter 1768 on page
5801 Lower 2 50 to 100 % 90 % The maximum permissible negative deviation of the system B vol-
voltage limit tage from the system B rated voltage (parameter 1768 on page
5802 Upper 2 100.0 to 150.0 % 105.0 % The maximum permissible positive deviation of the system B fre-
5803 Lower 2 50.0 to 100.0 % 95.0 % The maximum permissible negative deviation of the system B fre-
NOTE
The operating voltage/frequency parameters are used to check if the values are in range when perform-
ing a dead bus closure and synchronization.
It is recommended to configure the operating limits within the monitoring limits.

System B (SyB.) Phase Rotation
CAUTION
Ensure that the control unit is properly connected to phase voltages on both sides of the circuit break-
er(s) during installation. Failure to do so may result in damage to the control unit and/or generation
equipment due to the breaker closing asynchronously or with mismatched phase rotations. Also en-
sure that phase rotation monitoring is enabled at all connected components (generator, breakers, ca-
ble, busbars, etc.).
This function will block a connection of systems with mismatched phases only under the following
conditions:
The voltages being measured are wired correctly with respect to the phase rotation at the measur-
ing points (i.e. the potential transformers in on both sides of the circuit breaker)
The voltages being measured are wired so that angular phase shifts or any interruptions from the
measuring point to the control unit do not exist
The voltages being measured are wired to the correct terminals of the control.
The configured alarm class is of class C or D (breaker relevant alarm).
tage phase rotation alarm checks the phase rotation of the measured voltages and the configured phase rotation to
ensure they are identical. The directions of rotation are differentiated as "clockwise" and "counter clockwise".
With a clockwise field the direction of rotation is "L1-L2-L3"; with a counter clockwise field the direction of ro-
tation is "L1-L3-L2". If the control is configured for a clockwise rotation and the measured voltages are moni-
tored as counterclockwise, the alarm will be initiated. The direction of configured rotation being monitored by the
control unit is displayed on the screen.
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "SyB.phase rotation" and the logical com-
NOTE
This monitoring function is only enabled if system B voltage measuring (parameter 1851) is configured
to "3Ph 4W" or "3Ph 3W" and the measured voltage exceeds 50 % of the rated voltage (parameter 1766)
or if Generator voltage measuring (parameter 1851) is configured to "1Ph 2W" (in this case, the phase
rotation is not evaluated, but defined by the 1Ph2W phase rotation (parameter 1859)).
3950 Monitoring 2 On / Off Off On: Phase rotation monitoring is carried out according to the fol-
lowing parameters.
3954 SyB phase 2 CW / CCW CW CW: The three-phase measured system B voltage is rotating CW
rotation (clock-wise; that means the voltage rotates in L1-L2-L3 direction;
standard setting).
CCW: The three-phase measured system B voltage is rotating
CCW (counter clock-wise; that means the voltage rotates in L1-
L3-L2 direction).
3951 Alarm class 2 Class A / Class F Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that spe-
Class C /
Class E /
Class F

Breakers
CBA
Circuit breaker monitoring contains two alarms: A breaker reclose alarm and a breaker open alarm.
Reclose Alarm: If the control initiates a close of the breaker and the breaker fails to close after the configured
number of attempts the monitoring CBA alarm will be initiated.
(Refer to parameter "CBA maximum attempts of closure", parameter 3419 on page 92).
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "CBA fail to close" and the logical command
variable "08.07" will be enabled.
Breaker Open Alarm: If the control is attempting to open the circuit breaker and it fails to see that the CBA is
open within the configured time in seconds after issuing the breaker open command then the monitoring CBA
alarm will be initiated.
(Refer to parameter "CBA open monitoring", parameter 3421 on page 92).
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "CBA fail to open" and the logical command
variable "08.08" will be enabled.
2620 CBA 2 On / Off On On: Monitoring of the CBA is carried out according to the following
monitoring parameters.
Off: Monitoring is disabled.
2621 CBA alarm 2 Class A / Class B Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that spe-
class Class B cifies what action should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
NOTE: See chapter "Alarm Classes" on page 194.

3419 CBA 2 1 to 10 5 The maximum number of breaker closing attempts is configured in
maximum this parameter (relay output "Command: close CBA"). When the
attempts of breaker reaches the configured number of attempts, an "CBA
closure fail to close" alarm is issued. The counter for the closure at-
tempts will be reset as soon as the "Reply CBA" is de-energized
for at least 5 seconds to signal a closed CBA.
3421 CBA open 2 0.10 to 5.00 s 2.00 s If the "Reply CBA" is not detected as energized once this timer
monitoring expires, an "CBA fail to open" alarm is issued. This timer in-
itiates as soon as the "open breaker" sequence begins. The alarm
configured in parameter 2621 is issued.
2622 CBA 2 Yes / No No Yes: Monitoring for fault conditions is only performed if Lock Moni-
monitoring toring Status 24.40 is false.
lockable No: Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled re-

Synchronization CBA
3070 Monitoring 2 On / Off On On: Monitoring of the CBA synchronization is carried out accord-
ing to the following parameters.
3073 Delay 2 3 to 999 s 60 s If it was not possible to synchronize the CBA within the time confi-
gured here, an alarm will be issued. The message "CBA syn.
timeout" is issued and the logical command variable "08.31" will
be enabled.
Class C /
Class E /
Class F
CBA Unload Mismatch
8819 Unload trip 2 0.5 to 99.9 % 3.0 % This value refers to the System A rated active power (parameter
level CBA 1752 on page 99. If the monitored power of system A falls below
this value, a "CBA open" command will be issued.
8835 Delay 2 1 to 999 s 30 s If the monitored System A power does not fall below the limit con-
figured in parameter 8819 before the time configured here expires,
a "CBA open" command will be issued together with an alarm
CBA unload mismatch and the logical command variable "08.36"
will be enabled.
Class C /
Class E /
Class F /
Control

System A (SyA.) / System B (SyB.) Phase Rotation
tage phase rotation alarm checks, if the phase rotation of the measured voltage systems are identical. If the con-
trol detects different phase rotations of system A and system B, the alarm will be initiated and a breaker synchro-
nization is inhibited. However, this alarm will not prevent a dead busbar closure, i.e. a dead bus start.
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "Ph.rotation mismatch" and the logical com-
NOTE
This monitoring function is only enabled if system A voltage measuring (parameter 1851) and system B
voltage measuring (parameter 1853) are configured to "3Ph 4W" or "3Ph 3W" and the measured voltage
exceeds 50 % of the rated voltage (parameter 1766) or if Generator voltage measuring (parameter 1851)
and Mains voltage measuring (parameter 1853) are configured to "1Ph 2W" (in this case, the phase ro-
tation is not evaluated, but defined by the 1Ph2W phase rotation (parameter 1859)).
2940 Monitoring 2 On / Off On On: Phase rotation monitoring is carried out according to the fol-
lowing parameters
Class C /
Class E /
Class F

Miscellaneous
1756 Time until 0 0 to 1,000 s 180 s After each alarm of alarm class B through F occurs, the alarm
horn reset LED flashes and the horn (command variable 01.12) is enabled.
After the delay time 'time until horn reset' has expired, the flashing
LED changes into a steady light and the horn (command variable
01.12) is disabled. The alarm LED flashes until the alarm has
been acknowledged either via the push button, the LogicsManag-
er, or the interface.
NOTE: If this parameter is configured to 0, the horn will remain ac-

tive until it will be acknowledged.
12490 Ext. 2 LogicsManager (DI 02 & It is possible to acknowledge all alarms simultaneously from re-
acknowledge 1) & 1 mote, e.g. with a discrete input. The logical output of the Logics-
Manager has to become TRUE twice. The first time is for ac-
knowledging the horn, the second for all alarm messages. The
On-delay time is the minimum time the input signals have to be
"1". The Off-delay time is the time how long the input conditions
have to be "0" before the next high signal is accepted. Once the
conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the alarms will
be acknowledged.
NOTE: The first high signal into the discrete input acknowledges
the command variable 01.12 (horn). The second high signal ac-
knowledges all inactive alarm messages.
The LogicsManager and its default settings are explained on page

195 in Appendix C: "LogicsManager".
12959 Lock Moni- 2 LogicsManager (DI 01 & Lock Monitoring
toring 1) & 1 As long as the conditions of the LogicsManager have been ful-
filled, all monitoring functions which are configured Monitoring
lockable to Yes are locked.
CAN Interface 1 Configuration
The CANopen interface 1 is monitored. If the interface does not receive a Receive Process Data Object (RPDO)
before the delay expires, an alarm will be initiated.
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "CANopen interface 1" and the logical com-
3150 Monitoring 2 On / Off Off On: CANopen interface 1 monitoring is carried out according to
the following parameters.
3154 Delay 2 0.01 to 650.00 s 0.20 s The maximum receiving break is configured with this parameter. If
the interface does not receive an RPDO within this time, the action
specified by the alarm class is initiated. The delay timer is re-
initialized after every message is received.
Class C /
Class E /
Class F /
Control

Battery Overvoltage (Levels 1 & 2)
There are two battery overvoltage alarm levels available in the control. Both alarms are definite time alarms and
are illustrated in the figure below. The figure diagrams a frequency trend and the associated pickup times and
length of the alarms. Monitoring of the voltage is done in two steps.
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "Bat. overvoltage 1" or
"Bat. overvoltage 2" and the logical command variable "08.01" or "08.02" will be enabled.
3450 Monitoring 2 On / Off On On: Overvoltage monitoring of the battery voltage is carried out
3456 (Limit 1 / according to the following parameters. Both values may be con-
Limit 2) figured independent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1 > Level
2).
3454 Limit 2 8.0 to 42.0 V 32.0 V The threshold values that are to be monitored are defined here. If
3460 (Limit 1 / 35.0 V the monitored battery voltage reaches or exceeds this value for at
3455 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s 5.00 s If the monitored battery voltage exceeds the threshold value for
3461 (Limit 1 / 1.00 s the delay time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the mo-
Limit 2) nitored battery voltage falls below the threshold (minus the hyste-
resis) before the delay expires the time will be reset.
Limit 2) Class C /
Class E /
Class F /
Control

Battery Undervoltage (Levels 1 & 2)
There are two battery undervoltage alarm levels available in the control. Both alarms are definite time alarms and
are illustrated in the figure below. The figure diagrams a frequency trend and the associated pickup times and
length of the alarms. Monitoring of the voltage is done in two steps.
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "Bat. undervoltage 1" or
"Bat. undervoltage 2" and the logical command variable "08.03" or "08.04" will be enabled.
3500 Monitoring 2 On / Off On On: Undervoltage monitoring of the battery voltage is carried out
3506 (Limit 1 / according to the following parameters. Both values may be con-
Limit 2) figured independent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1 > Level
2).
3504 Limit 2 8.0 to 42.0 V 24.0 V The threshold values that are to be monitored are defined here. If
3510 (Limit 1 / 20.0 V the monitored battery voltage reaches or falls below this value for
Limit 2) at least the delay time without interruption, the action specified by
NOTE: The default monitoring limit for battery undervoltage is 24

Vdc after 60 seconds. This is because in normal operation the
terminal voltage is approximately 26 Vdc (alternator charged bat-
tery).
3505 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s 60.00 s If the battery voltage falls below the threshold value for the delay
3511 (Limit 1 / 10.00 s time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the battery voltage
Limit 2) exceeds the threshold (plus the hysteresis) again before the delay
expires the time will be reset.
Limit 2) Class C /
Class E /
Class F /
Control

Multi-Unit Missing Members
The multi-unit missing members monitoring function checks whether all participating units are available (sending
data on the CAN bus).
If the number of available units is less than the number of members configured in parameter 4063 for at least the
delay time (refer to below note), the display indicates "Missing members" and the logical command variable
"08.17" will be enabled.
NOTE
After energizing the unit, a delay is started, which allows a possible "Missing members" alarm to be-
come active. This delay depends on the Node-ID of the unit (parameter 8950 on page 104) and the
transfer rate of a load share / LS-5 fast message (parameter 9921 on page 104) and may last for approx.
140 seconds for a high Node-ID (e.g. 127). This delay serves for detecting the Master of a CAN bus
connection. Approximately two minutes after energizing the unit, the alarm delay will be set to a fix
time, which depends on the setting of parameter 9921 on page 104 (Transfer rate LS fast message) and
is in the range between 3 to 9 seconds.
4060 Monitoring 2 On / Off Off On: Multi-unit missing members monitoring is carried out.
NOTE: This parameter only applies to application mode .

4063 Number of 2 2 to 64 2 The number of participating LS-5 units is configured here.
LS5 commu-
nicating
Class C /
Class E /
Class F

Measurement Configuration
1750 System rated 2 50 Hz / 60 Hz 50 Hz The rated frequency of the system is used as a reference figure
frequency for all frequency related functions, which use a percentage value,
like frequency monitoring, breaker operation windows or the Ana-
log Manager.
1766 SyA. rated 2 50 to 650,000 V 400 V The sytem A potential transformer primary voltage is entered in
voltage this parameter. The system A rated voltage is used as a reference
figure for all system A voltage related functions, which use a per-
centage value, like sytem A voltage monitoring, breaker operation
windows or the Analog Manager.
1768 SyB. rated 2 50 to 650,000 V 400 V The system A potential transformer primary voltage is entered in
voltage this parameter. The system A rated voltage is used as a reference
figure for all system A voltage related functions, which use a per-
centage value, like system A voltage monitoring, breaker opera-
tion windows or the Analog Manager.
1752 SyA. rated 2 0.5 to 99,999.9 200.00 This value specifies the system A real power rating, which is used
active power as a reference figure for related functions.
[kW]
1758 SyA. rated 2 0.5 to 99999.9 200.00 This value specifies the system A reactive power rating, which is
react. pwr. used as a reference figure for related functions.
[kvar]
1754 SyA. rated 2 1 to 32,000 A 300 A This value specifies the system A rated current, which is used as
current a reference figure for related functions.
1858 1Ph2W 2 Phase - phase / Phase - Phase phase: The unit is configured for measuring phase-
voltage Phase - neutral phase phase voltages if 1Ph 2W measuring is selected.
measuring Phase neutral: The unit is configured for measuring phase-
neutral voltages if 1Ph 2W measuring is selected.
NOTE: Please refer to the comments on measuring principles in

the Chapter 1: Installation.
1859 1Ph2W 2 CW / CCW CW CW: A clockwise rotation field is supposed for 1Ph 2W measuring.
phase CCW: A counter-clockwise rotation field is supposed for 1Ph 2W
rotation measuring.
NOTE: The measurement of phase rotation with 1Ph2W is not

possible. For this reason montitoring phase rotation mismatch is
working with this supposed phase rotation.


1851 SyA. voltage 2 3Ph 4W / 3Ph 4W 3Ph 4W: Measurement is performed Line-Neutral (WYE con-
measuring 3Ph 3W / nected system) and Line-Line (Delta connected system). The pro-
1Ph 2W / tection depends on the setting of parameter 1771 on page 77.
1Ph 3W / Phase voltages and the neutral must be connected for proper cal-
3Ph 4W OD culation. Measurement, display and protection are adjusted ac-
cording to the rules for WYE connected systems. Monitoring refers
to the following voltages:
VL12, VL23, and VL31 (parameter 1771 configured to
"Phase-phase")
VL1N, VL2N, and VL3N (parameter 1771 configured to
"Phase-neutral")
3Ph 3W: Measurement is performed Line-Line (Delta connected
system). Phase voltages must be connected for proper calcula-
tion. Measurement, display and protection are adjusted according
to the rules for Delta connected systems. Monitoring refers to the
following voltages:
VL12, VL23, VL31
1Ph 2W: Measurement is performed Line-Neutral (WYE con-
nected system) if parameter 1858 is configured to "Phase - neu-
tral" and Line-Line (Delta connected system) if parameter 1858 is
configured to "Phase - phase". Measurement, display and protec-
tion are adjusted according to the rules for phase-phase systems.
Monitoring refers to the following voltages:
VL1N, VL12
nected system) and Line-Line (Delta connected system). The pro-
tection depends on the setting of parameter 1771 on page 77.
Measurement, display, and protection are adjusted according to
the rules for single-phase systems. Monitoring refers to the follow-
ing voltages:
VL1N, VL3N (parameter 1771 configured to "Phase-
phase")
VL13 (parameter 1771 configured to "Phase-neutral")
NOTE: If this parameter is configured to 1Ph 3W, the system A

rated voltages (parameter 1766) must be entered as Line-Line
(Delta).

1850 SyA. current L1 L2 L3 / L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3: All three phases are monitored. Measurement, display
measuring Phase L1 and protection are adjusted according to the rules for 3-phase
Phase L2 measurement. Monitoring refers to the following currents:
Phase L3 IL1, IL2, IL3
Phase L{1/2/3}: Only one phase is monitored. Measurement, dis-
play and protection are adjusted according to the rules for single-
phase measurement. Monitoring refers to the selected phase.

1853 SyB. voltage 3Ph 4W / 3Ph 4W 3Ph 4W: Measurement is performed Line-Neutral (WYE con-
measuring 3Ph 3W / nected system) and Line-Line (Delta connected system). The pro-
1Ph 2W / tection depends on the setting of parameter 1770 on page 90.
1Ph 3W Phase voltages and the neutral must be connected for proper cal-
culation. Measurement, display and protection are adjusted ac-
cording to the rules for WYE connected systems. Monitoring refers
to the following voltages:
VL12, VL23, and VL31 (parameter 1770 configured to
"Phase-phase")
VL1N, VL2N and VL3N (parameter 1770 configured to
"Phase-neutral")
3Ph 3W: Measurement is performed Line-Line (Delta connected
system). Phase voltages must be connected for proper calcula-
tion. Measurement, display and protection are adjusted according
to the rules for Delta connected systems. Monitoring refers to the
following voltages:
VL12, VL23, VL31
nected system) if parameter 1858 is configured to "Phase - neu-
tral" and Line-Line (Delta connected system) if parameter 1858 is
configured to "Phase - phase". Measurement, display and protec-
tion are adjusted according to the rules for phase-phase systems.
Monitoring refers to the following voltages:
VL1N, VL12
nected system) and Line-Line (Delta connected system). The pro-
tection depends on the setting of parameter 1770 on page 90.
Measurement, display, and protection are adjusted according to
the rules for single-phase systems. Monitoring refers to the follow-
ing voltages:
VL1N, VL3N (parameter 1770 configured to "Phase-
phase")
VL13 (parameter 1770 configured to "Phase-neutral")
NOTE: If this parameter is configured to 1Ph 3W, the system B

rated voltages (parameter 1768) must be entered as Line-Line
(Delta).


Transformer Configuration
NOTE
This controller is available in two different hardware version with either 1A [../1] or 5A [../5] current
transformer inputs. Both versions are discussed in this manual. The setpoints for specific parameters
will differ depending upon the hardware version, indicated on the data plate.
[1] LS-5xx-1 = Current transformer with ../1 A rated current
[5] LS-5xx-5 = Current transformer with ../5 A rated current
1801 SyA. PT 2 50 to 650,000 V 400 V Some applications may require the use of potential transformers
prim. rated to facilitate measuring the voltages. The rating of the primary side
voltage of the potential transformer must be entered into this parameter.
If the application does not require potential transformers at sytem

A (i.e. the voltage is 480 V or less), then this voltage will be en-
tered into this parameter.
1800 SyA. PT sec. 2 50 to 480 V 400 V Some applications may require the use of potential transformers
rated voltage to facilitate measuring the voltages. The rating of the secondary
side of the potential transformer must be entered into this parame-
ter.
If the application does not require potential transformers at system
A (i.e. the voltage is 480 V or less), then this voltage will be en-
Rated voltage: 100 Vac (this parameter configured be-

tween 50 and 130 V)
- System A voltage: Terminals 14/16/18/20
tween 131 and 480 V)
- System A voltage: Terminals 15/17/19/21
WARNING: Only connect the measured voltage to either the

100 Vac or the 400 Vac inputs. Do not connect both sets of inputs
to the measured system.
NOTE: The control is equipped with dual voltage measuring in-

puts. The voltage range of these measurement inputs is depen-
dent upon input terminals are used (see below). This value refers
to the secondary voltages of the potential transformers, which are
directly connected to the control.
1806 SyA. CT 2 1 to 32,000 A/x 500 A/x The input of the current transformer ratio is necessary for the indi-
prim. rated cation and control of the actual monitored value. The current
current transformers ratio should be selected so that at least 60% of the
secondary current rating can be measured when the monitored
system is at 100% of operating capacity (i.e. at 100% of system
capacity a 5 A CT should output 3 A). If the current transformers
are sized so that the percentage of the output is lower, the loss of
resolution may cause inaccuracies in the monitoring and control
functions and affect the functionality of the control.
NOTE: This screen only applies to controls equipped with 5 A CT

inputs. This will not be displayed in the controller screen of a unit
equipped with 1 A CT inputs.
1804 SyB. PT 2 50 to 650,000 V 400 V Some applications may require the use of potential transformers
prim. rated to facilitate measuring the voltages to be monitored. The rating of
voltage the primary side of the potential transformer must be entered into
this parameter.
If the application does not require potential transformers (i.e. the

measured voltage is 480 V or less), then this voltage will be en-

1803 SyB. PT sec. 2 50 to 480 V 400 V Some applications may require the use of potential transformers
rated voltage to facilitate measuring the mains voltages. The rating of the sec-
ondary side of the potential transformer must be entered into this
parameter.
If the application does not require potential transformers (i.e. the

measured voltage is 480 V or less), then the this voltage will be
entered into this parameter.

tween 50 and 130 V)
- System B voltage: Terminals 22/24/26/28
tween 131 and 480 V)
- System B Voltage: Terminals 23/25/27/29
WARNING: Only connect the measured voltage to either the

100 Vac or the 400 Vac inputs. Do not connect both sets of inputs
to the measured system.
NOTE: The control is equipped with dual voltage measuring in-

puts. The voltage range of these measurement inputs is depen-
dent upon input terminals are used (see below). This value refers
to the secondary voltages of the potential transformers, which are
directly connected to the control.

Interfaces Configuration
8051 Toolkit 2 Serial 1 / Serial 2 Serial 1 Serial 1: Toolkit is working at Serial #1 interface (RS-232)
interface Serial 2: Toolkit is working at Serial #2 interface (RS-485)
CAN Interface Configuration
NOTE
The CAN bus is a field bus and subject to various disturbances. Therefore, it cannot be guaranteed that
every request will be answered. We recommend to repeat a request, which is not answered within rea-
sonable time.
9923 Comm. LS5 2 CAN #1 / Off CAN #1 The interface, which is used for transmitting the LS-5 data and ea-
<-> gen. sYgen load share data is configured here.
device
9921 Transfer rate 2 0.10 to 0.30 s 0.10 s The transfer rate defines the time delay between two fast CAN
fast message messages.
In case of CAN systems with a high bus load (e.g. long distance
between the units with low baud rate), a shorter transfer rate
(higher time setting) helps to reduce the bus load.
9920 Comm. LS5 2 2xx Hex / 5xx Hex The first digit of the CAN ID or the range (i.e. 2xx means 200
<-> gen. 3xx Hex / through 2FF) is configured here. The last two digits will be as-
CAN-ID 4xx Hex / signed by the control with the settings from the device number
5xx Hex (parameter 1702 on page 60).
CAN Interface 1 Configuration
3156 Baudrate 2 20 kBaud / 250 This parameter defines the used Baud rate. Please note, that all
50 kBaud / kBaud participants on the CAN bus must use the same Baud rate.
100 kBaud /
125 kBaud /
250 kBaud /
500 kBaud /
800 kBaud /
1,000 kBaud
8950 Node-ID 2 1 to 127 (dec) 33 A number that is unique to the control must be set in this parame-
CAN bus 1 ter so that this control unit can be correctly identified on the CAN
bus. This address number may only be used once on the CAN
bus. All additional addresses are calculated based on this unique
device number.
NOTE: We recommend to take the same number as the device

number. If there are no easYgens at the bus, we recommend
configuring the Node-IDs for units, which participate, as low as
possible to facilitate establishing of communication.

GGB .

8993 CANopen 2 Default Master / Default One bus participant must take over the network management and
Master On / Master put the other participants into "operational" mode. The LS-5 is
Off able to perform this task.
Default Master: The unit starts up in "operational" mode and

sends a "Start_Remote_node" message after a short delay (the
delay is the Node ID (parameter 8950) in seconds, i.e. if the Node
ID is configured to 2, the message will be sent after 2 seconds). If
more than one easYgen is configured to Default Master, the unit
with the lower Node ID will take over control. Therefore, the CAN
bus devices, which are intended to act as Default Master should
be assigned a low Node ID. No other device on the CAN bus (ex-
cept the easYgens) may operate as Master).
On: The unit is the CANopen Master and automatically changes
into operational mode and transmits data.
Off: The unit is a CANopen Slave. An external Master must
change into operational mode.
NOTE: If CANopen Master (parameter 8993) is configured to

"Off", the Master controller (for example a PLC) must send a
"Start_Remote_node" message to initiate the load share message
transmission of the easYgen. If no "Start_Remote_node" message
would be sent, the complete system would not be operational.
9120 Producer 2 0 to 65,500 ms 2,000 ms Independent from the CANopen Master configuration, the unit
heartbeat transmits a heartbeat message with this configured heartbeat
time cycle time. If the producer heartbeat time is equal 0, the heartbeat
will only be sent as response to a remote frame request. The time
configured here will be rounded up to the next 20 ms step.
9100 COB-ID 2 1 to FFFFFFFF 80 hex This parameter defines whether the unit generates the SYNC
SYNC hex message or not.
Message
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1005, subindex 0; defines the COB ID of
the synchronization object (SYNC). The structure of this object is shown in the following
tables:
UNSIGNED 32 MSB LSB

Bits 31 30 29 28-11 10-0
11 bit ID X 0/1 X 000000000000000000 11 bit
Identi-
fier
Bit number Value Meaning

31 (MSB) X N/A
30 0 Unit does not generate SYNC message
1 Unit generates SYNC message
29 X N/A
28-11 0 Always
10-0 (LSB) X Bits 10-0 of SYNC COB ID
8940 Producer 2 0 to 65,000 ms 20 ms This is the cycle time of the SYNC message. If the unit is confi-
SYNCMes- gured for this function (parameter 9100) it will send the SYNC
sage time message with this interval. The time configured here will be
rounded up to the next 10 ms step.
9101 COB-ID 2 1 to FFFFFFFF C000010 This parameter defines whether the unit generates the TIME mes-
TIME hex 0 hex sage or not.
Message
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1012, subindex 0; defines the COB ID of
the time object (TIME). The structure of this object is shown in the following tables:
UNSIGNED 32 MSB LSB

Bits 31 30 29 28-11 10-0
11 bit ID X 0/1 X 000000000000000000 11 bit
Identi-
fier

31 (MSB) X N/A
30 0 Unit does not generate TIME message
1 Unit generates TIME message
29 X N/A
28-11 0 Always
10-0 (LSB) X Bits 10-0 of SYNC COB ID

Additional Server SDOs (Service Data Objects)
NOTE
The CAN bus is a field bus and subject to various disturbances. Therefore, it cannot be guaranteed that
every request will be answered. We recommend to repeat a request, which is not answered within rea-
sonable time.
NOTE
The first Node ID is the standard Node ID of CAN interface 1 (parameter 8950).
33040 2. Node ID 2 0 to 127 (dec) 0 In a multi-master application, each Master needs its own identifier
(Node ID) from the unit in order to send remote signals (i.e. re-
mote start, stop, or acknowledge) to the unit. The additional SDO
channel will be made available by configuring this Node ID to a
value different than zero. This is the additional CAN ID for the
PLC.
PLC.
PLC.
PLC.

Receive PDO 1 (Process Data Object)
Figure 3-5: Interfaces - Principle of RPDO mapping
NOTE
Do not configure an RPDO or TPDO with a COB-ID higher than 580 (hex) or lower than 180 (hex). These
IDs are reserved for internal purposes.
9300 COB-ID 2 1 to FFFFFFFF 80000000 This parameter contains the communication parameters for the
hex hex PDOs, the device is able to receive.
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1400 (for RPDO 1, 1401 for RPDO 2 and
1402 for TPDO 3), subindex 1. The structure of this object is shown in the following
tables:
UNSIGNED 32 MSB LSB

Bits 31 30 29 28-11 10-0
11 bit ID 0/1 X X 000000000000000000 11 bit
Identi-
fier

31 (MSB) 0 PDO exists / is valid
1 PDO does not exist / is not valid
30 X N/A
29 X N/A
28-11 0 Always
10-0 (LSB) X Bits 10-0 of COB ID
PDO valid / not valid allows selecting, which PDOs are used in the
operational state.
9121 Event timer 2 0 to 65,500 ms 2,000 ms This parameter configures the time, from which this PDO is
marked as "not existing". The time configured here will be rounded
up to the next 5 ms step. Received messages are processed by
the control unit every 20 ms. Messages, which are sent faster, will
be discarded. We recommend to configure ten times the cycle
time of the received data here.
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1400 (for TPDO 1, 1401 for TPDO 2 and
1402 for TPDO 3), subindex 5

Transmit PDO {x} (Process Data Objects)
Figure 3-6: Interfaces - Principle of TPDO mapping
NOTE
Do not configure an RPDO or TPDO with a COB-ID higher than 580 (hex) or lower than 180 (hex). These
IDs are reserved for internal purposes.
9600 COB-ID 2 1 to FFFFFFFF 181 hex This parameter contains the communication parameters for the
9610 hex 80000000 PDOs, the device is able to transmit.
9620 hex
80000000 Complies with CANopen specification: object 1400 (for RPDO 1, 1401 for RPDO 2 and
1402 for TPDO 3), subindex 1. The structure of this object is shown in the following
hex tables:
UNSIGNED 32 MSB LSB

Bits 31 30 29 28-11 10-0
11 bit ID 0/1 X X 000000000000000000 11 bit
Identi-
fier

31 (MSB) 0 PDO exists / is valid
1 PDO does not exist / is not valid
30 X N/A
29 X N/A
28-11 0 Always
10-0 (LSB) X Bits 10-0 of COB ID
PDO valid / not valid allows selecting, which PDOs are used in the
operational state.
8962 Selected 2 0 to 65,535 5301 A data protocol may be selected by entering the data protocol ID
8963 data protocol 0 here. If 0 is configured here, the message assembled by the map-
8964 0 ping parameters is used. If an unknown data protocol ID is confi-
gured here, a failure is indicated by the CAN status bits. Possible
data protocol IDs are:
5301: Data telegram

9602 Transmis- 2 0 to 255 255 This parameter contains the communication parameters for the
9612 sion type PDOs the unit is able to transmit. It defines whether the unit
9622 broadcasts all data automatically (value 254 or 255) or only upon
request with the configured address of the COB ID SYNC mes-
sage (parameter 9100).
1802 for TPDO 3), subindex 2. The description of the transmission type is shown in the
following table:
Transmission PDO Transmissions

type
Cyclic Acyclic Ayn- Asyn- RTR only
chronous chronous
0 Will not be sent
1-240 X - X - -
241-251 Will not be sent
252 Will not be sent
253 Will not be sent
254 - - - X -
255 - - - X -
A value between 1 and 240 means that the PDO is transferred synchronously and cyclically. The
transmission type indicating the number of SYNC, which are necessary to trigger PDO transmis-
sions. Receive PDOs are always triggered by the following SYNC upon reception of data inde-
pendent of the transmission types 0 to 240. For TPDOs, transmission type 254 and 255 means,
the application event is the event timer.
9604 Event timer 2 0 to 65,500 ms 20 ms This parameter contains the communication parameters for the
9614 PDOs the unit is able to transmit. The broadcast cycle for the
9624 transmitted data is configured here. The time configured here will
be rounded up to the next 5 ms step.
1802 for TPDO 3), subindex 5
9609 Number of 2 0 to 4 0 This parameter contains the mapping for the PDOs the unit is able
9619 mapped to transmit. This number is also the number of the application va-
9629 objects riables, which shall be transmitted with the corresponding PDO.
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1A00 (for TPDO 1, 1A01 for TPDO 2 and
1A02 for TPDO 3), subindex 0
9605 1. Mapped 2 0 to 65535 0 This parameter contains the information about the mapped appli-
9615 object cation variables. These entries describe the PDO contents by their
9625 index. The sub-index is always 1. The length is determined auto-
matically.
matically.
matically.
matically.

NOTE
CANopen allows to send 8 byte of data with each Transmit PDO. These may be defined separately if no
pre-defined data protocol is used.
All data protocol parameters with a parameter ID may be sent as an object with a CANopen Transmit
PDO.
In this case, the data length will be taken from the data byte column (refer to the Data Protocols section
in the Interface Manual 37430):
1,2 UNSIGNED16 or SIGNED16
1,2,3,4 UNSIGNED32 or SIGNED32
3,4,5,6 UNSIGNED32 or SIGNED32
etc.
The object ID is identical with the parameter ID when configuring via front panel or ToolKit.

RS-232 Interface Configuration (Serial 1)
3163 Baudrate 2 2.4 kBd / 19.2 kBd This parameter defines the baud rate for communications. Please
4.8 kBd / note, that all participants on the bus must use the same baud rate.
9.6 kBd /
14.4 kBd /
19.2 kBd /
38.4 kBd /
56 kBd /
115 kBd
3161 Parity 2 No / Even / Odd No The used parity of the interface is set here.
3162 Stop bits 2 One / Two One The number of stop bits is set here.
3185 Modbus 2 0 to 255 33 The Modbus device address, which is used to identify the device
slave ID via Modbus, is entered here. If "0" is configured here, the Modbus
is disabled.
3186 Reply delay 2 0.00 to 1.00 s 0.00 s This is the minimum delay time between a request from the Mod-
time bus master and the sent response of the slave. This time is also
required if an external interface converter to RS-485 is used for
example.
RS-485 Interface Configuration (Serial 2)
3170 Baudrate 2 2.4 kBd / 19.2 kBd This parameter defines the baud rate for communications. Please
4.8 kBd / note, that all participants on the bus must use the same baud rate.
9.6 kBd /
14.4 kBd /
19.2 kBd /
38.4 kBd /
56 kBd /
115 kBd
3171 Parity 2 No / Even / Odd No The used parity of the interface is set here.
3172 Stop bits 2 One / Two One The number of stop bits is set here.
3188 Modbus 2 0 to 255 33 The Modbus device address, which is used to identify the device
slave ID via Modbus, is entered here. If "0" is configured here, the Modbus
is disabled.
3189 Reply delay 2 0.00 to 2.55 s 0.00 s This is the minimum delay time between a request from the Mod-
time bus master and the sent response of the slave. This time is re-
quired in halfduplex mode.

Modbus Protocol 5300 Multiple
3181 Power [W] 2 2 to 5 3 This setting adjusts the format of the 16 bit power values in the
exponent data telegram.
10^x
Example power measurement:
The measurement range is 0250 kW
Momentarily measurement value = 198.5 kW (198.500 W)
Set- Mean- Calcula- Transfer value Possible

ting ing tion (16Bit, Display
max.32767) Format
2 102 1985 198.5 kW
3 103 198 198 k
4 104 9 N/A
5 105 1 N A
3182 Voltage [V] 2 -1 to 2 0 This setting adjusts the format of the 16 bit voltage values in the
10^x
Example voltage measurement:
The measurement range is 0480 V
Momentarily measurement value = 477.8 V
Set i Mean- Calcula- Transfer value Possible

ng ing tion (16Bit, Display
max.32767) Format
-1 10-1 4778 4 7.8 V
0 100 477 477 V
1 101 47 N/A
102 4 N/A
3183 Current [A] 2 -1 to 0 0 This setting adjusts the format of the 16 bit current values in the
10^x
Example current measurement:
The measurement range is 0500 A
Momentarily measurement value = 345.4 A
Set i Mean- Calcula- Transfer value Possible

ng ing tion (16Bit, Display
max.32767) Format
-1 10-1 3454 345.4 A
0 100 345 345 A

LogicsManager Configuration
Internal Flags Configuration
Internal flags within the LogicsManager logical outputs may be programmed and used for multiple functions. For
conditions and explanation of programming please refer to page 195 in chapter "LogicsManager").
yyyyy Flag {x} 2 LogicsManager (0 & 1) Internal flags: Flag {x} [x = 1 to 16]
&1 The flags may be used as auxiliary flags for complex combinations
by using the logical output of these flags as command variable for
other logical outputs.
Flag {x} Flag 1 Flag 2 Flag 3 Flag 4 Flag 5 Flag 6 Flag 7 Flag 8
Parameter ID yyyyy 12230 12240 12250 12260 12270 12280 12290 12300
Flag {x} Flag 9 Flag 10 Flag 11 Flag 12 Flag 13 Flag 14 Flag 15 Flag 16
Parameter ID yyyyy 12910 12911 12912 12913 12914 12915 12916 12917
Table 3-7: Internal flags - parameter IDs
LS5 Flags Configuration
Each LS-5 has five special flags (Flag 1 LS5 to Flag 5 LS5) which can be defined via LogicsManager. They
are transmitted via CAN bus. These flags (26.01 to 27.80) are received by the other LS-5 and easYgen devices
and can be used as inputs for the LogicsManager.
xxxxx Flag {x} LS5 2 LogicsManager (0 & 1) LS5 flags: Flag {x} LS5 [x = 1 to 5]
&1 The flags may be used as auxiliary flags for complex combinations
Flag {x} LS5 Flag 1 Flag 2 Flag 3 Flag 4 Flag 5

LS5 LS5 LS5 LS5 LS5
Parameter ID xxxxx 12952 12953 12954 12955 12956
Table 3-8: LS5 flags - parameter IDs

LED Configuration
Each LS-5 has eight LED flags (LED 1 to LED 8) which can be defined via LogicsManager. LED (internal)
flags (24.51 to 24.58) within the LogicsManager logical outputs may be programmed and used for multiple func-
tions. For conditions and explanation of programming please refer to page 195 in chapter "LogicsManager").
xxxxx LED{x} 2 LogicsManager - LED flags: LED {x} [x = 1 to 8]
LS-51x
The flags are used to control the LED states. The default values
are defined on the provided paper strip.
LS-52x
The flags may be used as auxiliary flags for complex combinations
LED {x} LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8
Parameter ID xxxxx 12962 12963 12964 12965 12966 12967 12968 12969
Table 3-9: LED flags - parameter IDs
NOTE
The LED configuration is used in the LS-51x to control the LEDs. In the LS-52x version the LED flags
can be used as additional internal flags.

Set Timers
Daily Time Setpoint
Utilizing the LogicsManager it is possible to establish specific times of the day that functions (i.e. generator ex-
erciser) can be enabled. The two daily time setpoints are activated each day at the configured time. Using the Lo-
gicsManager these setpoints may be configured individually or combined to create a time range.
1652 Timer {x}: 2 0 to 23 h 8h Timer: Daily time setpoint {x} [x = 1/2]: hour
1657 Hour 17 h Enter the hour of the daily time setpoint here. Example:
23: 23rd hour of the day (11pm).
1651 Timer {x}: 2 0 to 59 min 0 min Timer: Daily time setpoint {x} [x = 1/2]: minute
1656 Minute Enter the minute of the daily time setpoint here. Example:
1650 Timer {x}: 2 0 to 59 s 0s Timer: Daily time setpoint {x} [x = 1/2]: second
1655 Second Enter the second of the daily time setpoint here. Example
Active Time Setpoint
Utilizing the LogicsManager it is possible to establish specific days (or hours, minutes, seconds) that functions
(i.e. generator exerciser) can be enabled. The active switching point is activated only on a specified day (or hour,
minute, second). The set points may be configured individually or combined via the LogicsManager. You may
configure monthly, daily, hourly, minutely, or even secondly time setpoints depending on how you combine the
setpoints in the LogicsManager.
1663 Active day 2 1 to 31 1 Timer: Active time setpoint: day

Enter the day of the active switch point here. Example:
The active time setpoint is enabled during the indicated day from
0:00:00 hours to 23:59:59 hours.
1662 Active hour 2 0 to 23 h 12 h Timer: Active time setpoint: hour
Enter the hour of the active switch point here. Example:
0: 0th hour of the day.
23: 23rd hour of the day.
The active time setpoint is enabled every day during the indicated
hour from minute 0 to minute 59.
1661 Active 2 0 to 59 min 0 min Timer: Active time setpoint: minute
minute Enter the minute of the active switch point here. Example:
The active time setpoint is enabled every hour during the indicated
minute from second 0 to second 59.
1660 Active 2 0 to 59 s 0s Timer: Active time setpoint: second
second Enter the second of the active switch point here. Example:
59: 59th second the minute.
The active time setpoint is enabled every minute during the indi-
cated second.

Weekly Time Setpoint
Utilizing the LogicsManager it is possible to establish specific days of the week that functions (i.e. generator ex-
erciser) can be enabled. The weekly time setpoint is enabled during the indicated day from 0:00:00 hours to
23:59:59 hours.
1670 Monday 2 Yes / No Yes Timer: Weekly time setpoints Monday: days
active Please enter the days of the weekly workdays:
Yes: The switch point is enabled every Monday
No: The switch point is disabled every Monday
1671 Tuesday 2 Yes / No Yes Timer: Weekly time setpoints Tuesday: days
Yes: The switch point is enabled every Tuesday
No: The switch point is disabled every Tuesday
1672 Wednesday 2 Yes / No Yes Timer: Weekly time setpoints Wednesday: days
Yes: The switch point is enabled every Wednesday
No: The switch point is disabled every Wednesday
1673 Thursday 2 Yes / No Yes Timer: Weekly time setpoints Thursday: days
Yes: The switch point is enabled every Thursday
No: The switch point is disabled every Thursday
1674 Friday 2 Yes / No Yes Timer: Weekly time setpoints Friday: days
Yes: The switch point is enabled every Friday
No: The switch point is disabled every Friday
1675 Saturday 2 Yes / No No Timer: Weekly time setpoints Saturday: days
Yes: The switch point is enabled every Saturday
No: The switch point is disabled every Saturday
1676 Sunday 2 Yes / No No Timer: Weekly time setpoints Sunday: days
Yes: The switch point is enabled every Sunday
No: The switch point is disabled every Sunday

Counters Configuration
CB Close Counter
2541 Counter 2 0 to 65,535 0 Setpoint value for CBA close counter

value This parameter defines the number of times the control unit regis-
present ters a CBA closure. The number entered here will overwrite the
current displayed value after confirming with parameter 2542 on
page 117.
2542 CBA set 2 Yes / No No Set CBA close counter
number of Yes: The current value of the CBA close counter is overwritten
closures with the value configured in "Set point value for start counter". Af-
ter the counter has been (re)set, this parameter changes back to
"No" automatically.
No: The value of this counter is not changed.

Chapter 4.
Operation
Figure 4-1: Front panel and display
Figure 4-1 illustrates the front panel/display of the LS-52x with push buttons, LEDs and LCD display. A short
description of the front panel is given below.
A
No Button Function Main Screen Function Other Screens
Change into MANUAL operating mode. The LED indicates that the operation mode is active. When
1 MANUAL is selected, the breaker control is performed manually via the push button (No. 5). If the con-
troller is configured to operation mode L-MCB or L-GGB (parameter ID 8840) the button has no function.
Change into AUTOMATIC operating mode. The LED indicates that the operation mode is active. When
2 AUTOMATIC is selected, the control unit manages all breaker control functions. These functions are per-
formed in accordance with how the control is configured.
3 Perform lamp test.
B
Toggle between delta/wye voltage display. The in-
dex of the "V" symbol indicates whether delta or The push button has only a function if a graphic
4
wye voltage is displayed and which phases are dis- icon is assigened (No. 12).
played. See table Table 4-1 on page 120
AUTOMATIC operating mode No function.
The push button has only a function if a graphic
5 MANUAL operating mode Open / Close
icon is assigened (No. 12).
Breaker.
The push button has only a function if a graphic
6 No function.
icon is assigened (No. 12).
7 The LED indicates that alarm messages are active / present in the control unit.

C
Display the Alarm list screen. Scroll up / Raise value
Display the Main menu screen. Scroll down / Lower value
Display the Parameter screen. Scroll right

8
No function. Scroll left / Enter menu (if graphic icon is assigned)
Reset Horn. Enter / Acknowledge
No function. Return to last screen
D
The LED indicates three states:
Off: Voltage is below dead bus limit (parameter ID 5820).
9 Blinking: Voltage higher than dead bus limit (parameter ID 5820) but voltage or frequency are not in
range.
On: Voltage / frequency in operation window.
The LED indicates two states:
10 Off: Breaker is opened.
On: Breaker is closed.
The LED indicates three states:
Off: Voltage is below dead bus limit (parameter ID 5820).
11 Blinking: Voltage higher than dead bus limit (parameter ID 5820) but voltage or frequency are not in
range.
On: Voltage / frequency in operation window.
Main Screen
No Display Function
A: Shows the System A values.

B: Shows the System B values.
This display section shows the Status Messages and Alarm Messages. A
detailed list of the messages can be found in paragraph Display Messages on
12 page 129.
The voltage display softkey changes the type of voltage display. The amount of
information available from the system depends on how the measuring is confi-
gured in the control. Table 4-1 on page 120 illustrates what values are available
depending on the configured measurement type.
This graphic icon is only displayed in the MANUAL operating mode.
NOTE
If the control unit has been configured for external operating mode selection, the AUTO and MAN oper-
ating push buttons have no function. The operating mode cannot be changed.

Measuring point Scroll display Symbol of' Displayed at
the displayed voltage parameter setting
Soft Press 3Ph 3Ph 1Ph 1Ph
key 4W 3W 2W 3W
System A / System B 0 (6) Delta L1-L2 yes yes Yes ---

*1
1 Delta L2-L3 yes yes --- ---
2 Delta L3-L1 yes yes --- yes
3 Wye L1-N yes --- Yes yes
*1
4 Wye L2-N yes --- --- ---
5 Wye L3-N yes --- --- yes
Table 4-1: Measuring values

*1 (depends on setting of parameter 1858)

Screen Structure

The following figure shows the screen structure of the LS-52x control device.
Figure 4-2: Screen structure

Navigation

Alarm List
Screen "Alarm list"
This screen appears after pressing the softkey in the main screen.
All alarm messages, which have not been acknowledged and
cleared, are displayed. Each alarm is displayed with the alarm mes-
sage and the date and time of the alarm occurred in the format mon-
dd hh:mm:ss.ss. Please note, that self-acknowledging alarm mes-
sages get a new timestamp when initializing the unit (switching on).
The symbol indicates that this alarm condition is still present. A
maximum of 16 alarm messages can be displayed. If 16 alarm mes-
sages are already displayed and further alarm messages occur, these
will not be displayed before displayed alarm messages are ac-
knowledged and thus deleted from the list.
Return to the main screen.
Scroll up to next alarm message.

Scroll down to next alarm message.
Acknowledge alarm. (can be only performed if alarm
condition is not present)
Parameter
The following section shows only some selected screens which have special functions or operation features
which extend the standard operation.
Screen "Parameter"
This screen appears after pressing the softkey in the main

screen.

Scroll up to next menu item.
Scroll down to next menu item.
Enter menu item.
Password display
Displays the code level.
Configuration
Display the configuration menu screen.
Language / clock configuration
Display the language / clock configuration.
Display configuration
Display the display configuration.
Enter password
Display the password entry screen.
System management
Display the system management configuration screen.

Screen "Display configuration"
This screen appears after selecting the "Display configuration"
menu in the "Parameter" screen. The contrast of the display may be
configured here.
Return to the "Parameter" screen.
Increase contrast.
Decrease contrast.
Screen "Enter password"
This screen appears after selecting the "Enter password" menu in

the "Parameter" screen. Only the password may be entered using
this screen. The code levels are only displayed depending on the en-
tered password.
Return to the "Parameter" screen.
Scroll up one parameter.

Scroll down one parameter.
Select the parameter to be configured with this button.
Change the parameter using the softkeys. Navigate in
the screen using the softkeys. Confirm the change
with the softkey or exit parameter configuration without
any changes using the softkey.
Screen "LogicsManager configuration"
This screen appears after selecting "Configuration/LogicsManager

configuration/Internal flags configuration/Flag 1" menu in the "Pa-
rameter" screen. Some parameters are configured via the Logics-
Manager (refer to Chapter: Configuration). A typical LogicsMa-
nager screen is shown in the following. You may configure a
logical operation using various command variables, signs, logical
operators, and delay times to achieve the desired logical output.
Return to the "Internal flags configuration" screen.
Scroll up one command variable within section.

Scroll down one command variable within section.
Navigate to next command variable section.
By pressing this softkey character you get to a help
screen, which displays the logical operators of the Logics-
Manager.
Toggle between the configurable elements.
Confirm the configured option of the selected LogicsMa-
nager parameter.

Main Menu
The following section shows only some selected screens which have special functions or operation features
which extend the standard operation.
Screen "Main Menu"
This screen appears after pressing the softkey in the main

screen.

Scroll up to next menu item.
Scroll down to next menu item.
Enter menu item.
Application mode LS5

Displays the current LS5 application mode.
Measured Values
Display the measured values screen.
States easYgen
Display the easYgen states screen.
States LS5
Display the LS5 states screen.
Synchroscope
Display the synchroscope screen.
Counters
Display the counters screen.
Diagnostic
Display the diagonstic screen.
Screen "System A"
This screen appears after selecting the "System A" menu in the
"Measured values" screen. All measured system A values are dis-
played in this screen.
Return to "Measured values" screen.
Scroll down display screen to additional system A values.

Scroll up display screen to main system A values.
Reset the maximum value display.
V ....... Voltage
A ....... Current
kW .... Real power
Kvar . Reactive power
Hz ..... Frequency
Lg ..... Lagging
Ld ..... Leading

Screen "System angles"
This screen appears after selecting the "System angles" menu in the
"Measured values" screen. All measured system angle values are
displayed in this screen.
NOTE: The shown values are the real sytem angles between system
A and system B without phase angle compensation
(parameter ID 8824).
Screen "Analog inputs"
This screen appears after selecting the "Analog inputs menu in the
"Measured values" screen. All measured battery voltagr is dis-
played in this screen.
Screen "Discrete inputs/outputs"
This screen appears after selecting the "Discrete inputs/outputs"

menu in the "Measured values" screen. Discrete input and discrete
output status are displayed.
Return to "Measured Values" screen.
Status display of the discrete inputs and discrete outputs.

(Note: The configured logic for the discrete input
"N.O./N.C." will determine how the LS-5 reacts to the state
of the discrete input. If the respective DI is configured to
N.O, the unit reacts on the energized state ( ); if it is con-
figured to N.C., it reacts on the de-energized state
( ).
Discrete input: energized
de-energized
Discrete output: relay activated
relay de-activated

Screen "States easYgen"
This screen appears after selecting the "States easYgen" menu in

the "Main menu" screen. The states of the easYgen devices are dis-
played.
Return to "Main menu" screen.

Scroll up one screen.
(Four screens 32 easYgen states) Scroll down one screen.
STOP operating mode.

MANUAL operating mode.
AUTOMATIC operating mode.
Breaker open (GCB).
Breaker closed (GCB).
Segment number.
Device number.
Screen "States LS5"
This screen appears after selecting the "States LS5" menu in the
"Main menu" screen. The states of the LS-5 devices are displayed.

Scroll up one screen.
Scroll down one screen.
(Four screens 32 LS-5 states)
Segment numbers and

Breaker switch: opened / closed.
Segment numbers and
Isolation switch: opened / closed.
Indicates voltage and frequency are in range.
Indicates voltage or frequency are not in range.
Own LS-5 device number.
Other LS-5 device numbers.
Screen "Synchroscope"
This screen appears after selecting the "Synchroscope" menu in the

"Main menu" screen. The square symbol indicates the actual phase
angle between system A and system B. A complete left position of
the square symbol means -180 and complete right position means
+180. The frequency and voltage differences are indicated in the
display.
NOTE: The shown value is not the real angle between system A
and system B if the phase angle compensation (parameter ID 8824)
is active. The configured phase angle compensation is added to the
angle.

Screen "LogicsManager conditions"
This screen appears after selecting the "LogicsManager conditions"

menu in the "Diagnostic" screen. You are able to display the condi-
tions of all LogicsManager command variables, which are located
in their respective groups.
Return to "Diagnostic" screen.

Command variables of group 1 (ex.):
Scroll up one group / command variable.
Scroll down one group / command variable.
Select the highlighted command variable group and display

the state of the command variables in this group.
Status display of the command variables:
The command variables is TRUE

The command variables is FALSE

Screen "Version"
This screen appears after selecting the "Version" menu in the "Di-
agnostic" screen. This screen displays the serial number of the unit
and the firm- and software P/N, version, and revision.
Scroll down display screen.

Scroll up display screen.
Screen "Event History"
This screen appears after selecting the "Event History" menu in the
"Diagnostic" screen. A date/time stamp is added to each entry. Ad-
ditional characters (+ and -) indicate the state of the event. The "+"
character indicates a condition that is still active. If the condition is
no longer present anymore, it will be displayed again, but with a "-"
indication.
Scroll up one event.

Scroll down one event.
Screen "CAN interface 1 state"
This screen appears after selecting "CAN interface 1 state" in the

CAN interface 1 state:
"Diagnostic/Miscellaneous" screen.
Return to "Miscellaneous" screen.
Status display of the respective bits:
The respective bit is enabled

The respective bit is disabled
Can bus 1 state:

Bit 1 a TPDO has incorrect mapping parameters
Bit 3 a TPDO has more than 8 bytes
CAN 1 monitoring (active state):
Bit {x} RPDO{x} is not received at the moment
CAN 1 monitoring (latched state):
Bit {x} RPDO{x} has not been received

Display Messages

Status Messages
Message text and ID Meaning

Mains settling Mains settling time is active
ID 13205 When the control unit detects that a mains (system A) fault is in range again the mains settling
timer begins counting down. The mains (system A) is assumed as stable after the expiration of
this timer. If the timer is running a synchronization of CBA is not possible.
CBA dead bus close Dead bus closing of the CBA
ID 13210 The CBA is closing with at least on system is dead.
CBA open The CBA is being opened
ID 13257 An CBA open command has been issued.
Synchronization CBA The CBA will be synchronized
ID 13260 The control tries to synchronize the CBA.
Unloading SyA. The CBA will open with unloading
ID 13264 The LS-5 wants to open the CBA with unloading and is waiting until the power reaches the val-
ue defined by parameter 8819.
Synch. PERMISSIVE Synchronization mode Permissive (twinckling)
ID 13265 Synchronization mode is set to Permissive (parameter 5728)
Synch. CHECK Synchronization mode Check (twinckling)
ID 13266 Synchronization mode is set to Check (parameter 5728)
Synch. OFF Synchronization mode Off (twinckling)
ID 13267 Synchronization mode is set to Off (parameter 5728)
Syn. mains close CBA Synchronous mains close CBA
ID 13279 The LS-5 has detected that System A and System B are connected to mains and is
closing the CBA according to parameters 8820, 8821 and 8822.
CBA request CBA request
ID 13280 There is a command to open or close the CBA, but the execution is already blocked
by the priority of a breaker command off another LS-5/GCB or the LS-5 is still arbi-
trating the priority.

Alarm Messages

Bat. overvoltage 1 Battery overvoltage, limit value 1
ID 10007 The battery voltage has exceeded the limit value 1 for battery overvoltage for at least the confi-
gured time and did not fall below the value of the hysteresis.
Bat. overvoltage 2 Battery overvoltage, limit value 2
ID 10008 The battery voltage has exceeded the limit value 2 for battery overvoltage for at least the confi-
gured time and did not fall below the value of the hysteresis.
Bat. undervoltage 1 Battery undervoltage, limit value 1
ID 10005 The battery voltage has fallen below the limit value 1 for battery undervoltage for at least the
configured time and has not exceeded the value of the hysteresis.
Bat. undervoltage 2 Battery undervoltage, limit value 2
ID 10006 The battery voltage has fallen below the limit value 2 for battery undervoltage for at least the
configured time and has not exceeded the value of the hysteresis.
CANopen Interface 1 Interface alarm CANopen on CAN bus 1
ID 10087 No Receive Process Data Object ( RPDO) is received within the configured time.
EEPROM failure The EEPROM checksum is corrupted
ID 1714 The EEPROM check at startup has resulted a defective EEPROM.
SyB. phase rotation System B rotating field
ID 3955 The system A rotating field does not correspond with the configured direction.
SyA. decoupling System A decoupling is initiated
ID 3114 One or more monitoring function(s) considered for the system A decoupling functionality has
triggered.
SyA. overfreq. 1 System A overfrequency, limit value 1
ID 2862 The system A frequency has exceeded the limit value 1 for system A overfrequency for at least
the configured time and did not fall below the value of the hysteresis.
SyA. overfreq. 2 System A overfrequency, limit value 2
ID 2863 The system A frequency has exceeded the limit value 2 for system A overfrequency for at least
the configured time and did not fall below the value of the hysteresis. Triggering this monitoring
function causes the mains decoupling function to trigger.
SyA. overvoltage 1 System A overvoltage, limit value 1
ID 2962 The system A voltage has exceeded the limit value 1 for system A overvoltage for at least the
configured time and did not fall below the value of the hysteresis.
SyA. overvoltage 2 System A overvoltage, limit value 2
ID 2963 The system A voltage has exceeded the limit value 2 for system A overvoltage for at least the
configured time and did not fall below the value of the hysteresis. Triggering this monitoring
function causes the mains decoupling function to trigger.
SyA. phase shift System A phase shift
ID 3057 A system A phase shift, which has exceeded the configured limit, has occurred. Triggering this
monitoring function causes the system A decoupling function to trigger.
SyA. underfreq. 1 System A underfrequency, limit value 1
ID 2912 The system A frequency has fallen below the limit value 1 for system A underfrequency for at
least the configured time and has not exceeded the value of the hysteresis.
SyA underfreq. 2 System A underfrequency, limit value 2
ID 2913 The system A frequency has fallen below the limit value 2 for system A underfrequency for at
least the configured time and has not exceeded the value of the hysteresis. Triggering this
monitoring function causes the mains decoupling function to trigger.
SyA. undervoltage 1 System A undervoltage, limit value 1
ID 3012 The system A voltage has fallen below the limit value 1 for system A undervoltage for at least
the configured time and has not exceeded the value of the hysteresis.
SyA. undervoltage 2 System A undervoltage, limit value 2
ID 3013 The system A voltage has fallen below the limit value 2 for system A undervoltage for at least
the configured time and has not exceeded the value of the hysteresis. Triggering this monitor-
ing function causes the mains decoupling function to trigger.
CBA fail to close CBA failed to close
ID 2623 The LS-5 has attempted to close the CBA the configured maximum number of attempts and
failed. The LS-5 will continue to attempt to close the CBA as long as the conditions for closing
the CBA are fulfilled.
CBA fail to open Failed CBA open
ID 2624 The LS-5 is still receiving the reply CBA closed after the CBA open monitoring timer has ex-
pired.
CBA syn. timeout CBA synchronization time exceeded
ID 3074 The LS-5 has failed to synchronize the CBA within the configured synchronization time.
Missing LS5 Missing LS-5 members detected
ID 4064 The LS-5 has detected that the number of available units at CAN does not correspond with the
configured application mode.
SyA. phase rotation System A rotating field
ID 3975 The system A rotating field does not correspond with the configured direction.


Ph.rotation mismatch System A/System B phase rotation different
ID 2944 System A or System B has different rotating fields. A CB closure is blocked.
SyA. df/dt System A df/dt (ROCOF)
ID 3106 A system A df/dt, which has exceeded the configured limit, has occurred. Triggering this moni-
toring function causes the system A decoupling function to trigger.
SyA. volt. asymmetry System A voltage asymmetry
ID 3928 For at least the delay time without interruption.
SyA. volt. incr. System A voltage increase
ID 8834 The limit for voltage increase is reached or exceeded.
CBA unload mismatch CBA unloading mismatch
ID 8838 While unloading CBA the defined limit of load is not reached in the defined time.
Discrete 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
input #
Message ID 10600 10601 10602 10603 10604 10605 10607 10608
Table 4-2: Message IDs for discrete inputs

Restoring Language Setting

Due to the multilingual capability of the unit, it may happen that the display language of the LS-5 Series is set to
a language, the operator is unable to read or understand, by mistake. In this case, the following proceeding helps
to restore the desired language. The default setting is English.
Figure 4-3: Front panel and display
Figure 4-3 refers to the different softkeys, which appear in the configured language. In order to change the lan-
guage setting, press the softkeys in the following order:
1. Press softkey until you return to the starting screen (as indicated above)
2. Press softkey once to access the "Parameter" screen
3. Press softkey twice to access the "Language / clock config." screen
4. Press softkey twice to edit the language setting
5. Press softkey to select the desired language
6. Press softkey once to commit the language setting
Now, the display language is restored to the desired language again.

LS-51x (ToolKit)

Figure 4-4: LS-51x front panel
Figure 4-4 illustrates the front panel of the LS-51x with Lamp Test push button, LEDs and DPC connector. A
short description of the back panel is given below.
Element Function
Perform lamp test.
DPC connector for optional DPC cable.
The LED indicates CPU OK.
The LEDs 1 to 8 indicate the LogicManger states of parameter 12962 to 12969.

Special ToolKit Screens

States easYgen
Figure 4-5: ToolKit screen states easYgen
The states of the easYgen devices are displayed.
STOP operating mode.

MANUAL operating mode.
AUTOMATIC operating mode.
Breaker open.
Breaker closed.
Table 4-3: Icons states easYgen

States LS-5
Figure 4-6: ToolKit screen states LS-5
The states of the LS-5 devices are displayed.
Voltage is below dead bus limit.

Voltage higher than dead bus limit but not in range.
Voltage and frequency in operation window.
Breaker switch open
Breaker switch closed
Isolation switch open
Isolation switch closed
Table 4-4: Icons states LS-5

Chapter 5.
Application
Overview

The LS-5 unit interacts together with the easYgen-3400/3500 in a system. This system allows establishing vari-
ous applications. To make the handling for that wide range of applications easier, different preconfigured applica-
tion modes in the LS-5 as well in the easYgen-3400/3500 are provided. These application modes are created be-
cause some preconfigurations are automatically fixed through the according application modes. The following
chapter explains the differentiation of the application modes and there settings. Not all possible configurations
can be explained in detail, but shall help to guide through the settings according to the mode.
Application Modes LS-5
Application Mode Application Function

LS-511/521 Symbol
Independent synch check relay mode.
This application mode provides the following functions:

Handling of CBA (dead bus closure, synchronization, open) inti-
tiated by the corresponding command variables or by manual
commands.
Measuring and monitoring of system A values (voltage, frequency,
phase rotation, current).
Measuring of system B values (voltage, frequency, phase rota-
Single LS5 tion).
Measuring of active and reactive power on system A.
Measuring of phase angle system A to system B.
No easYgen is expected on the CAN bus.
Interacting as an independent synchronizer for a PLC by commu-
nication interface (CANopen, Modbus RTU slave).
NOTE: The LS-5 acts as if there is no other LS-5 in the system.
Open LS-5 system, in conjunction with easYgen-3400/3500, individually con-

figurable.

Handling of CBA (dead bus closure, synchronization, open) inti-
tiated by the corresponding command variables or by manual
commands.
Measuring and monitoring of system A values (voltage, frequency,
phase rotation, current).
Measuring of system B values (voltage, frequency, phase rota-
tion).
Measuring of active and reactive power on system A.
LS5 Measuring of phase angle system A to system B.
The system allows here up to 32 easYgen and up to 16 LS-5.
Recognition of segments within the easYgen / LS-5 system.
The decision for closing and opening the breaker comes from the
LS-5 itself (LogicsManager).
Dead bus arbitration with other easYgen and LS-5.
Mains decoupling function in the LS-5 configurable, for LS-5 con-
nected with system A at mains.
Complicated applications require an external close and open logic
(PLC).
NOTE: The LS-5 is expecting at least one easYgen device in the system.

LS-5 as MCB control in conjunction with easYgen-3400/3500 in a fixed ap-
plication.

Handling of a MCB (dead bus closure, synchronization, open) inti-
tiated by the easYgen.
The operating mode MANUAL in the LS-5 is not supported.
Measuring and monitoring of system A values, (mains voltage,
mains frequency, mains phase rotation, mains current), transferred
to easYgen.
Measuring of system B values, (voltage, frequency, phase rota-
L-MCB tion), transferred to easYgen.
Measuring of mains active and mains reactive power on system A.
The decision for closing and opening the breaker comes exclusive-
ly from the easYgen-3400/3500 as MCB close and open com-
mand.
Mains decoupling function in the LS-5 configurable.
No PLC for close and open command required.
Automatic configuration of the relevant parameters.
LS-5 as GGB control in conjunction with easYgen-3400/3500 in a fixed ap-

plication.

Handling of a GGB (dead bus closure, synchronization, open) inti-
tiated by the easYgen.
The operating mode MANUAL in the LS-5 is not supported.
Measuring and monitoring of system A values (load voltage, load
frequency, load phase rotation).
L-GGB
Measuring of system B values (generator busbar voltage, -
frequency, -phase rotation).
The decision for closing and opening the breaker comes exclusive-
ly from the easYgen-3400/3500 as GGB close and open com-
mand.
No PLC for close and open command required.
Automatic configuration of the relevant parameters.

Application Modes easYgen-3400/3500 Interacting With LS-5
Application Mode Application Function

easYgen-3400/3500 Symbol
One or more easYgen in conjunction with an open LS-5 system, individually
configurable for different application. Multiple isolated and/or mains parallel
operation. (max. 16 LS-5).
GCB/LS5

Handling of the GCB (dead bus closure, synchronization, open) in-
titiated by start command in AUTO or individually in MAN mode.
Measuring and monitoring of generator values (voltage, frequency,
phase rotation, current and power).
Measuring of generator busbar values (voltage, frequency).
Indicating of mains values (voltage, frequency) sent from Mains-
LS-5 with the smallest ID in the own segment (configurable by pa-
rameter 4103).
Indicating the sum of active and reactive power sent from all
Mains-LS-5 in the own segment.
Regulating Import/Export power with the sum of active and reac-
tive power sent from all Mains-LS-5 in the own segment.
The easYgen recognizes through the LS-5 system the active seg-
ment number.
Digital input 8 is occupied for feedback GCB.
Relay output 6 is occupied for close command GCB.
Connection to mains (MCB is closed) is recognized over the LS-5
system, if one or more Mains-LS-5 are available.
Minimum 1 LS-5 is expected on the CAN 3 bus.
The close and open commands for the single LS-5 breakers are
usually not generated in the easYgen.
Run-up synchronization, acting on the GCB, is possible.
Mains voltage and current is usually not connected at the easY-
gen.

One or more easYgen in conjunction with one LS-5 unit, acting on the MCB
in a fixed application. Multiple isolated and/or mains parallel operation. The
same handling as in the GCB/MCB mode, but the MCB is operated through
the LS5.
GCB/L-MCB

LS5 is configured to L-MCB mode.
Handling of the MCB (dead bus closure, synchronization, open) in
AUTO and MANUAL according to the rules of the GCB/MCB
mode.
The Breaker Transition mode parameter 3411 is considered.
phase rotation, current and power)
Measuring of generator busbar values (voltage, frequency)
Indicating of mains values (voltage, frequency, phase angle) sent
from the LS5. (Configurable by parameter 4103)
Indicating of active and reactive power at the interchange point
sent from LS5.
Regulating Import/Export power with active and reactive power
sent from LS5.
Discrete input 8 is occupied for feedback GCB
Relay output 6 is occupied for close command GCB
Connection to mains (MCB is closed) is recognized over the LS5.
The LS5 is expected on the CAN3 bus.
The close and open commands for the LS5 are generated in the
easYgen.
Run-up synchronization, acting on the GCB, is possible.
Mains voltage and current is usually not connected at the easY-
gen.

One or more easYgen, one generator group breaker (GGB) in conjunction
with one LS-5 unit, acting on the MCB in a fixed application. Multiple isolated
and/or mains parallel operation. The same handling as in the
GCB/GGB/MCB mode, but the MCB is operated through the LS5.

GCB/GGB/L-MCB LS-5 is configured to L-MCB mode.
Handling of the GGB (dead bus closure, synchronization, open) in-
AUTO and MANUAL according to the rules of the GCB/GGB/MCB
mode.
Measuring and monitoring of load busbar values (voltage, fre-
quency, phase rotation, current and power)
NOTE: This measurement is executed with the easYgen own
mains measurement connected at the load busbar.
from the LS-5 (configurable by parameter 4103).
sent from LS-5.
sent from LS-5.
Discrete input 8 is occupied for feedback GCB.
Discrete input 9 is occupied for feedback GGB.
Relay output 10 is occupied for close command GGB.
Relay output 11 is occupied for open command GGB.
Connection to mains (MCB is closed) is recognized over the LS-5.
The LS-5 is expected on the CAN 3 bus.
The close and open commands for the LS-5 are generated in the
easYgen.
Run-up synchronization, acting on the GCB or GCB/GGB, is poss-
ible.

One or more easYgen with one LS-5 unit, acting on the GGB in a fixed appli-
cation. Only isolated operation. The same handling as in the GCB/GGB
mode without mains parallel operation, but the GGB is operated through the
LS5.
GCB/L-GGB
LS-5 is configured to L-GGB mode.

titiated by start command in AUTO or individually in MAN mode
according to the rules of the GCB/GGB mode.
The LS-5 is expected on the CAN 3 bus.
The close and open commands for the LS-5 are generated in the
easYgen.
ible.

One or more easYgen with one LS-5 unit, acting on the GGB and another
LS-5 unit, acting on the MCB in a fixed application. Multiple isolated and/or
mains parallel operation. The same handling as in the GCB/GGB/MCB
mode, but the GGB and MCB is operated through the LS-5.
GCB/L-GGB/L-MCB
One LS-5 is configured to L-MCB mode.
Other LS-5 is configured to L-GGB mode.
titiated by start command in AUTO or individually in MAN mode
according to the rule of the GCB/GGB/MCB mode.
AUTO and MANUAL according to the rules of the GCB/GGB/MCB
mode.
Measuring of generator busbar values (voltage, frequency)
from the LS-5 (configurable by parameter 4103).
sent from LS-5.
sent from LS-5.
Connection to mains (MCB is closed) is recognized over the LS-5
system.
Both LS-5 are expected on the CAN 3 bus.
The close and open commands for the both LS-5 are generated in
the easYgen.
ible.

Correlation Application Modes easYgen3500/3400 And LS-5
Application Mode Application Application Mode Application

LS-511/521 Symbol easYgen-3400/3500 Symbol
LS-511/521 Single LS5 n/a n/a
LS5 (up to 16 unit) GCB/LS5
GCB/L-MCB
LS-511/521 L-MCB (max. 1 unit)
+ GCB/GGB/L-MCB
easYgen-3400/3500 L-GGB (max. 1 unit) GCB/L-GGB
L-GGB (max. 1 unit)
GCB/L-GGB/L-MCB
L-MCB (max. 1 unit)

LS-5 Standalone Application

Application Mode: Single LS5 |

The LS-5, configured as Single LS5, runs as an independent unit and does not expect any other unit on the
CAN bus. The idea of this mode is to use the LS-5 as a simple sync check relay controlled by discrete inputs or to
run it together with a PLC as a synchronizer. Therefore the PLC gets all information about all measurement val-
ues (voltages, current, power, phase angle) by communication interface to run a close loop synchronizing. Addi-
tionally the LS-5 can be taken as a measurement transformer for displaying and monitoring values. The decoupl-
ing functions (voltage, frequency, change of frequency) can also be used when a mains parallel situation exists.
Figure 5-1: Application mode Single LS5
Installation
1. If a mains decoupling function is desired, the system A measurement is to connect on the mains busbar.
2. The PLC acts as master and has to monitor the functionality of the communication interface.
Configuration
1. Configure the application mode (parameter 8840) of the LS-5 device to Single LS5 | .
2. For configure the measurement navigate to Parameter>Configuration>Measurement config. and enter
your individually settings.
3. If a phase angle compensation is required, sometimes needed when tapping voltages over power trans-
former, navigate to Configuration>Application config>Breakers config.>Configure
CBA>Synchronization CBA>Phase angle compensation. This setting must be executed very carefully
and must be double checked by a voltmeter over the particular breaker.
4. If the control for close and open the breaker shall be done by discrete inputs, the default setting accord-
ing to the wiring diagram is recommended.
5. If the control for close and open the breaker shall be done by communication interface, the register with
the remote control bits is used. (LM Command variables 04.44 to 04.59, Bit1 to Bit 16). See chapter
Communication interface for more information how to address the according data register.
6. The close command is released by the LM equation Enable close CBA. Navigate to Configura-
tion>Application config>Breakers config.>Configure CBA>Enable close CBA. Enter here your argu-
ments for closing the breaker.
7. The open command is activated by the LM equation Open CBA immed.. Enter here your arguments
for opening the breaker. The open command executed through the LM equation Open CBA unload
makes only sense, if the PLC can influence the unloading of the breaker.
8. In case of a required manual operation by push buttons acting on DI, the two LM Open CBA in ma-
nual and Close CBA in manual can be used for. The configuration Open CBA in manual (Imme-
diate>With unl.) should be set to Immediate.
9. The LS-5 can be adjusted for different kind of breaker closure. Refer there for to Configura-
tion>Application config.>Configure CBA. Whereby the configuration Dead bus closure CBA on/off
is generally releasing any kind of dead busbar closure.

LS-5 Series & easYgen-3400/500 Applications

General
In comparison to the mode Single LS5 are all following modes part of the overall system of LS-5 and easYgen-
3400/3500 controls. The information between the units must be exchanged over CAN bus. The easYgen provides
therefore the CAN 3 bus connection.
There are two types of LS-5 existing within the different application modes:
1. The LS-5 runs as a slave unit (Mode L-MCB ; Mode L-GGB ). In these modes the LS-5
is guided by the easYgen and takes over directly the close and open commands coming from the easY-
gen(s). In this case no external logic is needed to decide, when the breaker is to open or to close. The
operating mode MANUAL in the LS-5 is not supported. The manual control is provided by the easY-
gen(s). The isolation switch input of the LS-5 is ignored. The LS-5 sends measuring values and flags to
the CAN connected easYgen(s), which are needed for the according application mode. The application
modes including LS-5 configured to L-MCB and L-GGB are fixed and can not be varied ex-
cept from the amount of generators, feeding on the generator busbar (max. 32). Other tie-breakers are
not allowed. The configuration for LS-5 and easYgen is restricted to make the configuration easier. The
application mode determines the fixed segment numbers for system A and B.The LogicsManager for
close and open commands are faded out.
2. The LS-5 runs as an independent unit (Mode LS5 ). The closing and opening of the breaker is
controlled through the LogicsManager equation Open CBA unload; Open CBA immed. and Ena-
ble close CBA. The close and open commands are configured with LogicsManager command variables.
This can be discrete inputs, remote control bits or CB control bits coming from the easYgen(s). In de-
pendence on the complexity of the system according external program logics are required. The operating
mode MANUAL in the LS-5 is supported and shall give the operator the possibility to force a close or
open of the breaker by hand. The display model offers therefore an operating mode button and a softkey
to close and open the breaker. The Mode LS5 opens a wide range of applications and requires
more effort to configure the whole easYgen LS-5 system. The configuration of segments is an impor-
tant consumption that the system runs. This will be explained more in detail in the following chapters.

The LS-5 Runs As A Slave Unit (Mode L-MCB ; Mode L-GGB )

The easYgen and LS-5 offers application modes, which allow an easier setup of the easYgen LS-5 system. The
applications are predefined and allow no variety, except the amount of easYgen-3000 driven generators (up to
32). Check your application, whether it adapts to the here introduced applications.
Predefined Application 1: Single Or Multiple easYgen With One External Operated MCB
- Application Mode easYgen-3400/3500: GCB/L-MCB |

- Application Mode LS-5: L-MCB |
Figure 5-2: Single or multiple easYgen with one external operated MCB
Introduction
One or more gensets feed on a load busbar. The easYgen(s) close and open their own generator breaker. The
LS-5 at the interchange point closes and opens the MCB. All breakers are connected to the same segment; the ge-
nerator busbar is equal to the load busbar. The easYgen(s) running the same tasks as in the application mode
GCB/MCB with the differentiation, that instead of a direct MCB handling now the LS-5 is taking over that part.
The decision when to close or open the MCB is coming from the easYgen(s) via CAN bus. The manual control
on the MCB is restricted on the easYgen(s). If a run-up synchronization is desired, only the mode
with GCB is supported. In this arrangement the mains decoupling is provided by the LS-5. When the mains de-
coupling over GCB is desired, please refer to chapter Mains Decoupling Function easYgen.

Installation
LS-5:
1. The system A voltage and current measurement is connected to the mains.
2. The system B voltage measurement is connected to the busbar.
3. The MCB breaker feedback is connected to the LS-5 only.
4. The MCB breaker command(s) are connected to the LS-5 only.
5. The LS-5 CAN is connected to the CAN 3 of the easYgen(s).
easYgen:
1. The generator voltage and current measurement is connected to the generator.
2. The busbar voltage measurement is connected to the busbar.
3. The mains voltage measurement is not used.
4. The GCB breaker feedback is connected to the according easYgen.
5. The GCB breaker command(s) are connected to the the according easYgen.
6. The easYgen CAN 3 is connected to the CAN of the LS-5.
Configuration
LS-5:
1. Configure the application mode (parameter 8840) of the LS-5 device to L-MCB | .
2. Configure the measurement system A and B.
4. Configure the breaker close and/or open relay(s) according to your MCB.
5. Check the synchronization setting, like phase angle, frequency window and voltage.
easYgen:
1. Configure the application mode (parameter 3444) of each easYgen device to GCB/L-MCB | .
2. Configure the measurement for generator and busbar according to the chapter Configuration on page
47.
3. The mains measurement is not used in this application mode. A couple of settings should be configured
as follows. Switch off the following parameters:
- Mains decoupling (parameter 3110)
- Change of frequency (parameter 3058)
- Overfrequency level 1 (parameter 2850)
- Underfrequency level 1 (parameter 2900)
- Overvoltage level 1 (parameter 2950)
- Undervoltage level 1 (parameter 3000)
- Mains voltage increase (parameter 8806)
4. If a phase angle compensation over the GCB is required, sometimes needed when tapping voltages over
power transformer, navigate to Parameter>Configuration>Configure Application>Configure Break-
ers>Configure GCB>Phase angle compensation GCB On/Off. This setting must be executed very
carefully and must be double checked by a voltmeter over the particular breaker.
5. For displaying the mains values coming from LS-5 on the main screen, navigate to parameter Show
mains data parameter 4103 and switch to LS5.
6. Each easYgen device provides in this arrangement four control bits for sending information to the LS-5.
Therefor navigate to Parameter>Configuration>Configure LogicsManager>Configure LS5. These bits
can be used as command variables in the LS-5. So it is imaginable to take the bit 3 for initiate alarms ac-
knowledge in the LS-5 or to release the mains decoupling.

Predefined Application 2: Multiple easYgen with one GGB and one external operated MCB
- Application Mode easYgen-3400/3500: GCB/GGB/L-MCB |

Figure 5-3: Multiple easYgen with one GGB and one external operated MCB
Introduction
One or more gensets feed on a generator busbar. The easYgen(s) close and open their own generator breaker. The
easYgen(s) close and open the common generator group breaker (GGB). The LS-5 at the interchange point closes
and opens the MCB. This application includes a generator busbar and a load busbar and one mains income. The
easYgen(s) running the same tasks as in the application mode GCB/GGB/MCB with the differentiation, that in-
stead of a direct MCB handling through the easYgen, the LS-5 controls the MCB. The decision when to close or
open the MCB is coming from the easYgen(s) over the CAN bus. The manual control on the MCB is restricted
on the easYgen(s). If a run-up synchronization is desired, the modes withGCB and with GCB/GGB are sup-
ported. In this arrangement the mains decoupling is provided by the LS-5. When the mains decoupling over GCB
is desired, please refer to chapter Mains Decoupling Function easYgen.
NOTE
The mains measurement of the easYgen(s) are used for the load busbar measurement.

Installation
LS-5:
2. The system B voltage measurement is connected to the load busbar.
easYgen:
2. The busbar voltage measurement is connected to the generator busbar.
3. The mains voltage measurement is connected to the load busbar.
4. The GGB breaker feedback is connected to all easYgens.
5. The GGB breaker command(s) are connected to all easYgens.
Configuration
LS-5:
easYgen:
1. Configure the application mode (parameter 3444) of each easYgen device to GCB/GGB/L-MCB |
.
2. Configure the measurement for generator and busbar according to chapter Configuration on page 47.
3. Configure the mains measurement of the easYgen according to chapter Configuration on page 47, but
in relation to the load busbar voltage. The mains measurement of the easYgen is only taken for synchro-
nization GGB, operating range consideration and phase rotation check. All other easYgen mains mea-
surement functions are not used. A couple of settings should be configured as follows. Switch off the
following parameters:
5. If a phase angle compensation over the GGB is required, navigate to MCB phase angle compensation in
ToolKit. This setting must be executed very carefully and must be double checked by a voltmeter over
the particular breaker.
Therefore navigate to Parameter>Configuration>Configure LogicsManager>Configure LS5. These
bits can be used as command variables in the LS-5. So it is imaginable to take bit 3 to initiate an alarm
acknowledge in the LS-5 or to release the mains decoupling.
Predefined Application 3: Multiple easYgen with one external operated GGB in isolated
operation
- Application Mode easYgen-3400/3500: GCB/L-GGB |

- Application Mode LS-5: L-GGB |
Figure 5-4: Multiple easYgen with one external operated GGB in isolated operation
Introduction
easYgens close and open the common generator group breaker (GGB). The LS-5 over the GGB closes and opens
the GGB. This application includes a generator busbar and a load busbar. The mains is not present. The easY-
gen(s) running the same tasks as in the application mode GCB/GGB with the differentiation that only isolated
operation is allowed and instead of a direct GGB handling through the easYgen, the LS-5 controls the GGB. The
decision when to close or open the GGB is coming from the easYgen(s) over the CAN bus. The manual control
on the GGB is restricted on the easYgen(s). If a run-up synchronization is desired, the modes withGCB and
with GCB/GGB are supported.
NOTE
The mains measurement of the easYgen(s) are used for the load busbar measurement.

Installation
LS-5:
1. The system A voltage measurement is connected to the load busbar.
2. The system B voltage measurement is connected to the generator busbar.
3. The GGB breaker feedback is connected to the LS-5 only.
4. The GGB breaker command(s) are connected to the LS-5 only.
easYgen:
2. The busbar voltage measurement is connected to the busbar.
Configuration
LS-5:
1. Configure the application mode (parameter 8840) of the LS-5 device to L-GGB | .
3. Configure the breaker close and/or open relay(s) according to your GGB.
easYgen:
1. Configure the application mode (parameter 3444) of each easYgen device to GCB/L-GGB | .
5. For removing the mains values from the main screen, navigate to parameter Show mains data parame-
ter 4103 and switch to No.
can be used as command variables in the LS-5, like alarm acknowledge in the LS-5 and more.

Predefined Application 4: Multiple easYgen with one external operated GGB and one external
operated MCB
- Application Mode easYgen-3400/3500: GCB/L-GGB/L-MCB |

- Application Mode LS-5: L-GGB |
Figure 5-5: Multiple easYgen with one external operated GGB and one external operated MCB
Introduction
LS-5 between the generator busbar and load busbar close and open the common generator group breaker (GGB).
The LS-5 at the interchange point to the mains closes and opens the MCB. This application includes a generator
busbar, a load busbar and one mains income. The easYgen(s) running the same tasks as in the application mode
GCB/GGB/MCB with the differentiation, that instead of a direct GGB and MCB handling through the easYgen,
the both LS-5 devices take over that part. The decision when to close or open the MCB and GGB is coming from
the easYgen(s) over the CAN bus. The manual control on the MCB and GGB is restricted on the easYgen(s). If a
run-up synchronization is desired, the modes withGCB and with GCB/GGB are supported. In this arrange-
ment the mains decoupling is provided by the LS-5 for the MCB. When the mains decoupling over GCB is de-
sired, please refer to chapter Mains Decoupling Function easYgen.

Installation
LS-5 (MCB):
2. The system B voltage measurement is connected to the load busbar.
LS-5 (GGB):
1. The system A voltage measurement is connected to the load busbar.
2. The system B voltage measurement is connected to the generator busbar.
3. The GGB breaker feedback is connected to the LS-5 only.
4. The GGB breaker command(s) are connected to the LS-5 only.
easYgen:
2. The busbar voltage measurement is connected to the generator busbar.
Configuration
LS-5 (MCB):
3. If a phase angle compensation over the MCB is required, sometimes needed when tapping voltages over
power transformer, navigate to Configuration>Application config>Breakers config.>Configure
LS-5 (GGB):
1. Configure the Application mode (parameter 8840) of the LS-5 device to L-GGB | .
3. If a phase angle compensation over the GGB is required, sometimes needed when tapping voltages over

easYgen:
1. Configure the application mode (parameter 3444) of each easYgen device to GCB/L-GGB/L-MCB |
.
6. Each easYgen device provides in this arrangement two control bits for sending information to the LS-5.
can be used as command variables in the LS-5 to iniate i.e. an alarm acknowledge or to release the mains
decoupling.

The LS-5 runs as independent unit (Mode LS5 )

The easYgen and LS-5 offers an application mode (easYgen: GCB/LS5 and LS-5: LS5 ), which
allows a wide range of different applications. Unfortuately the setup of such an open easYgen LS-5 system re-
quires more knowledge. The free LS-5 arrangement allows up to 32 easYgen-3400/3500 and up to 16 LS-5 de-
vices. The easYgen(s) are only operating their GCBs; the other breakers have to be operated by the LS-5. At next
shall be clarified some expressions which will come up in the next introduced examples.
Introduction and Explanation of Terms

Segment Number (Control Number)
A segment is defined as a section of the bus, feeder or interconnection, which cannot electrically be isolated to a
smaller section and is connected to a circuit breaker or an isolation switch which is operated or supervised by an
LS-5. A transformer is not to be considered as a segment or a point of isolation. Each segment, feeder, or inter-
connection must be assigned a number that is unique to that segment.
Isolation Switch
In some applications are existing isolation switches. An isolation switch is usually taken to interrupt two bars
from each. The breaker is usually controlled manually. The LS-5 unit in mode LS5 can handle max.1 iso-
lation switch. The LS-5, located at the isolation switch, must be informed about the condition of that switch. The
condition determines the segmenting.
Mains Breaker
The frequency and voltage are solid. A segment number is needed. The first breaker from mains side is the MCB.
The LS-5 is always connected with measurement system A on the mains side. The setting Mains connection is
always set on System A. The system A measurement gets the mains segment number.
Tie Breaker
No direct mains connection neither on system A or system B. For both sides a segment number is needed. There
is no clear rule for where system A or system B needs to be connected. Likely the location of the CT determines
the measurement A B. The setting Mains connection is always set to None.
Generator
The frequency and voltage are variable. A segment number is not needed.
Device Number (Control Number)
It is necessary to configure all connected controls with a unique device number (control number). Hence the units
are clear defined in their function and location. The numbers 1 to 32 are reserved for the easYgen(s) (easYgen
"Device number"), the numbers 33 to 64 are reserved for the LS-5 ("Device number" parameter 1702).
CAN Bus Node ID Number
To communicate via the CAN bus it is necessary to configure all connected controls with a unique CAN bus node
ID number (parameter 8950). Usually the same number like the device ID number is taken.
Priority During Breaker Closure
In an emergency application the simultaneous closing of two circuit breakers is blocked via communications be-
tween the LS-5 and the easYgen. Once an easYgen is enabled for a dead bus connection, it has priority over all
LS-5s (any CB controlled by an LS-5 cannot be closed). If multiple LS-5s are enabled to close a circuit breaker at
the same time the LS-5 with the lowest CAN identification number receives the master status (all other LS-5s are
inactive). When a closure failure occurs (see chapter Breakers on page 92), this LS-5 falls out of the dead bus
closure consideration. The next prioritized LS-5 overtakes this part.

Mains Measurement with easYgen

The application mode GCB/LS5 does not need the mains measurement of the easYgen. This measurement
is provided by the LS5 system. The only exception using mains measurement of the easYgen is the mains de-
coupling function acting on GCB. In this case refer to chapter Mains Decoupling Function in the easYgen. For
all other cases the measurement causes alarms. Therefore they need to be switched off:
- Mains decoupling parameter 3110
- Change of frequency parameter 3058
- Overfrequency level 1 parameter 2850
- Underfrequency level 1 parameter 2900
- Overfrequency level 2 parameter 2856
- Underfrequency level 2 parameter 2906
- Overvoltage level 1 parameter 2950
- Undervoltage level 1 parameter 3000
- Overvoltage level 2 parameter 2956
- Undervoltage level 2 parameter 3006
- Mains voltage increase parameter 8806
The mains current and power measurement is never used in the GCB/LS5 mode.
Mains Decoupling Function easYgen

To provide mains decoupling, acting on the GCB, the mains decoupling function of the easYgen must be used.
This includes the mains measurement executed with the easYgen. The mains measurement is connected together
with the busbar measurement on the generator busbar. Refer to the easYgen-3400/3500 Manual 37528 for details.
Mains Decoupling Function LS-5

In this arrangement the mains decoupling is provided by the LS-5 for the MCB. When the mains decoupling over
GCB is desired, please refer to chapter Mains Decoupling Function easYgen. The LS5(s) which are responsible
for the mains breakers overtake the mains monitoring and execute the decoupling function. The mains monitoring
is done with the measurement system A. The measurement system A is connected on the mains side.
Configuration
1. Navigate to Configuration>Monitoring config.>System A.
2. Configure syA.voltage monitoring parameter 1771 to Phase-Phase (Ph-Ph) or Phase-Neutral (Ph-N).
3. Navigate to Operating voltage and Operating frequency.
- Configure the operating range for frequency.
- Configure the operating range for voltage.
NOTE
Please make sure not configure these ranges smaller as the decoupling thresholds (see be-
low).
4. Configure the mains settling time (parameter 13205). The mains settling time determines for how long
the mains must be stay continuously stable, before the MCB shall be closed back. Consider that there are
several LS-5s on different mains incoming points which should have the same setting.
5. Navigate to SyA. Decoupling.
6. Configure the LogicsManager equation Enable SyA dec.. At next will follow two configuration ex-
amples, which are based on following arguments:
Example 1 (Default):
The mains decoupling function shall only be

enabled, if an external release therefore is giv-
en (Discrete Input 3). In this case a PLC is re-
quired.

Example 2:
The mains decoupling function shall be expli-

citly enabled, when a Test key switch is ac-
tivated. (This helps to make a mains decoupl-
ing test without any generator is running)
OR
The mains decoupling function shall be
enabled, if any generator is running parallel to
mains
7. Configure the according mains decoupling thresholds:

- Overvoltage level 2
- Undervoltage level 2
- Overfrequency level 2
- Underfrequency level 2
- Change of frequency (Phase shift or df/dt)
8. Configure the alarm class (usually alarm A or B).
9. Configure self acknowledgment to Yes or No.
Run-up Synchronization in the LS-5 mode

The LS-5 mode allows the run-up synchronization but only for the GCB. The mode GCB/GGB is not supported.
The easYgen will only close its breaker in a run-up situation, if the LS-5 system detects no connection to mains
for the according easYgen segment. Regarding run-up synchronization there is nothing to configure in the LS-5.
AMF Start in the LS-5 mode

The AMF start of the easYgen(s) is controlled by segments. The design engineer has to consider, which segments
shall be monitored and shall cause an AMF start. The easYgen provides therefore a special setting. The procedure
runs as follows:
The easYgen(s) monitors the configured segment(s) on being black. If only one segment is recognized as not
within operating range, the generator starts after the emergency run delay time. With successful start, the genera-
tor(s) close its breaker.
NOTE
To avoid that the LS-5 of the MCB stays closed during emergency run, the according LS-5 has to open
its own breaker. The example below shows a solution that the System A Not-OK flag opens the MCB
automatically after the emergency delay time. The system A condition flags are generated out of the
operating ranges for system A. see chapter Mains Decoupling Function easYgen.
The easYgen feeds the own segment during emergency run. The AMF mode will only be stopped, if all moni-
tored segments are OK for the mains settling time and have connection to mains again. The operating ranges and
the main settling time are configured in the LS-5s.
Configuration
Configure the according LS-5 over the MCB:

1. Navigate to Configuration>Monitoring config.>System A.
2. Navigate to Operating voltage and Operating frequency.
- Configure the operating range for frequency.
- Configure the operating range for voltage.
3. Navigate to Configuration>Application config.>Breakers config.>Configure CBA
4. Configure Open CBA immed. as follows:

LS-5 over the MCB:

The LS-5 issues an MCB open command, if
the mains (system A) is not in operating range.
To avoid flicker trouble, the open command is

delayed.
NOTE
There may other solutions exist to open the MCB. The LogicsManager system provides a wide range of
flags and conditions to take from. So another example could be to incorporate a flag coming from ea-
sYgen, which signals successsful start.
Configure the easYgen(s):

1. Configure application mode to GCB/LS5 .
2. Navigate to Parameter>Configuration>Configure emergency run.
3. Configure Mains fail delay time, LM inhibit emerg.run, Break emerg. in crital mode according to
your application.
4. Configure the emergency run segments in each easYgen. They can be different between easYgen(s) or
easYgen groups.
The next example shows the segment configuration according to the chapter: Predefined Application 1.
Figure 5-6: Example ToolKit: Configure AMF start segments by clicking on the segment number
Manual Control of Breaker in the LS-5 mode

The LS-5 mode provides manual closing and opening of the circuit breaker at the particular LS-5. This can be
configured via LogicsManager equations. The display variant provides additionally soft keys in the display. The
soft keys take part of the key lock function for security reasons or unintended operations. The easYgen(s) have no
direct influence on the manual control of the LS-5(s).
LS-5 Command Bits from easYgen to LS-5

The easYgen provides in this application mode six LS-5 command bits. The command bits are transported via
CAN interface to each LS-5. The design engineer can decide, if he wants to take the ORed LS-5 command flags

coming from all easYgens or if he likes to take the individual command flag coming from a special easYgen. In
example an acknowledge alarm command could be general flag which would be taken from the ORed source.
An special close command in the example could come from an explicit easYgen and must be therefore not taken
from the ORed list.
Equations easYgen (1) Command variables LS5

LM 12979 LS5 command 1
Command 1 to
LM 12980 LS5 command 2 28.01
LS5(OR)
Command 2 to
LM 12981 LS5 command 3 28.02
LS5(OR)
Command 3 to
LM 12982 LS5 command 4 28.03
LS5(OR)
Command 4 to
LM 12983 LS5 command 5 28.04
LS5(OR)
Command 5 to
LM 12984 LS5 command 6 28.05
LS5(OR)
Command 6 to
28.06
LS5(OR)
Equations easYgen (2)

LM 12980 LS5 command 2 29.01 Command 1 easYgen 1
29.06 Command 6 easYgen 1
29.07 Command 1 easYgen 2

Equations easYgen (32) 29.08 Command 2 easYgen 2
Figure 5-7: LogicsManager system - easYgen information transport to LS-5

LS-5 Flags from LS-5 to LS-5 and easYgen

The LS-5 flags generated in the LS-5 device with LogicsManager equations can be used from connected LS-5
and easYgen devives. Each LS-5 sends five flags over the CAN interface. The system allows to inform or to
command something to other units. In example the acknowledge command can be sent to all other units to reset
alarms. All bits are individual.
LS5 (33) easYgen
LM 12952 Flag 1 LS5 26.01 Flag 1 LS5 device 33

26.06 Flag 1 LS5 device 34
LS5 (34)
LM 12954 Flag 3 LS5
LM 12955 Flag 4 LS5
LM 12956 Flag 5 LS5
LS5

LS5 (48) 26.04 Flag 4 LS5 device 33
Figure 5-8: LogicsManager system LS-5 information transport to LS-5 and easYgen
Preparation
Prepare the easYgen LS-5 system for configuration as follows:
1. Draw a single line diagram that only contains essential equipment. The schematic should consist of a
minimum: All used easYgens, all transformers, all breaker elements (such as circuit breakers and isola-
tion switches), all elements to be controlled, and all LS-5s. Assign numbered addresses for each compo-
nent of the system in accordance with the methods already described.
2. Number all easYgen control units from 1 to 32 (order is user-defined and depends on your application).
3. Number all system LS-5s from 33 to 48 (order is user-defined and depends on your application).
4. Number all CAN Node-IDs (usually the same like device number).
5. Number all segments according to the upper showed definitions. As long no other reason exists, count
up the number continuously from left to right or opposite.
6. Draw into the single line diagram the measurement system A and B of the single LS-5 according to the
definitions. As long no other reason exist, hold system A and B continuously on the same side. This
makes the configuration easier. Maybe the location of a CT forces to leave this rule (this can be compen-
sated in the configuration).

Predefined Application 1: H-Configuration with two easYgen and two incoming mains and
tie-breaker
- Application Mode easYgen-3400/3500: GCB/LS5 |

- Application Mode LS-5: LS5 |
Introduction
One or more genset(s) feed on a generator/load busbar, here signed as segment no.2. One or more genset(s) feed
on a generator/load busbar, here signed as segment no.3. A tie-breaker is located between the both generator/load
busbars. Each generator/load busbar has its own incoming mains breaker. Here signed as segment no. 1 and seg-
ment no.4.
The easYgen(s) are started by a remote start signal or by AMF mode and operating their GCBs. The other break-
ers, handled from the LS-5, receiving their breaker open and close commands through orders coming from an ex-
ternal logic. The external logic could be a discrete input, a remote control bit, a monitor function, an easYgen
command, etc.. In this example the decision when to close or open the breaker is managed by a PLC sending their
orders over the CANopen protocol. Serial Modbus can also be taken to send orders or reading information from
all members. Refer therefor to chapter Interface.
Amongst others, the breaker feedbacks of the single LS-5 are sent via the CAN interface and inform all other
connected devices in the system, if they are interconnected or not. This determines the argument of the regulation
for the easYgen (i.e. power control, frequency control, load sharing). It is very important that all units are well
configured according to the subchapter Definitions beginning of this main chapter. This example does not con-
tain any isolation switches, which could devide the segments.
Figure 5-9: Application H-Configuration with two easYgen and two incoming mains and tie-breaker
Preparation
1. As in the beginning of this chapter mentioned, it is recommended to draw a single line diagram of the
application. In this case: two incoming mains with MCBs; two or more generators per generator seg-
ment; all breakers (tie-breaker, GCB, MCB).
2. Number all easYgen control units from 1 to 32.
3. Number all system LS-5s from 33 to 48.
6. Draw into the single line diagram the measurement system A and B of the single LS-5 according to the
definitions. As long no other reason exist, hold system A and B continuously on the same side. This
sated in the configuration).
Installation
LS-5 (incoming mains):

2. The system B voltage measurement is connected to the generator/load busbar.
LS-5 (tie-breaker):
1. The system A voltage and current measurement is connected to the generator/load busbar segment no. 2.
2. The system B voltage measurement is connected to the generator/load busbar segment no. 3.
3. The tie-breaker feedback is connected to the LS-5 only.
4. The tie-breaker command(s) are connected to the LS-5 only.
easYgen:

2. The busbar voltage measurement is connected to the generator/load busbar.

Configuration

1. Configure the application mode (parameter 8840) of the LS-5 device to LS5 | .
2. Enter the device ID 33 for the LS-5, incoming mains on the left side and ID 35 for the LS-5, incoming
mains on the right.
3. Enter the Node IDs (usually the same like device ID).
4. Enter the basic segment numbers at the LS-5, navigate to Configuration>Application config>Segment
config..
LS-5, ID 33, incoming mains on the left side
- Segment No. Sy.A (parameter 8810) -> 1
- Segment No. Sy.B (parameter 8811) -> 2
- Segment No. isol. Switch (parameter 8812) -> not applicable
- Mains pow. Measurement (parameter 8813) -> Valid
- Mains connection (parameter 8814) -> System A
- Isol. Switch Para (parameter 8815) -> None
- Variable system ( parameter 8816) -> System B
LS-5, ID 35, incoming mains on the right side
- Variable system (parameter 8816) -> System B
6. If a phase angle compensation over the MCB is required, sometimes needed when tapping voltages over
8. Check the synchronization settings, like phase angle, frequency window and voltage.
9. Configure the dead bus closure, navigate to Configuration>Application config>Breakers con-
fig.>Configure CBA>Dead bus closure CBA.
- Dead bus closure CBA (parameter 8801) -> On
- Connect A dead to B dead (parameter 8802) -> Off
- Connect A dead to B alive (parameter 8803) -> Off
- Connect A alive to B dead (parameter 8804) -> On
- Dead bus closure delay time (parameter 8805)
- Dead bus detection max. volt (parameter 5820)
10. Configure the connection of synchronous networks, navigate to Configuration>Application con-
fig>Breakers config.>Configure CBA>Connect synchronous mains.
- Connect synchronous mains (parameter 8820) -> Yes
- Max. phase angle (parameter 8821) -> 20
- Delay time phi max. (parameter 8822) -> 01s

11. Configure the LogicsManager in regards to close and open command for the MCB, navigate to Confi-
guration>Application config>Breakers config.>Configure CBA.
- Open CBA unload (parameter 12943) -> LogicsManager equation
The LM equation opens the MCB with unloading, if the remote

control bit 1 sent by the PLC.
- Open CBA immed. (parameter 12944) -> LogicsManager equation
The LM equation opens the MCB immediately, if the system A

voltage / frequency is not within the configured operating ranges (refer to chapter Operating Vol-
tage / Frequency on page 77)
or the remote control Bit 2 sent by the PLC.
- Enable close CBA (parameter 12945) -> LogicsManager equation
- The LM equation gives the release for close MCB, if

- The remote control bit 3 is sent by the PLC
- OR the CBA has a closure failure
- OR the system A measurement detects a phase rotation error.
NOTE
The same remote control bits can be used in the upper example, because each LS-5 receives its own
control bits. The different device and Node-ID separates the control bits from eachother.

LS-5 (tie-breaker):
2. Enter the device ID 34 for the LS-5.
3. Enter the Node ID (usually the same like device ID).
config..
- Mains pow. Measurement (parameter 8813) -> Invalid
- Mains connection (parameter 8814) -> None
5. Configure the measurement System A and B.
6. If a phase angle compensation over the tie-breaker is required, navigate to Configuration>Application
config>Breakers config.>Configure CBA>Synchronization CBA>Phase angle compensation. This set-
ting must be executed very carefully and must be double checked by a voltmeter over the particular
breaker.
7. Configure the breaker close and/or open relay(s) according to your tie-breaker.
- Connect A dead to B dead (parameter 8802) -> On
- Connect A dead to B alive (parameter 8803) -> On
11. Configure the LogicsManager in regards to close and open command for the tie-breaker, navigate to
Configuration>Application config>Breakers config.>Configure CBA.
The LM equation opens the tie-breaker with unloading, if the remote

control Bit 1 sent by the PLC.

NOTE
The unloading of the tie-breaker is only executed, if one side contains a variable system. Otherwise the
open command is given without unloading.
The LM equation opens the tie-breaker immediately, if

the remote control bit 2 sent by the PLC.
- The LM equation gives the release for close CBA, if

NOTE

easYgen(s):
1. Configure the application mode (parameter 3444) of each easYgen device to GCB/LS5 | .
2. Enter the device ID 1 for the easYgen (usually from left to right).
4. Enter the basic segment numbers at the easYgen(s), navigate to Parameter>Configuration>Configure
Application>Configure Controller>Configure load share.
easYgen, ID 1, left side
- Segment number (parameter 1723) -> 2
easYgen, ID 2, right side
- Segment number (ID1723) -> 3
6. The mains measurement is not used in this application mode.
7. If phase angle compensation over the GCB is required, navigate to Parame-
ter>Configuration>Configure Application>Configure Breakers>Configure GCB>Phase angle compen-
sation GCB On/Off. This setting must be executed very carefully and must be double checked by a
voltmeter over the particular breaker.
8. For displaying the mains values coming from LS-5 on the main screen, navigate to Parame-
ter>Configuration>Configure measurement, configure Show mains data parameter 4103 and switch
to LS5.
9. For the AMF mode the emergency run segments have to be configured. See there for chapter AMF
Start in the LS5 mode. Navigate to Parameter>Configuration>Configure application>Configure emer-
gency run. In this application are two examples considerable:
1. Each generator group monitors its own generator/load busbar and mains income.
- easYgen (left group) is configured to segment 1 and segment 2. The easYgen(s) on the left
side starts, if one of these 2 segments running out of its operating ranges. On the other side the
AMF mode stops, if these both segments are back alive and the mains incoming are closed.
- easYgen (right group) is configured to segment 3 and segment 4. The easYgen(s) on the
right side starts, if one of these 2 segments running out of its operating ranges. On the other
side the AMF mode stops, if these both segments are back alive and the mains incoming are
closed.
2. All generators monitor both generator/load busbars and mains incomes.
- All easYgen are configured to segment 1; segment 2; segment 3 and segment 4. All
easYgen(s) start, if one of these 4 segments running out of its operating ranges. On the other
side the AMF mode stops, if all segments are back alive and minimum one mains incoming in
the own segment is closed.
10. Each easYgen device provides in this arrangement six control bits for sending information to the LS-5.
bits can be used as command variables in the LS-5 to iniate i.e. an alarm acknowledge or to release the
mains decoupling.

Predefined Application 2: Multiple Mains/Generator with two easYgen and two incoming mains
and different tie-breaker
- Application Mode easYgen-3400/3500: GCB/LS5 |

- Application Mode LS-5: LS5 |
Introduction
One or more genset feed on a generator/load Busbar, here signed as segment no.4. One or more genset feed on a
generator/load busbar, here signed as segment no.5. A tie-breaker is located between the both generator/load bus-
bars. Each generator/load busbar has its own generator group breaker with an isolated switch. The LS-5 over this
tie-breaker handles 3 segments: no.2, no.3 and no.5. The LS-5 over the tie-breaker on the other side handles the
segments: no.5, no.6 and no.7.
The both isolation switches between segment no.3 and no.4, respectively no.6 and no.5 are manual operated. The
according LS-5s need the feedback of the isolation switch for their segment control. Between the generator/load
busbars and the GGBs is located a step up transformer. The load on the higher level is also separated into two
groups and is feeded by the according generator group or by mains. Each load group on the higher voltage level
is equipped with an MCB two an own incoming mains. And the both loads on the higher voltage level can also be
connected via a tie-breaker operated by a LS-5.
The easYgen(s) are started by a remote start signal or by AMF mode and operating their GCBs. The other break-
ers, handled by LS-5, receive their breaker open and close commands through orders coming from an external
logic. The external logic could be a discrete input, a remote control bit, a monitor function, etc.. In this example
the decision when to close or open the breaker is managed by a PLC sending their orders over the CANopen pro-
tocol. Serial Modbus can also be taken to send orders or reading information from all members. Refer therefore to
chapter Interface.
Amongst others the breaker feedbacks of the single LS-5 are sent via CAN interface and inform all other con-
nected devices in the system, if they are interconnected or not. This determines the argument of the regulation for
the easYgen (i.e. power control, frequency control, load sharing). It is very important that all units are well confi-
gured according to the subchapter Definitions beginning of this main chapter. In this example the isolation
switch condition takes also an important part for the segmenting.
Figure 5-10: Application Multiple Mains/Generator with two easYgen and two incoming mains and different tie-breaker

Preparation
1. As in the beginning of this chapter mentioned, it is recommended to draw a single line diagram to the
application. In this case: two incoming mains with MCBs; two or more generator per generator/load
busbar segment; all breakers (tie-breaker, GCB).
2. Number all easYgen control units from 1 to 32.
3. Number all system LS-5s from 33 to 48.
6. Draw into the single line diagram the measurement systems A and B of the single LS-5 according to the
definitions. As long no other reason exists, hold system A and B continuously on the same side. This
sated by configuration).
Installation

1. The system A voltage and current measurement is connected to the mains. segment no.1.
2. The system B voltage measurement is connected to the high voltage load busbar.
LS-5 (GGBs):
1. The system A voltage and current measurement is connected to the higher voltage busbar segment
no.2. (7).
2. The system B voltage measurement is connected to the upper voltage side of the load busbar segment
no.3. (6).
3. The GGB feedback is connected to the LS-5 only.
4. The GGB command(s) are connected to the LS-5 only.
5. The isolation switch feedback, located between generator/load busbar and transformer, is connected to
the LS-5 only.
LS-5 (tie-breaker lower voltage level):
1. The system A voltage and current measurement is connected to the segment no.4.
2. The system B voltage measurement is connected to the segment no.5.
LS-5 (tie-breaker higher voltage level):
1. The system A voltage and current measurement is connected to the segment no.2.
2. The system B voltage measurement is connected to the segment no.7.
easYgen:

2. The busbar voltage measurement is connected to the generator/load busbar.

Configuration

2. Enter the device ID 33 for the LS-5, incoming mains on the left side and ID 37 for the LS-5, incoming
mains on the right.
config..
LS-5, ID 33, incoming mains on the left side
- Variable system ( parameter 8816) -> System B
LS-5, ID 37, incoming mains on the right side
- Connect A dead to B dead (parameter 8802) -> Off
- Connect A dead to B alive (parameter 8803) -> Off
10. Configure the LogicsManager in regards to close and open command for the MCB, navigate to Confi-
The LM equation opens the MCB with unloading, if the remote

control bit 1 sent by the PLC

- The LM equation opens the MCB immediately, if the system A voltage / frequency is not with-
in the configured operating ranges (refer to chapter Operating Voltage / Frequency on page
77)
- OR the remote control bit 2 sent by the PLC.
- The LM equation gives the release for close MCB, if

NOTE

LS-5 (GGB):
3. Enter the device ID 34 for the LS-5, being GGB on the left side and ID 36 for the LS-5, being GGB on
the right.
config..
LS-5, ID 34, GGB on the left side
- Segment No. isol. Switch (parameter 8812) -> 4
- Isol. Switch (parameter 8815) -> System B
LS-5, ID 36, GGB on the right side
- Segment No. isol. Switch (parameter 8812) -> 5
- Isol. Switch (parameter 8815) -> System B
6. Configure the isolation switch feedback isol.sw open for a discrete input, navigate to Configura-
tion>Application config>Breakers config.. (discrete input 5 is recommended).

12. Configure the LogicsManager in regards to close and open command for the GGB, navigate to Confi-
- Open CBA unload (parameter 12943) -> LogicsManager equation.
The LM equation opens the GGB with unloading, if the remote

NOTE
The LM equation opens the GGB immediately, if

- The LM equation gives the release for close the GGB, if

- OR the CBA (GGB) has a closure failure

NOTE
LS-5 (tie-breaker lower voltage level):

config..
- Variable system (parameter 8816) -> System A


NOTE


NOTE

LS-5 (tie-breaker high voltage level):

config..
- Variable system (parameter 8816) -> System A


NOTE


- The Remote control bit 3 is sent by the PLC
NOTE

easYgen(s):
1. Configure the application mode (parameter 3444) of each easYgen device to GCB/LS5 | .
2. Enter the device ID 1 for the easYgen (usually from left to right).
4. Enter the basic segment numbers at the easYgen(s), navigate to Parameter>Configuration>Configure
Application>Configure Controller>Configure load share.
easYgen, ID 1, left side
easYgen, ID 2, right side
7. If a phase angle compensation over the GCB is required, navigate to Parame-
ter>Configuration>Configure Application>Configure Breakers>Configure GCB>Phase angle compen-
sation GCB On/Off. This setting must be executed very carefully and must be double checked by a
voltmeter over the particular breaker.
8. For displaying the mains values coming from LS-5 on the main screen, navigate to Parame-
ter>Configuration>Configure measurement, configure Show mains data parameter 4103 and switch
to LS5.
9. For the AMF mode the emergency run segments have to be configured. See there for chapter AMF
Start in the LS5 mode. Navigate to Parameter>Configuration>Configure application>Configure emer-
gency run. In this application are two examples considerable:
1. Each generator group monitors its own generator/load busbar and mains income.
- easYgen (left group) is configured to segment 1 and segment 2. The easYgen(s) on the left
side starts, if one of these 2 segments running out of its operating ranges. On the other side the
AMF mode stopps, if these both segments are back alive and the mains incoming are closed.
- easYgen (right group) is configured to segment 3 and segment 4. The easYgen(s) on the
right side starts, if one of these 2 segments running out of its operating ranges. On the other
side the AMF mode stops, if these both segments are back alive and the mains incoming are
closed.
2. All generator monitors both generator/load busbars and mains incomes.
- All easYgen are configured to segment 1; segment 2; segment 3 and segment 4. All
easYgen(s) start, if one of these 4 segments running out of its operating ranges. On the other
side the AMF mode stops, if all segments are back alive and minimum one mains incoming in
the own segment is closed.
10. Each easYgen device provides in this arrangement six control bits for sending information to the LS-5.
bits can be used as command variables in the LS-5 to iniate i.e. an alarm acknowledge or to release the
mains decoupling.

Chapter 6.
Interface
Interfaces Overview

The LS-511/521 provides the following interfaces which are supporting different protocols.
LS-511
LS-521
Figure 6-1: Interface ovierview
Figure Interface Protocol

A Service Port (RS-232 optional Woodward DPC cable required) Modbus; ToolKit
B RS-485 Modbus; ToolKit
C CAN bus CANopen

CAN Interface
CAN Interface 1 (Guidance level)
CAN interface 1 is a freely configurable CANopen interface with 2 RPDOs (receive boxes), 3 TPDOs (send box-
es), and 4 additional Server SDOs.
Figure 6-2: CAN interface 1

Serial Interfaces
RS-232 Interface (Serial Interface 1)
A freely configurable RS-232 interface is provided to serve as a local service interface for configuring the unit
and visualize measured data. The serial interface 1 provides a Modbus as well as the Woodward ToolKit proto-
col.
Figure 6-3: RS-232 interface
RS-485 Interface (Serial Interface 2)

A freely configurable RS-485 Modbus RTU Slave interface is provided to add PLC connectivity. It is also possi-
ble to configure the unit, visualize measured data and alarm messages, and control the unit remotely.
Figure 6-4: RS-485 interface

Protocols Overview

CANopen
CANopen is a communication protocol and device profile specification for embedded systems used in automa-
tion. The CANopen standard consists of an addressing scheme, several small communication protocols and an
application layer defined by a device profile. The communication protocols have support for network manage-
ment, device monitoring and communication between nodes, including a simple transport layer for message seg-
mentation/desegmentation.
Protocol Description
If a data protocol is used, a CAN message looks like this:
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8

MUX Data byte Data byte Data byte Data byte Data byte Data byte Internal
The MUX byte is counted up, the meaning of the data byte changes according to the value of the MUX byte.
In the protocol tables is listed which parameter at which MUX on which position is transmitted. The meaning of
the parameter can be taken by means of the number of the parameter description ("CANopen Mapping parame-
ter").
Example:
MUX Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8

1 118 147 Internal
In MUX 1 (byte 1 has got value 1) the value of parameter 118 is included in the byte 2 up to byte 5 (mains vol-
tage 1-2). In byte 6 up to byte 7 the value of parameter 147 is included (mains frequency). Byte 8 includes inter-
nal definitions and can be ignored.
Data Format
Unsigned Integer
UNSIGNED type data has positive integers as values. The range is between 0 and 2n-1. The data is shown by the
bit sequence of length n.
Bit sequence: b = b0 to bn-1

n-1 1 0
shows the value: UNSIGNEDn(b) = bn-1*2 +....+b1*2 +b0*2
NOTE
Please note that the bit sequence starts on the left with the least significant byte.
Example: Value 266 = 10A hex of type UNSIGNED16 is transmitted on the bus in two octets,
first 0A hex and then 01 hex.

The following UNSIGNED data types are transmitted as follows:
Octet Number 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
UNSIGNED8 b7 to b0
UNSIGNED16 b7 to b0 b15 to b8
UNSIGNED24 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16
UNSIGNED32 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24
UNSIGNED40 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24 b39 to b32
UNSIGNED48 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24 b39 to b32 b47 to b40
UNSIGNED56 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24 b39 to b32 b47 to b40 b55 to b48
UNSIGNED64 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24 b39 to b32 b47 to b40 b55 to b48 b63 to b56
Table 6-1: Transfer syntax for data type UNSIGNEDn
Signed Integer
SIGNED type data has integers as values. The range is between 0 and 2n-1. The data is shown by the bit sequence
of length n.
Bit sequence: b = b0 to bn-1

n-2 1 0
shows the value: SIGNEDn(b) = bn-2*2 +...+b1*2 +b0*2 if bn-1 = 0
and with twos complement: SIGNEDn(b) = SIGNEDn(^b)-1 if bn-1 = 1
NOTE
Please note that the bit sequence starts on the left with the least significant byte.
Example: The value -266 = FEF6 hex of type SIGNED16 is transmitted in two octets,
first F6 hex and then FE hex.
The following SIGNED data types are transmitted as follows:
Octet Number 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
SIGNED8 b7 to b0
SIGNED16 b7 to b0 b15 to b8
SIGNED24 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16
SIGNED32 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24
SIGNED40 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24 b39 to b32
SIGNED48 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24 b39 to b32 b47 to b40
SIGNED56 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24 b39 to b32 b47 to b40 b55 to b48
SIGNED64 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24 b39 to b32 b47 to b40 b55 to b48 b63 to b56
Table 6-2: Transfer syntax for data type INTEGERn

Modbus
Modbus is a serial communications protocol published by Modicon in 1979 for use with its programmable logic
controllers (PLCs). It has become a de facto standard communications protocol in industry, and is now the most
commonly available means of connecting industrial electronic devices. The Woodward controller supports a
Modbus RTU Slave module. This means that a Master node needs to poll the controller slave node. Modbus RTU
can also be multi-dropped, or in other words, multiple Slave devices can exist on one Modbus RTU network, as-
suming that the serial interface is a RS-485. Detailed Information about the Modbus protocol are available on the
following website:
http://www.modbus.org/specs.php
There are also various tools available on the internet. We recommend using ModScan32 which is a Windows ap-
plication designed to operate as a Modbus Master device for accessing data points in a connected Modbus Slave
device. It is designed primarily as a testing device for verification of correct protocol operation in new or existing
systems. It is possible to download a trial version from the following website:
http://www.win-tech.com/html/modscan32.htm
Address Range
The controller Modbus Slave module distinguishes between visualization data and configuration & remote con-
trol data. The different data is accessible over a split address range and can be read via the "Read Holding Regis-
ter" function. Furthermore, controller parameters and remote control data can be written with the "Preset Single
Registers" function or "Preset Multiple Registers" (refer to Table 3-6)
Table 6-3: Address range
NOTE
All addresses in this document comply with the Modicon address convention. Some PLCs or PC pro-
grams use different address conventions depending on their implementation. Then the address must
be increased and the leading 4 may be omitted.
Please refer to your PLC or program manual for more information. This determines the address sent
over the bus in the Modbus telegram. The Modbus starting address 450001 of the visualization data
may become bus address 50000 for example.

Visualization
The visualization over Modbus is provided in a very fast data protocol where important system data like alarm
states, AC measurement data, switch states and various other informations may be polled. According to the Mod-
bus addressing range, the visualization protocol can be reached on addresses starting at 450001. On this address
range it is possible to do block reads from 1 up to 128 Modbus registers at a time.
Modbus Read Description Multiplier Units

Addresses
450001 Protocol-ID, always 5300 --
450002 Scaling Power (16 bits)
Exponent 10x W (5;4;3;2)
............ ......... ..... .....
............ ......... ..... .....
............ ......... ..... .....
............ ......... ..... .....
450250 System B voltage L3-N 0.1 V
Table 6-4: Address range block read
NOTE
Table 6-4 is only an excerpt of the data protocol. It conforms to the data protocol 5300. Refer to Proto-
col 5300 (Basic Visualization) on page 218 for the complete protocol.
The following ModScan32 screenshot shows the configurations made to read the visualization protocol with a
block read of 128 registers.
Figure 6-5: Visualization configurations

Configuration
The Modbus interface can be used to read/write parameters. According the Modbus addressing range for the con-
figuration addresses, the range starts at 40001 and ends at 450000. You can always access only one parameter of
the system in this address range. The Modbus address can be calculated depending on the parameter ID as illu-
strated below:
Parameter ID < 10000 Parameter ID >= 10000

Modbus address = 40000 + (Par. ID+1) 400000 + (Par. ID+1)
Table 6-5: Address calculation
Block reads in this address range depend on the data type of the parameter. This makes it important to set the cor-
rect length in Modbus registers which depends on the data type (UNSIGNED 8, INTEGER 16, etc.). Refer to
Table 3-9 for more information.
Types Modbus
registers
UNSIGNED 8 1
UNSIGNED 16 1
INTEGER 16 1
UNSIGNED 32 2
INTEGER 32 2
LOGMAN 7
TEXT/X X/2
Table 6-6: Data types

Chapter 7.
Technical Data
Nameplate ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 2 3 1 S/N Serial number (numerical)

2 S/N Date of production (YYMM)
3 S/N Serial number (Barcode)
4 P/N Item number
5 REV Item revision number
6 Details Technical data
7 Type Description (long)
8 Type Description (short)
9 Approval Approvals
4 5 6 7 8 9
Measuring values, voltages ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ /

- Measuring voltages 120 V
Rated value (Vrated) ........................................ 69/120 Vac
Maximum value (Vmax) ........................ max. 86/150 Vac
Rated voltage phase ground ............................ 150 Vac
Rated surge voltage ............................................... 2.5 kV
480 V
Rated value (Vrated) ...................................... 277/480 Vac
Maximum value (Vmax) ...................... max. 346/600 Vac
Rated voltage phase ground ............................ 300 Vac
Rated surge voltage ............................................... 4.0 kV
- Linear measuring range ..................................................................................... 1.25 Vrated

- Measuring frequency .................................................................. 50/60 Hz (40.0 to 85.0 Hz)
- Accuracy .................................................................................................................... Class 1
- Input resistance per path 120 V ............................................................... 0.498 M
480 V ................................................................... 2.0 M
- Maximum power consumption per path ................................................................. < 0.15 W
Measuring values, currents --------------------------------------------------------- galvanically isolated

- Measuring current [1] Rated value (Irated) ............................................. ../1 A
[5] Rated value (Irated) ............................................. ../5 A
- Accuracy .................................................................................................................... Class 1

- Linear measuring range System A .......................................................... 1.5 Irated
- Maximum power consumption per path ...............................................................< 0.15 VA
- Rated short-time current (1 s) [1] ................................................................... 50.0 Irated
[5] ................................................................... 10.0 Irated
Ambient variables ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Power supply ............................................................................... 12/24 Vdc (8 to 40.0 Vdc)
Intrinsic consumption ................................................................ ~ 5 W (LS-511)
................................................................ ~ 6 W (LS-521)
- Degree of pollution ..............................................................................................................2
- Maximum elevation .......................................................................................... 2000 m ASL
Discrete inputs ------------------------------------------------------------------------ galvanically isolated

- Input range (Vcont. dig. input) ..................................... Rated voltage 12/24 Vdc (8 to 40.0 Vdc)
- Input resistance .............................................................................................. approx. 20 k
Discrete outputs ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- potential free
- Contact material ........................................................................................................ AgCdO
- General purpose (GP) (Vcont, relays)
AC..................................................... 2.00 Aac@250 Vac
DC...................................................... 2.00 Adc@24 Vdc
0.36 Adc@125 Vdc
0.18 Adc@250 Vdc
- Pilot duty (PD) (Vcont, relays)
AC........................................................................... B300
DC...................................................... 1.00 Adc@24 Vdc
0.22 Adc@125 Vdc
0.10 Adc@250 Vdc
Interface --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Service Port (RS-232)................................................................. galvanically not isolated
- Version ...................................................................................................................... RS-232
- Signal level ....................................................................................................................... 5V
RS-485 interface ................................................................................ galvanically isolated
- Insulation voltage (continuously) ............................................................................. 100 Vac
- Insulation test voltage ( 5s) .................................................................................. 1000 Vac
- Version ....................................................................................................... RS-485 Standard
- Operation........................................................................................................... Half Duplex
CAN bus interface ............................................................................. galvanically isolated
- Insulation voltage (continuously) ............................................................................. 100 Vac
- Insulation test voltage ( 5s) .................................................................................. 1000 Vac
- Version ................................................................................................................... CAN bus
- Internal line termination ................................................................................... Not available
Battery ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Type ......................................................................................................................... Lithium
- Life span (operation without power supply) ................................................. approx. 5 years
- Battery field replacement ................................................................................... not allowed
Housing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Type plastic ................................................................easYpack
sheet metal ............................................................custom
- Dimensions (W H D) plastic ................................................219 171 61 mm
sheet metal ........................................190 167 47 mm
- Front cutout (plastic housing) (W H) .................................... 186 [+1.1] 138 [+1.0] mm
- Wiring ................................................................................... screw-plug-terminals 2.5 mm
- Recommended locked torque ........................................................... 4 inch pounds / 0.5 Nm
use 60/75 C copper wire only
use class 1 wire only or equivalent
- Weight plastic ......................................................... approx. 850 g
sheet metal ................................................. approx. 840 g

Protection
- Protection system plastic .................... IP54 from front with clamp fasteners
IP66 from front with screw kit
IP20 from back
sheet metal................................................................ IP20
- Front folio (plastic housing) ..................................................................... insulating surface
- EMC test (CE) ................................................ tested according to applicable EN guidelines
- Listings ............................... CE marking; UL / cUL, Ordinary locations, File No.: 231544
- ................................................................................................................................ GOST-R
- Marine approval ............................. Lloyds Register (LR) Type Approval
Generic note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Accuracy .................................................................................. is referred to full scale value

Environmental Data

Vibration --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Frequency Range Sine Sweep ...................................................................... 5Hz to 100Hz
- Acceleration ............................................................................................................. 4G
- Standards ...............................................................................................................................
EN 60255-21-1 (EN 60068-2-6, Fc)
Lloyds Register, Vibration Test2
SAEJ1455 Chassis Data
- Frequency Range - Random .......................................................................... 10Hz to 500Hz
- Power Intensity .......................................................................................... 0.015G/Hz
- RMS Value .................................................................................................. 1.04 Grms
- Standards ...............................................................................................................................
MIL-STD 810F, M514.5A, Cat.4,
Truck/Trailer tracked-restrained
cargo, Fig. 514.5-C1
Shock -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Shock........................................................................................ 40G, Saw tooth pulse, 11ms
- Standards ...............................................................................................................................
EN 60255-21-2
MIL-STD 810F, M516.5, Procedure 1
Temperature ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Cold, Dry Heat (storage) ........................................................ -30C (-22F) / 80C (176F)
- Cold, Dry Heat (operating) ..................................................... -20C (-4F) / 70 C (158F)
- Standards ...............................................................................................................................
IEC 60068-2-2, Test Bb and Bd
IEC 60068-2-1, Test Ab and Ad
MILSTD -810D, M501.2 Induced, M502.2 Cold
LR Dry Heat, Cold, Envt 2,4, DNV Dry heat, Cold Class
A,C
Humidity ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Humidity .............................................. 95%, non condensing, max.85% @ 40C / 104F
- Standards ................................................................................ MIL-STD 810D, M507.2, PII
Marine Environmental Categories -------------------------------------------------------------------------

- Lloyds Register of Shipping (LRS) ................................. ENV1, ENV2, ENV3 and ENV4

Accuracy

Measuring value Display Accuracy Measuring start Notes
Frequency
System A 0.1 % (of 5 % (of PT secondary
40.0 to 85.0 Hz
System B 85 Hz) voltage setting) 1
Voltage
1.5 % (of PT second-
Wye system A / system A
1% ary voltage setting) 1
0 to 650 kV
(of 120/480 V) 2 2 % (of PT secondary
Delta system A / system B
voltage setting) 1
Current
System A 1%
0 to 32,000 A 1 % (of 1/5 A) 3
Max. value (of 1/5 A) 3
Real power
2% starts with detecting
Actual total real power value -2 to 2 GW (of 120/480 V * the zero passage of
1/5 A) 2/3 current/voltage
Reactive power
2% starts with detecting
Actual value in L1, L2, L3 -2 to 2 Gvar (of 120/480 V * the zero passage of
1/5 A) 2/3 current/voltage
Power factor
lagging 0.00 to
1.00 is displayed for measuring
Actual value power factor L1 1.00 2% 2 % (of 1/5 A) 3
values below the measuring start
to leading 0.00
Miscellaneous
Battery voltage 8 to 40 V 1 % (of 24 V)
1.25 % (of PT sec- 180 is displayed for measuring
Phase angle -180 to 180
ondary volt. setting) values below measuring start
1
Setting of the parameter for the PT secondary rated voltage
2
depending on the used measuring inputs (120/480 V)
3
depending on the CT input hardware (1/5 A) of the respective unit
Reference conditions (for measuring the accuracy):
Input voltage ............................. sinusoidal rated voltage

Input current ............................. sinusoidal rated current
Frequency ................................. rated frequency +/- 2 %
Power supply ............................ rated voltage +/- 2 %
Power factor (cos ) ................. 1.00
Ambient temperature ................ 23 C +/- 2 K
Warm-up period........................ 20 minutes

Appendix A.
Useful Information
Connecting 24 V Relays

Interferences in the interaction of all components may affect the function of electronic devices.
One interference factor is disabling inductive loads, like coils of electromagnetic switching devices. When disabl-
ing such a device, high switch-off induces voltages may occur, which might destroy adjacent electronic devices
or result interference voltage pulses, which lead to functional faults, by capacitive coupling mechanisms.
Since an interference-free switch-off is not possible without additional equipment, the relay coil is connected
with an interference suppressing circuit.
If 24 V (coupling) relays are used in an application, it is required to connect a protection circuit to avoid interfe-
rences. Figure 7-1 shows the exemplary connection of a diode as an interference suppressing circuit.
Figure 7-1: Interference suppressing circuit - connection

Advantages and disadvantages of different interference suppressing circuits are described in the following.
Connection diagram Load current / voltage Advantages Disadvantages

curve
Uncritical dimensioning High release delay
Lowest possible induced vol-
tage
Very simple and reliable
Uncritical dimensioning No attenuation below VVDR

High energy absorption
Very simple setup
Suitable for AC voltage
Reverse polarity protected
HF attenuation by energy sto- Exact dimensioning re-

rage quired
Immediate shut-off limiting
Attenuation below limiting vol-
tage
Very suitable for AC voltage
Reverse polarity protected
Table 7-1: Interference suppressing circuit for relays

Appendix B.
Miscellaneous
Alarm Classes

The control functions are structured in the following alarm classes:
Alarm class Visible in the display LED "Alarm" Relay "Command:

& horn open CBA"
A yes no no
Warning Alarm
This alarm does not open a breaker. A message output without a centralized alarm occurs:
Alarm text.
B yes yes no
Warning Alarm
This alarm does not open a breaker. An output of the centralized alarm occurs and the command variable 3.05 (horn) is is-
sued.
Alarm text + flashing LED "Alarm" + Relay centralized alarm (horn).
C yes yes with unloading
Shutdown Alarm
With this alarm the CBA is opened with unloading. .
Alarm text + flashing LED "Alarm" + Relay centralized alarm (horn) + CBA open with unloading .
D yes yes immediately
Shutdown Alarm
With this alarm the CBA is opened immediately.
Alarm text + flashing LED "Alarm" + Relay centralized alarm (horn) + CBA open immediately.
E yes yes immediately
Shutdown Alarm
With this alarm the CBA is opened with unloading.
Alarm text + flashing LED "Alarm" + Relay centralized alarm (horn)+ CBA open immediately.
F yes yes immediately
Shutdown Alarm
With this alarm the CBA is opened immediately.
Alarm text + flashing LED "Alarm" + Relay centralized alarm (horn)+ CBA open immediately.
Control no no no
Control Signal
This signal issues a control command only. It may be assigned to a discrete input for example to get a control signal, which
may be used in the LogicsManager. No alarm message and no entry in the alarm list or the event history will be issued. This
signal is always self-acknowledging, but considers a delay time and may also be configured with Monitoring lockable.

Appendix C.
LogicsManager
The LogicsManager is used to customize the sequence of events in the control unit such as the start command of
the engine or the operation of control unit relay outputs. For example, the start routine may be programmed so
that it requires the closing of a discrete input or a preset time of day. Depending on the application mode of the
unit, the number of available relays that may be programmed with the LogicsManager will vary. Two indepen-
dent time delays are provided for the configured action to take place and be reset.
Structure and Description of the LogicsManager
Command [C1] Sign [S1]
Figure 7-2: LogicsManager - function overview
Command (variable) - A list of parameters and functions is provided for the command inputs. Examples of
the parameters that may be configured into these commands are generator undervoltage thresholds 1 and 2,
start fail, and cool down. These command variables are used to control the output function or relay. Refer to
Logical Command Variables starting on page 200 for a complete list of all command variables.
Sign - The sign field can be used to invert the state of the command or to fix its output to a logical true or
false if the command is not needed. Setting the sign to the NOT state, changes the output of the command va-
riable from true to false or vice versa.
Operator - A logical device such as AND or OR.
(Logical) output - The action or control sequence that occurs when all parameters set into the LogicsManag-
er are met.
[Cx] - Command {x} [Sx] - Sign {x} [Ox] - Operator {x} [Ax] - Output {x}
Value {[Cx]}
The value [Cx] is
passed 1:1. AND
Logical AND
NOT Value {[Cx]} NAND

The opposite of the Logical negated AND
The description and the value [Cx] is passed.
OR The description and the
tables of all values, flags, and
Logical OR tables of all logical outputs,
internal functions that are
0 [False; always "0"] flags, and functions that are
able to combine via the Lo-
NOR able to combine via the Lo-
gicsManager can be found in The value [Cx] is ignored and
Logical negated OR gicsManager can be found in
the Logical Command Va- this logic path
the Logical Outputs section
riables section starting on will always be FALSE.
XOR starting on page 197.
page 200.
Exclusive OR
1 [True; always "1"]
NXOR
The value [Cx] is ignored and
Exclusive negated OR
this logic path
will always be TRUE.
(See Table 7-3 for symbols)
Table 7-2: LogicsManager - command overview

Configuration of the Command Chain

Using the values specified in the above table, the chain of commands of the LogicsManager (for example: operat-
ing the relays, setting the flags, specification of the automatic functions) is configured as follows:
[Ax] = ( ( [C1] & [S1] ) & [O1] & ( [C2] & [S2] ) ) & [O2] & ( [C3] & [S3] )
Programming example for the LogicsManager:

Relay [R2] shall energize, whenever "Discrete input [D2]" is energized "AND" the control does "NOT" have a
fault that is "Alarm class C" "AND" does "NOT" have a fault that is "Alarm class D"
Figure 7-3: LogicsManager - display in ToolKit Figure 7-4: LogicsManager - display on LCD screen
Logical Symbols

The following symbols are used for the graphical programming of the LogicsManager. The LS-5 displays sym-
bols according to the DIN 40 700 standard.
ToolKit AND OR NAND NOR NXOR XOR

DIN 40 700
(LS-5)
ASA
US MIL
IEC617-12
& >=1 & >=1 = =1
Truth x1 x2 y x1 x2 y x1 x2 y x1 x2 y x1 x2 y x1 x2 y
table 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0
Table 7-3: LogicsManager - logical symbols

Logical Outputs

The logical outputs or combinations may be grouped into three categories:
Internal logical flags

Internal functions
Relay outputs
NOTE
The numbers of the logical outputs in the third column may again be used as input variable for other
outputs in the LogicsManager.
Logical Outputs: Internal Flags

16 internal logical flags may be programmed to activate/deactivate functions. This permits more than
3 commands to be included in a logical function. They may be used like "auxiliary flags".
Name Function Number

Flag 1 Internal flag 1 00.01
Logical Outputs: LS-5 Flags

5 internal logical LS-5 flags may be programmed to activate/deactivate functions. This permits more than
3 commands to be included in a logical function. They may be used like "auxiliary flags". These flags are trans-
mitted on the CAN bus. The flags of all LS-5 are received (as 26.01 to 27.80) by the LS-5 and the easYgen. They
can be used as inputs for the LogicsManager.

Flag 1 LS5 LS5 flag 1 24.41

Logical Outputs: Internal Functions

The following logical functions may be used to activate/deactivate functions.

External acknowledge The alarm acknowledgement is performed from an external source (parame- 00.15
ter 12490 on page 95)
Operation mode AUTO Activation of the AUTOMATIC operating mode (parameter 12510 on 00.16
page 76)
Operation mode MAN Activation of the MANUAL operating mode (parameter 12520 on page 76) 00.17
Synchronization mode CHECK Used for checking a synchronizer prior to commissioning. The system ac- 00.38
tively synchronizes generator(s) by issuing speed and voltage bias com-
mands, but does not issue a breaker closure command. (parameter 5728
onpage 71)
Synchronization mode The system acts in a synch check mode. The system will not issue speed or 00.39
PERMISSIVE voltage bias commands to achieve synchronization, but if synchronization
conditions are matched (frequency, phase, voltage and phase angle), the
control will issue a breaker close command. (parameter 5728 on page 71)
Synchronization mode RUN Normal operating mode. The system actively synchronizes and issues 00.40
breaker closure commands. (parameter 5728 on page 71)
Lock keypad Activation of lock keypad (parameter 12978 on page 60) 00.95

Logical Outputs: Relay Outputs

All relays may be controlled directly by the LogicsManager depending on the respective application mode.

Relay 1 If this logical output becomes true, the relay output 1 will be activated 00.41
(Ready for operation OFF)
Relay 5 Fixed to 'Open CBA' ---
Relay Term.
Number
Internal relay outputs
[R1] 30/31 LogicsManager; combinated with 'Ready for operation OFF'
[R2] 32/33 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with 'Centralized alarm (horn)'
[R3] 34/35 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with 'System B not OK'
[R4] 36/37 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with 'System A not OK'
[R5] 38/39/40 Fixed to 'Open CBA'
[R6] 41/42 Fixed to 'Close CBA' if CBA is controlled by 2 relays otherwise LogicsManager pre-assigned with 'All
Alarm classes'
Table 7-4: Relay outputs - terminal assignment

Logical Command Variables

The logical command variables are grouped into different categories:
Group 00: Flags condition 1

Group 01: Alarm system
Group 02: Systems condition
Group 04: Applications condition
Group 05: Device related alarms
Group 06: System B (SyB.) related alarms
Group 07: System A (SyA.) related alarms
Group 08: System related alarms
Group 09: Discrete inputs
Group 11: Clock and timer
Group 13: Discrete outputs
Group 24: Flags condition 2
Group 26: Logic flags from LS5 (33 to 48)
Group 27: Logic flags from LS5 (49 to 64)
Group 28: LS5 system conditions
Group 29: Commands of EG (1 to 16)
Group 29: Commands of EG (17 to 32)

Logical Command Variables: Group 00: Flags Condition 1

Flags condition 1, Logic command variables 00.01-00.95
Internal Flags are the result of the output of the logic ladders from Flag 1 to 16. Flags are internal logic that can
be sent to other flags or Command variables.
No. ID Name Function Note

00.01 1 LM: Flag 1 Internal flag 1 Internal calculation; descr. page 197
00.15 15 LM: External acknowledge The alarm acknowledgement is performed
from an external source
00.16 16 LM: Operation mode AUTO Activation of the AUTOMATIC operating
mode
00.17 17 LM: Operation mode MAN Activation of the MANUAL op. mode
00.38 38 LM: Syn. Mode CHECK Synchronisation mode check is active
00.39 39 LM: Syn. Mode PERM Synchronisation mode permissive is ac-
tive
00.40 40 LM: Syn. Mode RUN Synchronisation mode run is active
00.41 41 LM: Relay 1 TRUE, if the LogicsManager condi-
00.42 42 LM: Relay 2 tion driving this relay is fulfilled
00.43 43 LM: Relay 3
00.44 44 LM: Relay 4
00.45 45 Reserved
00.46 46 LM: Relay 6
00.95 95 LM: Lock Keypad Lock keypad is active

Logical Command Variables: Group 01: Alarm System

Alarm system, Logic command variables 01.01-01.12
Alarm classes may be configured as command variables for all logical outputs in the LogicsManager. Refer to
page 194 for a description of the alarm classes.
No. ID Name / Function Note

01.01 101 Alarm class A TRUE as long as an alarm of this alarm class is active or latched (triggered)
01.02 102 Alarm class B TRUE as long as an alarm of this alarm class is active or latched (triggered)
01.03 103 Alarm class C TRUE as long as an alarm of this alarm class is active or latched (triggered)
01.04 104 Alarm class D TRUE as long as an alarm of this alarm class is active or latched (triggered)
01.05 105 Alarm class E TRUE as long as an alarm of this alarm class is active or latched (triggered)
01.06 106 Alarm class F TRUE as long as an alarm of this alarm class is active or latched (triggered)
01.07 107 All alarm classes TRUE as long as at least one alarm of the alarm classes A/B/C/D/E/F is active or latched
(triggered)
01.08 108 Warning alarm TRUE as long as at least one alarm of the alarm classes A/B is active or latched (trig-
gered)
01.09 109 Shutdown alarm TRUE as long as at least one alarm of the alarm classes C/D/E/F is active or latched
(triggered)
01.10 110 Centralized alarm TRUE as long as at least one alarm of the alarm classes B/C/D/E/F is active or latched
(triggered)
01.11 111 New alarm trig- TRUE if any alarm has been triggered until it is acknowledged
gered
01.12 112 Horn True if a new alarm is triggered and time (parameter 1756) for horn reset has not ex-
ceeded.

Logical Command Variables: Group 02: Systems Condition

Systems condition, Logic command variables 02.03-02.25
The status of the system may be used as command variable in a logical output to set parameters for customized
operations.

02.03 203 SyB. voltage ok SyB. voltage within operating window TRUE as long as the SyB. voltage is
within the operating window
02.04 204 SyB. frequency ok SyB. frequency within operating window TRUE as long as the SyB. frequency is
02.05 205 SyB. voltage / frequen- SyB. voltage and frequency within operat- TRUE as long as the SyB. voltage and
cy ok ing windows frequency are within the operating win-
dows (02.03. and 02.04 are TRUE)
02.09 209 SyA. voltage ok SyA. voltage within operating window TRUE as long as the SyA. voltage is
02.10 210 SyA. frequency ok SyA. frequency within operating window TRUE as long as the SyA. frequency is
02.11 211 SyA. voltage / frequen- SyA. voltage and frequency within operat- TRUE as long as the SyA. voltage and
cy ok ing windows frequency are within the operating win-
dows (02.09. and 02.10 are TRUE)
02.12 212 SyA. rotation CCW SyA. voltage: rotating direction CCW TRUE as long as the respective rota-
02.13 213 SyA. rotation CW SyA. voltage: rotating direction CW tion field is detected in case of a three-
02.14 214 SyB. rotation CCW SyB. voltage: rotating direction CCW phase voltage measurement at the re-
02.15 215 SyB. rotation CW SyB. voltage: rotating direction CW spective measuring location
02.23 223 System A is dead System A is dead TRUE as long as system A voltage is
below the level defined by parameter
5820.
02.24 224 System B is dead System B is dead TRUE as long as system B voltage is
below the level defined by parameter
5820.
02.25 225 Gen. is mains par. Indicates generator is in mains parallel op- TRUE if system A (B) is mains con-
eration nected and system B (A) is variable
and CBA is closed and at least one
GCB (easYgen) at a relevant segment
is closed. (It can be used to enable
mains decoupling.)

Logical Command Variables: Group 04: Applications Condition

Applications condition, Logic command variables 4.01-04.62
These operating statuses may be used as command variable in a logical output to set parameters for customized
operations.

04.01 401 Auto mode AUTOMATIC operating mode active TRUE in AUTOMATIC operating mode
04.03 403 Manual mode MANUAL operating mode active TRUE in MANUAL operating mode
04.04 404 Lamp test A lamp test is being performed TRUE if the lamp test is active
04.05 405 Acknowledge "Acknowledge" push button has been This condition is TRUE for approx. 40 ms
pressed or an external acknowledg- and must be extended utilizing a delay time
ment via LogicsManager
04.07 407 CBA is closed CBA is closed only TRUE if DI 8 (Reply CBA) is de-energized
04.11 411 Mains settling Mains settling time active TRUE in LS5 or single LS5 mode while
mains settling time is running.
04.21 421 Syn. CBA is active Synchronization CBA is active TRUE if the CBA shall be synchronized until
the CBA is closed
04.22 422 Opening CBA active Opening CBA is active TRUE if an CBA open command is issued
until DI 8 (Reply CBA) is energized
04.23 423 Closing CBA active Closing CBA is active TRUE if an CBA close command is issued;
same function as relay 5 or 6 (cf. parameter
8800)
04.29 429 CBA unloading CBA unloading sequence is active TRUE if CBA open with unloading is active.
04.44 444 Remote control Bit 1 Free control bit 1 is activated
Refer to Chapter 6: Interface
04.61 461 Syn. Mains close ac- Synchronous Mains closure procedure TRUE if
tive is active. - System A detected as mains connected
and
- System B detected as mains connected
and
- Angle is in range (paramter 8821, 8822)
and
- Parameter Connect synchr. mains (8820)
is On
and
- CBA is enabled
and
- System A is ok
and
- System B is ok.
04.62 462 Dead bus close active Dead bus closure procedure is active. TRUE if
- Dead bus closure is allowed (parameter
8801 to 8804)
and
- Dead bus conditions are true (parameter
8801 to 8805, 5820)
and
- CBA is enabled

Logical Command Variables: Group 05: Device Related Alarms

Device related alarms, Logic command variables 05.15
These device alarms may be used as command variable in a logical output to set parameters for customized oper-
ations.

05.15 515 EEprom failure TRUE = alarm latched (triggered)
FALSE = alarm acknowledged
Logical Command Variables: Group 06: System B Related Alarms

System B related alarms, Logic command variables 06.21
These system B alarms may be used as command variable in a logical output to set parameters for customized
operations.

06.21 621 SyB. phase rotation TRUE = alarm latched (triggered)
Logical Command Variables: Group 07: System A Related Alarms

System A related alarms, Logic command variables 07.05-07.27
These system A alarms may be used as command variable in a logical output to set parameters for customized
operations.
No. ID Function Note

07.05 705 SyA. phase rotation
07.06 706 SyA. overfrequency (limit) 1
07.07 707 SyA. overfrequency (limit) 2
07.08 708 SyA. underfrequency (limit) 1
07.09 709 SyA. underfrequency (limit) 2
07.10 710 SyA. overvoltage (limit) 1
07.11 711 SyA. overvoltage (limit) 2 TRUE = alarm latched (triggered)
07.12 712 SyA. undervoltage (limit) 1 FALSE = alarm acknowledged
07.13 713 SyA. undervoltage (limit) 2
07.14 714 SyA. phase shift
07.15 715 SyA. df/dt
07.25 725 SyA. decoupling
07.26 726 SyA. voltage asymmetry
07.27 727 SyA. Voltage. increase.
Logical Command Variables: Group 08: System Related Alarms

System related alarms, Logic command variables 08.01-08.36
These system alarms may be used as command variable in a logical output n to set parameters for customized op-
erations.

08.01 801 Battery overvoltage (limit) 1
08.02 802 Battery overvoltage (limit) 2
08.03 803 Battery undervoltage (limit) 1
08.04 804 Battery undervoltage (limit) 2
08.07 807 CBA fail to close
TRUE = alarm latched (triggered)
08.08 808 CBA fail to open
08.17 817 Missing LS5
08.18 818 CANopen Interface 1
08.31 831 Synchronization time CBA
08.33 833 Phase rotation mismatch
08.36 836 CBA unload mismatch

Logical Command Variables: Group 09: Discrete Inputs

Discrete inputs, Logic command variables 09.01-09.08
The discrete inputs may be used as command variable in a logical output to set parameters for customized opera-
tions.

09.01 901 DI 1 (Discrete input [DI 01])
09.02 902 DI 2 (Discrete input [DI 02]) TRUE = logical "1" (delay times and
09.03 903 DI 3 (Discrete input [DI 03]) NO/NC parameters are ignored)
09.04 904 DI 4 (Discrete input [DI 04]) FALSE = logical "0" (alarm has been ac-
09.05 905 DI 5 (Discrete input [DI 05]) knowledged or immediately after TRUE
09.06 906 DI 6 (Discrete input [DI 06]) condition is not present anymore, if Con-
09.07 907 DI 7 (Discrete input [DI 07]) trol is configured as alarm class)
09.08 908 DI 8 (Discrete input [DI 08])
Logical Command Variables: Group 11: Clock and Timer

Clock and timer, Logic command variables 11.01-11.07
Time functions may be used as command variable in a logical output.

11.01 1101 Timer 1 (exceeded) see page 115Fehler! Textmarke nicht
definiert.
11.02 1102 Timer 2 (exceeded) see page 115
11.03 1103 Active weekday (equal to setting) see page 115
11.04 1104 Active day (equal to setting) see page 115
11.05 1105 Active hour (equal to setting) see page 115
11.06 1106 Active minute (equal to setting) see page 115
11.07 1107 Active second (equal to setting) see page 115
Logical Command Variables: Group 13: Discrete Outputs

Discrete outputs, Logic command variables 13.01-13.12
The discrete outputs may be used as command variable in a logical output.

13.01 1301 Discrete output DO1 [R01]
13.02 1302 Discrete output DO2 [R02] TRUE = logical "1" (this condition indicates the
13.03 1303 Discrete output DO3 [R03] logical status of the internal relays)
13.04 1304 Discrete output DO4 [R04] FALSE = logical "0" (this condition indicates the
13.05 1305 Discrete output DO5 [R05] logical status of the internal relays)
13.06 1306 Discrete output DO6 [R06]

Logical Command Variables: Group 24: Flags condition 2

Flags condition 2, Logic command variables 24.31-24.58
The discrete outputs may be used as command variable in a logical output.

24.31 2131 LM: Enable SyA dec.
24.32 2132 LM: Open CBA
24.33 2133 LM: Immediate open CBA
24.34 2134 LM: Enable to close CBA
24.39 2139 LM: Isol. swi. open
24.40 2140 LM: Lock Monitoring
24.41 2141 LM: Flag 1 LS5
24.42 2142 LM: Flag 2 LS5
24.43 2143 LM: Flag 3 LS5
24.44 2144 LM: Flag 4 LS5
24.45 2145 LM: Flag 5 LS5
24.46 2146 LM: Open CBA in MAN
24.47 2147 LM: Close CBA in MAN
24.51 2151 LM: LED 1 (System A in range) These command variables and the cores-
24.52 2152 LM: LED 2 (System B in range) ponding equations are available in the dis-
24.53 2153 LM: LED 3 (Breaker is closed) play version in ToolKit and the HMI, even if
24.54 2154 LM: LED 4 (Synchronization is active) the LEDs are not available. In the display
24.55 2155 LM: LED 5 (Breaker close command) version the variables can be used as addi-
24.56 2156 LM: LED 6 (Breaker open failure) tional internal flags and are located there.
24.57 2157 LM: LED 7 (Breaker close failure)
24.58 2158 LM: LED 8 (Communication failure)
Logical Command Variables: Group 26: Flags of LS5 (33 to 48)

Flags of LS5 (33 to 48), Logic command variables 26.01-26.80

26.01 2201 Flag 1 LS5 device 33 TRUE if LogicsManager 12952 in LS-5 de-
vice no. {x} is activated [x = 33 to
48]
48]
48]
48]
48]
26.06 2206 Flag 1 LS5 device 34
26.07 2207 Flag 2 LS5 device 34
26.08 2208 Flag 3 LS5 device 34
26.09 2209 Flag 4 LS5 device 34
26.10 2210 Flag 5 LS5 device 34
26.11 2211 Flag 1 LS5 device 35
26.12 2212 Flag 2 LS5 device 35
26.13 2213 Flag 3 LS5 device 35
26.14 2214 Flag 4 LS5 device 35
26.15 2215 Flag 5 LS5 device 35
26.16 2216 Flag 1 LS5 device 36
26.17 2217 Flag 2 LS5 device 36
26.18 2218 Flag 3 LS5 device 36
26.19 2219 Flag 4 LS5 device 36
26.20 2220 Flag 5 LS5 device 36
26.21 2221 Flag 1 LS5 device 37
26.22 2222 Flag 2 LS5 device 37
26.23 2223 Flag 3 LS5 device 37
26.24 2224 Flag 4 LS5 device 37
26.25 2225 Flag 5 LS5 device 37
26.26 2226 Flag 1 LS5 device 38

26.27 2227 Flag 2 LS5 device 38
26.28 2228 Flag 3 LS5 device 38
26.29 2229 Flag 4 LS5 device 38
26.30 2230 Flag 5 LS5 device 38
26.31 2231 Flag 1 LS5 device 39
26.32 2232 Flag 2 LS5 device 39
26.33 2233 Flag 3 LS5 device 39
26.34 2234 Flag 4 LS5 device 39
26.35 2235 Flag 5 LS5 device 39
26.36 2236 Flag 1 LS5 device 40
26.37 2237 Flag 2 LS5 device 40
26.38 2238 Flag 3 LS5 device 40
26.39 2239 Flag 4 LS5 device 40
26.40 2240 Flag 5 LS5 device 40
26.41 2241 Flag 1 LS5 device 41
26.42 2242 Flag 2 LS5 device 41
26.43 2243 Flag 3 LS5 device 41
26.44 2244 Flag 4 LS5 device 41
26.45 2245 Flag 5 LS5 device 41
26.46 2246 Flag 1 LS5 device 42
26.47 2247 Flag 2 LS5 device 42
26.48 2248 Flag 3 LS5 device 42
26.49 2249 Flag 4 LS5 device 42
26.50 2250 Flag 5 LS5 device 42
26.51 2251 Flag 1 LS5 device 43
26.52 2252 Flag 2 LS5 device 43
26.53 2253 Flag 3 LS5 device 43
26.54 2254 Flag 4 LS5 device 43
26.55 2255 Flag 5 LS5 device 43
26.56 2256 Flag 1 LS5 device 44
26.57 2257 Flag 2 LS5 device 44
26.58 2258 Flag 3 LS5 device 44
26.59 2259 Flag 4 LS5 device 44
26.60 2260 Flag 5 LS5 device 44
26.61 2261 Flag 1 LS5 device 45
26.62 2262 Flag 2 LS5 device 45
26.63 2263 Flag 3 LS5 device 45
26.64 2264 Flag 4 LS5 device 45
26.65 2265 Flag 5 LS5 device 45
26.66 2266 Flag 1 LS5 device 46
26.67 2267 Flag 2 LS5 device 46
26.68 2268 Flag 3 LS5 device 46
26.69 2269 Flag 4 LS5 device 46
26.70 2270 Flag 5 LS5 device 46
26.71 2271 Flag 1 LS5 device 47
26.72 2272 Flag 2 LS5 device 47
26.73 2273 Flag 3 LS5 device 47
26.74 2274 Flag 4 LS5 device 47
26.75 2275 Flag 5 LS5 device 47
26.76 2276 Flag 1 LS5 device 48
26.77 2277 Flag 2 LS5 device 48
26.78 2278 Flag 3 LS5 device 48
26.79 2279 Flag 4 LS5 device 48
26.80 2280 Flag 5 LS5 device 48

Logical Command Variables: Group 27: Flags of LS5 (49 to 64)

Flags of LS5 (49 to 64), Logic command variables 27.01-27.80

64]
64]
64]
64]
64]
27.06 2306 Flag 1 LS5 device 50
27.07 2307 Flag 2 LS5 device 50
27.08 2308 Flag 3 LS5 device 50
27.09 2309 Flag 4 LS5 device 50
27.10 2310 Flag 5 LS5 device 50
27.11 2311 Flag 1 LS5 device 51
27.12 2312 Flag 2 LS5 device 51
27.13 2313 Flag 3 LS5 device 51
27.14 2314 Flag 4 LS5 device 51
27.15 2315 Flag 5 LS5 device 51
27.16 2316 Flag 1 LS5 device 52
27.17 2317 Flag 2 LS5 device 52
27.18 2318 Flag 3 LS5 device 52
27.19 2319 Flag 4 LS5 device 52
27.20 2320 Flag 5 LS5 device 52
27.21 2321 Flag 1 LS5 device 53
27.22 2322 Flag 2 LS5 device 53
27.23 2323 Flag 3 LS5 device 53
27.24 2324 Flag 4 LS5 device 53
27.25 2325 Flag 5 LS5 device 53
27.26 2326 Flag 1 LS5 device 54
27.27 2327 Flag 2 LS5 device 54
27.28 2328 Flag 3 LS5 device 54
27.29 2329 Flag 4 LS5 device 54
27.30 2330 Flag 5 LS5 device 54
27.31 2331 Flag 1 LS5 device 55
27.32 2332 Flag 2 LS5 device 55
27.33 2333 Flag 3 LS5 device 55
27.34 2334 Flag 4 LS5 device 55
27.35 2335 Flag 5 LS5 device 55
27.36 2336 Flag 1 LS5 device 56
27.37 2337 Flag 2 LS5 device 56
27.38 2338 Flag 3 LS5 device 56
27.39 2339 Flag 4 LS5 device 56
27.40 2340 Flag 5 LS5 device 56
27.41 2341 Flag 1 LS5 device 57
27.42 2342 Flag 2 LS5 device 57
27.43 2343 Flag 3 LS5 device 57
27.44 2344 Flag 4 LS5 device 57
27.45 2345 Flag 5 LS5 device 57
27.46 2346 Flag 1 LS5 device 58
27.47 2347 Flag 2 LS5 device 58
27.48 2348 Flag 3 LS5 device 58
27.49 2349 Flag 4 LS5 device 58
27.50 2350 Flag 5 LS5 device 58
27.51 2351 Flag 1 LS5 device 59
27.52 2352 Flag 2 LS5 device 59
27.53 2353 Flag 3 LS5 device 59
27.54 2354 Flag 4 LS5 device 59
27.55 2355 Flag 5 LS5 device 59
27.56 2356 Flag 1 LS5 device 60

27.57 2357 Flag 2 LS5 device 60
27.58 2358 Flag 3 LS5 device 60
27.59 2359 Flag 4 LS5 device 60
27.60 2360 Flag 5 LS5 device 60
27.61 2361 Flag 1 LS5 device 61
27.62 2362 Flag 2 LS5 device 61
27.63 2363 Flag 3 LS5 device 61
27.64 2364 Flag 4 LS5 device 61
27.65 2365 Flag 5 LS5 device 61
27.66 2366 Flag 1 LS5 device 62
27.67 2367 Flag 2 LS5 device 62
27.68 2368 Flag 3 LS5 device 62
27.69 2369 Flag 4 LS5 device 62
27.70 2370 Flag 5 LS5 device 62
27.71 2371 Flag 1 LS5 device 63
27.72 2372 Flag 2 LS5 device 63
27.73 2373 Flag 3 LS5 device 63
27.74 2374 Flag 4 LS5 device 63
27.75 2375 Flag 5 LS5 device 63
27.76 2376 Flag 1 LS5 device 64
27.77 2377 Flag 2 LS5 device 64
27.78 2378 Flag 3 LS5 device 64
27.79 2379 Flag 4 LS5 device 64
27.80 2380 Flag 5 LS5 device 64
Logical Command Variables: Group 28: LS5 system conditions

LS5 system conditions, Logic command variables 28.01-28.06

28.01 2401 Command 1 to LS5 easYgen (OR) TRUE if at least one easYgen sets the
28.02 2402 Command 2 to LS5 easYgen (OR) command variable to TRUE (OR opera-
28.03 2403 Command 3 to LS5 easYgen (OR) tion)
28.04 2404 Command 4 to LS5 easYgen (OR)
Logical Command Variables: Group 29: Commands of EG (1 to 16)

Commands of EG (1 to 16), Logic command variables 29.01-29.96

29.01 2501 Command 1 easYgen 1


Logical Command Variables: Group 30: Commands of EG (17 to 32)

Commands of EG (17 to 32), Logic command variables 30.01-30.96


Factory Setting

The inputs, outputs, and internal flags, which may be programmed via the LogicsManager have the following
factory default settings when delivered:
simple (function) extended (configuration) result
Factory Setting: Functions

[00.0x] Flag {x}; {x} = 1 to 8
If TRUE, flag {x} becomes TRUE.

Deactivated by default

FALSE
AUTO
MAN
[00.15] External acknowledgment
If TRUE, all alarms are acknowledged from

an external source.
TRUE once discrete input [DI 2] is energized. dependent on
discrete input
AUTO [DI 2]
MAN
[00.16] Operation mode AUTOMATIC
If TRUE the unit changes into AUTOMATIC

operating mode.
--- Deactivated by default
--- FALSE
AUTO ---
MAN
[00.17] Operation mode MANUAL
If TRUE the unit changes into MANUAL op-

erating mode.
--- FALSE
AUTO
MAN ---

[00.3x] Flag {y}; {x} = 0 to 7, {y} = 9 to 16
If TRUE, flag {y} becomes TRUE.


FALSE
AUTO
MAN
[00.38] Synchronization Mode CHECK
If TRUE, synchronization mode CHECK is

enabled.
--- FALSE
AUTO
MAN
[00.39] Synchronization Mode PERM
If TRUE, synchronization mode

PERMISSIVE is enabled.
--- FALSE
AUTO
MAN
[00.40] Synchronization Mode RUN
If TRUE, synchronization mode RUN is

enabled.
--- FALSE
AUTO
MAN
[00.95] Lock keypad
If TRUE, the Lock keypad function is acti-

vated.
FALSE
AUTO
MAN

Factory Setting: Relay Outputs

[00.41] Relay 1 [R01] - Ready for operation OFF
Relay will be de-energized if unit is not ready

for operation or the logics manager output is
TRUE.
LM output is deactivated by default
AUTO Note: This LM function is preconfigured and
MAN may be activated by passing through the
FALSE
command variables [01.09] Shutdown alarm
or [04.01] Operating mode AUTO or [00.01]
LM: Flag 1 ('' instead of '0').
The unit is only ready for operation after an
start-up delay following the power supply
connection.
[00.42] Relay 2 [R02] - Horn / freely configurable
Relay energizes if the internal condition

"Horn" is TRUE
dependent on
Logics
AUTO Command
MAN Variable
[01.12]
[00.43] Relay 3 [R03] -System B voltage/frequency not OK / freely configurable
Relay energizes if the internal condition "SyB

volt/freq. ok" is FALSE
dependent on
Logics
AUTO Command
MAN Variable
[02.05]
[00.44] Relay 4 [R04] - System A voltage/frequency not OK / freely configurable
Relay energizes if the internal condition "SyA

volt/freq. ok" is FALSE
dependent on
Logics
AUTO Command
MAN Variable
[02.11]

[00.45] Relay 5 [R05] - Open CBA
Fixed function to open CBA

AUTO Not configurable
MAN
[00.46] Relay 6 [R06] Close CBA (in CBA: two relay mode) / All alarm classes
In two relay mode fixed to close CBA. Oth-

erwise the relay energizes if All alarm
classes is TRUE

AUTO FALSE
MAN

Appendix D.
Data Protocols
Modbus
Protocol 5300 (Basic Visualization)
Modicon Start Parameter ID Description Multiplier Units

start addr.
addr. (*1)
450001 450000 Protocoll-ID, always 5300 --
450002 450001 3181 Scaling Power (16 bits) Exponent 10x W (5;4;3;2)
450003 450002 3182 Scaling Volts (16 bits) Exponent 10x V (2;1;0;-1)
450004 450003 3183 Scaling Amps (16 bits) Exponent 10x A (0;-1)
450005 450004 0 (reserve)
450006 450005 0 (reserve)
450007 450006 0 (reserve)
450008 450007 0 (reserve)
450009 450008 0 (reserve)
AC System A values (16 bits)
450010 450009 144 System A frequency 0.01 Hz
scaled defined by
index 3181 (mod-
450011 450010 246 Total system A power W
icon Adress
450002)
scaled defined by
index 3181 (mod-
450012 450011 247 Total system A reactive power var
icon Adress
450002)
450013 450012 160 System A power factor 0.001
scaled defined by
index 3182 (mod-
450014 450013 248 System A voltage L1-L2 V
icon Adress
450003)
scaled defined by
index 3182 (mod-
icon Adress
450003)
scaled defined by
index 3182 (mod-
icon Adress
450003)
scaled defined by
index 3182 (mod-
450017 450016 251 System A voltage L1-N V
icon Adress
450003)
scaled defined by
index 3182 (mod-
icon Adress
450003)
scaled defined by
index 3182 (mod-
icon Adress
450003)


start addr.
addr. (*1)
scaled defined by
index 3183 (mod-
450020 450019 255 System A current 1 A
icon Adress
450004)
scaled defined by
index 3183 (mod-
icon Adress
450004)
scaled defined by
index 3183 (mod-
icon Adress
450004)
450023 450022 0 (reserve)
450024 450023 0 (reserve)
450025 450024 0 (reserve)
450026 450025 0 (reserve)
450027 450026 0 (reserve)
450028 450027 0 (reserve)
450029 450028 0 (reserve)
AC System B values (16 bits)
450030 450029 147 System B frequency 0.01 Hz
scaled defined by
index 3181 (mod-
450031 450030 258 Total system B power W
icon Adress
450002)
scaled defined by
index 3181 (mod-
450032 450031 259 Total system B reactive power var
icon Adress
450002)
450033 450032 208 System B power factor 0.001
scaled defined by
index 3182 (mod-
450034 450033 260 System B voltage L1-L2 V
icon Adress
450003)
scaled defined by
index 3182 (mod-
icon Adress
450003)
scaled defined by
index 3182 (mod-
icon Adress
450003)
scaled defined by
index 3182 (mod-
450037 450036 263 System B voltage L1-N V
icon Adress
450003)
scaled defined by
index 3182 (mod-
icon Adress
450003)
scaled defined by
index 3182 (mod-
icon Adress
450003)
450040 450039 0 (reserve)
450041 450040 0 (reserve)
450042 450041 0 (reserve)
450043 450042 0 (reserve)
450044 450043 0 (reserve)
AC System values (16 bits)
450045 450044 0 (reserve)


start addr.
addr. (*1)
450046 450045 0 (reserve)
450047 450046 0 (reserve)
450048 450047 0 (reserve)
450049 450048 0 (reserve)
DC Analogue Values (16 bits)
450050 450049 10110 Battery voltage 0.1 V
450051 450050 0 (reserve)
450052 450051 0 (reserve)
450053 450052 0 (reserve)
450054 450053 0 (reserve)
450055 450054 0 (reserve)
450056 450055 0 (reserve)
450057 450056 0 (reserve)
450058 450057 0 (reserve)
450059 450058 0 (reserve)
Control and Status (16 bits)
Id discription see
450060 450059 10202 State Display operation manual (enum.)
status messages
Visualisation Remote and CB-Control

intern Mask: 0001h
intern Mask: 0002h
intern Mask: 0004h
intern Mask: 0008h
intern Mask: 0010h
intern Mask: 0020h
intern Mask: 0040h
450061 450060 8018 intern Mask: 0080h
28.01 Command to CB-control 1 (OR'ed) Mask: 0100h
intern
intern
LogicManagerBits
11.10 running hours 100h over (toggles every 100 running hours) Mask: 0001h
11.09 running hours 10h over (toggles every 10 running hours) Mask: 0002h
11.08 running hours 1h over (toggles every running hour) Mask: 0004h
11.07 Active second Mask: 0008h
11.06 Active minute Mask: 0010h
450062 450061 10146 11.05 Active hour Mask: 0020h
11.04 Active day in month Mask: 0040h
11.03 Active weekday Mask: 0080h
11.02 Time 2 overrun Mask: 0100h
intern Mask: 0400h
04.05 Acknowledge was executed Mask: 0800h


start addr.
addr. (*1)
01.09 Shutdown alarm are active (alarm class C-F) Mask: 1000h
intern Mask: 2000h
intern Mask: 4000h
intern Mask: 8000h
LogicManagerBits1
intern Mask: 0001h
intern Mask: 0002h
intern Mask: 0004h
intern Mask: 0008h
intern Mask: 0010h
intern Mask: 0020h
intern Mask: 0040h
450063 450062 10147 intern Mask: 0080h
intern Mask: 0100h
intern Mask: 0200h
00.46 LM Relay 6 Mask: 0400h
intern Mask: 0800h
LogicManagerBits2
intern Mask: 0001h
00.17 LM Operation mode MANUAL Mask: 0002h
00.16 LM Operation mode AUTOMATIC Mask: 0004h
intern Mask: 0008h
00.15 LM External acknowledge Mask: 0010h
intern Mask: 0020h
intern Mask: 0040h
450064 450063 10140 intern Mask: 0080h
00.08 LM Internal flag 8 Mask: 0100h
LogicManagerBits3
intern Mask: 0001h
intern Mask: 0002h
intern Mask: 0004h
intern Mask: 0008h
450065 450064 10148 intern Mask: 0010h
intern Mask: 0020h
intern Mask: 0040h
intern Mask: 0080h
01.08 Warning alarms are active (alarm class A, B) Mask: 0100h
01.07 All alarm classes are active Mask: 0200h


start addr.
addr. (*1)
01.10 Centralized alarms are active (alarm class B-F) Mask: 0400h
04.04 Lamp test Mask: 0800h
intern Mask: 1000h
intern Mask: 2000h
intern Mask: 4000h
intern Mask: 8000h
LogicManagerBits4
intern Mask: 0001h
intern Mask: 0002h
450066 450065 10150 00.32 LM Internal flag 11 Mask: 0080h
intern Mask: 0400h
intern Mask: 0800h
intern Mask: 1000h
intern Mask: 2000h
intern Mask: 4000h
intern Mask: 8000h
LogicManagerBits6
00.40 LM Synchronization mode RUN Mask: 0001h
00.39 LM Synchronization mode PERMISSIVE Mask: 0002h
00.38 LM Synchronization mode CHECK Mask: 0004h
intern Mask: 0008h
intern Mask: 0010h
intern Mask: 0020h
intern Mask: 0040h
450067 450066 10162 intern Mask: 0080h
intern Mask: 0100h
intern Mask: 0200h
intern Mask: 0400h
intern Mask: 0800h
intern Mask: 1000h
intern Mask: 2000h
intern Mask: 4000h
intern Mask: 8000h
ANIN_Mon
08.03 Battery under voltage threshold 1 Mask: 0001h
08.01 Battery over voltage threshold 1 Mask: 0002h
450068 450067 10136 08.02 Battery over voltage threshold 2 Mask: 0008h
intern Mask: 0010h
intern Mask: 0020h
intern Mask: 0040h
intern Mask: 0080h


start addr.
addr. (*1)
intern Mask: 0100h
intern Mask: 0200h
intern Mask: 0400h
intern Mask: 0800h
intern Mask: 1000h
intern Mask: 2000h
intern Mask: 4000h
intern Mask: 8000h
SysConFlags0_Debounced
intern Mask: 0001h
intern Mask: 0002h
intern Mask: 0004h
intern Mask: 0008h
intern Mask: 0010h
intern Mask: 0020h
02.11 System A voltage and frequency in range (ready for operation, 02.09
Mask: 0040h
AND 02.10 are TRUE)
intern Mask: 0080h
450069 450068 4139
intern Mask: 0100h
02.10 System A frequency in range (based on System B frequency win-
Mask: 0200h
dow)
intern Mask: 0400h
intern Mask: 0800h
02.09 Sytem A voltage in range (based on System B voltage window) Mask: 1000h
02.05 System B voltage and frequency in range (ready for operation, 02.03
Mask: 2000h
AND 02.04 are TRUE)
02.04 System B frequency in range (based on System A Operating fre-
Mask: 4000h
quency window)
02.03 System B voltage in range (based on System A Operating voltage
Mask: 8000h
window)
GenSyst
intern Mask: 0001h
intern Mask: 0002h
intern Mask: 0004h
intern Mask: 0008h
intern Mask: 0010h
intern Mask: 0020h
02.13 System A phase rotation: Clock Wise (CW, forward, right turn) Mask: 0040h
02.12 System A phase rotation: Counter Clock Wise (CCW, reverse, left
450070 450069 1791 Mask: 0080h
turn)
intern Mask: 0100h
intern Mask: 0200h
intern Mask: 0400h
intern Mask: 0800h
intern Mask: 1000h
intern Mask: 2000h
intern Mask: 4000h
intern Mask: 8000h
MainsSyst
intern Mask: 0001h
450071 450070 1792 intern Mask: 0002h
intern Mask: 0004h
intern Mask: 0008h


start addr.
addr. (*1)
intern Mask: 0010h
intern Mask: 0020h
02.15 System B phase rotation: Clock Wise (CW, forward, right turn) Mask: 0040h
02.14 System B phase rotation: Counter Clock Wise (CCW, reverse, left
Mask: 0080h
turn)
intern Mask: 0100h
intern Mask: 0200h
intern Mask: 0400h
intern Mask: 0800h
intern Mask: 1000h
intern Mask: 2000h
intern Mask: 4000h
intern Mask: 8000h
0 (reserve)
450072 450071
GAPControlBits1
04.01 Operating Mode Automatic Mask: 0001h
04.03 Operating Mode Manual Mask: 0002h
04.04 Lamp test request Mask: 0004h
04.07 CB A is closed Mask: 0008h
24.39 Isolation Switch is open (LS510) Mask: 0010h
04.11 Mains settling is active Mask: 0020h
04.18 Synchronisation CB A procedure is active Mask: 0040h
450073 450072 4153 04.19 Open command CB A is active Mask: 0080h
04.20 Close command CB A is active Mask: 0100h
04.21 Synchronisation CB B procedure is active Mask: 0200h
04.22 Open command CB B is active Mask: 0400h
04.23 Close command CB B is active Mask: 0800h
04.28 Unloading CB A is active Mask: 1000h
04.29 Unloading CB B is active Mask: 2000h
04.41 Breaker Transition Mode Alternative 1 Mask: 4000h
04.42 Breaker Transition Mode Alternative 2 Mask: 8000h
GAPControlBits2
450074 450073 4154 Mask: 0001h
Mask: 0002h


start addr.
addr. (*1)
Mask: 0004h
Mask: 0008h
Mask: 0010h
Mask: 0020h
Mask: 0040h
Mask: 0080h
Mask: 0100h
Mask: 0200h
Mask: 0400h
Mask: 0800h
Mask: 1000h
Mask: 2000h
Mask: 4000h
Mask: 8000h
GAPControlBits3
Mask: 0001h
Mask: 0002h
Mask: 0004h
Mask: 0008h
Mask: 0010h
Mask: 0020h
Mask: 0040h
450075 450074 4155 Mask: 0080h
Mask: 0100h
Mask: 0200h
Mask: 0400h
Mask: 0800h
Mask: 1000h
Mask: 2000h
Mask: 4000h
Mask: 8000h
LogicManagerBits10
24.31, enable mains decoupling Mask: 0001h
24.32, open CBA Mask: 0002h
24.33, immediate open cba Mask: 0004h
24.34, enable to close CBA Mask: 0008h
24.35, open cbb Mask: 0010h
24.36, immediate open cbb Mask: 0020h
24.37, load transfer to system A Mask: 0040h
450076 450075 10191 24.38, load transfer to system B Mask: 0080h
24.41, Flag 1 LS 5 Mask: 0100h
24.42, Flag 2 LS 5 Mask: 0200h
24.43, Flag 3 LS 5 Mask: 0400h
24.44, Flag 4 LS 5 Mask: 0800h
24.45, Flag 5 LS 5 Mask: 1000h
intern Mask: 2000h
intern Mask: 4000h
intern Mask: 8000h
450077 450076 10138 Gen1_Mon


start addr.
addr. (*1)
intern Mask: 0001h
intern Mask: 0002h
intern Mask: 0004h
intern Mask: 0008h
intern Mask: 0010h
intern Mask: 0020h
intern Mask: 0040h
intern Mask: 0080h
intern Mask: 0100h
intern Mask: 0200h
06.21 System B Phase Rotation mismatch Mask: 0400h
intern Mask: 0800h
intern Mask: 1000h
intern Mask: 2000h
intern Mask: 4000h
intern Mask: 8000h
Mains_Mon
intern Mask: 0001h
intern Mask: 0002h
07.05 System A phase rotation mismatch Mask: 0004h
07.26 System A voltage asymmetry (with negative sequence) Mask: 0008h
intern Mask: 0010h
intern Mask: 0020h
07.25 System A decoupling Mask: 0040h
450078 450077 10135 07.14 System A Phase shift Mask: 0080h
07.13 System A under voltage threshold 2 Mask: 0100h
07.11 System A over voltage threshold 2 Mask: 0400h
07.09 System A under frequency threshold 2 Mask: 1000h
07.07 System A over frequency threshold 2 Mask: 4000h
Mains1_Mon
intern Mask: 0001h
intern Mask: 0002h
intern Mask: 0004h
intern Mask: 0008h
intern Mask: 0010h
intern Mask: 0020h
intern Mask: 0040h
450079 450078 4138
07.15 System A df/dt Mask: 0080h
intern Mask: 0100h
intern Mask: 0200h
intern Mask: 0400h
intern Mask: 0800h
intern Mask: 1000h
intern Mask: 2000h
intern Mask: 4000h


start addr.
addr. (*1)
intern Mask: 8000h
Visualisation Remote and CB-Control with CAN-Input.
04.44 Remote Control Bit 1 Mask: 0001h
450080 450079 04.51 Remote Control Bit 8 Mask: 0080h
450081 450080 0 (reserve)
450082 450081 0 (reserve)
450083 450082 0 (reserve)
450084 450083 0 (reserve)
450085 450084 0 (reserve)
450086 450085 0 (reserve)
450087 450086 0 (reserve)
450088 450087 0 (reserve)
450089 450088 0 (reserve)
450090 450089 0 (reserve)
Relay Outputs 1
Relay-Output 1 (inverted) Mask: 8000h Bit
Relay-Output 2 Mask: 4000h Bit
internal Mask: 0200h Bit
450091 450090 10107 internal Mask: 0100h Bit
450092 450091 0 (reserve)
450093 450092 0 (reserve)
450094 450093 10131 Alarm Class Latched


start addr.
addr. (*1)
Alarm class F latched Mask: 0020h Bit
Alarm class E latched Mask: 0010h Bit
Alarm class D latched Mask: 0008h Bit
Alarm class C latched Mask: 0004h Bit
Alarm class B latched Mask: 0002h Bit
Alarm class A latched Mask: 0001h Bit
LogicManagerBits5
450095 450094 10160 internal Mask: 0100h Bit
01.11 New Alarm triggered Mask: 0002h Bit
10149 Alarm2
08.30 Timeout Synchronisation CB B Mask: 8000h Bit
08.31 Timeout Synchronisation CB A Mask: 4000h Bit
08.33 System A / System B phase rotation different Mask: 0800h Bit
08.20 CAN bus overload Mask: 0400h Bit
450096 450095 internal Mask: 0100h Bit
08.17 Number of member mismatch Mask: 0008h Bit
05.15 EEPROM corrupted Mask: 0004h Bit
10133 Alarm1
450097 450096


start addr.
addr. (*1)
08.05 CB B close not successful Mask: 0100h Bit
08.06 CB B open not successful Mask: 0080h Bit
08.07 CB A close not successful Mask: 0040h Bit
08.08 CB A open not successful Mask: 0020h Bit
08.18 CANopen error interface 1 Mask: 0001h Bit
450098 450097 0 (reserve)
450099 450098 0 (reserve)
450100 450099 0 (reserve)
450101 450100 0 (reserve)
450102 450101 0 (reserve)
450103 450102 0 (reserve)
450104 450103 0 (reserve)
450105 450104 0 (reserve)
450106 450105 0 (reserve)
450107 450106 0 (reserve)
450108 450107 0 (reserve)
System A (16 bits)
450109 450108 0 (reserve)
450110 450109 0 (reserve)
System B (16 bits)
450111 450110 0 (reserve)
450112 450111 0 (reserve)
Digital Inputs (16 bits)
10132 Alarms Digital Inputs 1 latched (unacknowledged)
10608 State Digital Input 8 Mask: 8000h Bit
450113 450112 10600 State Digital Input 1 Mask: 0100h Bit
450114 450113 0 (reserve)


start addr.
addr. (*1)
450115 450114 0 (reserve)
DC Analogue Values Wirebreak (16 bits)
10137 Alarms Analog Inputs Wire Break latched (unacknowledged)
450116 450115 internal Mask: 0080h Bit
450117 450116 0 (reserve)
450118 450117 0 (reserve)
EG3000 Controls (16 bits)
Status from Device 1
Generator Voltage and Frequency ok
Busbar Voltage and Frequency ok
Mains Voltage and Frequency ok
4th System Voltage and Frequency ok
Busbar1 Dead Busbar Detection
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[0].
450119 450118 intern
stData.stMedium1.
usControl 29.01 command to CB-control 1
29.02 command to CB-control 2
intern
intern
no ID.
staLoadshare[1]. Busbar1 Dead Busbar Detection
450120 450119
stData.stMedium1. Busbar2 Dead Busbar Detection
usControl
intern
intern


start addr.
addr. (*1)
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[2].
450121 450120 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[3].
450122 450121 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID. Busbar1 Dead Busbar Detection
staLoadshare[4].
450123 450122 Busbar2 Dead Busbar Detection
stData.stMedium1.
usControl intern
intern


start addr.
addr. (*1)
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[5].
450124 450123 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[6].
450125 450124 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID.
staLoadshare[7]. Busbar2 Dead Busbar Detection
450126 450125
stData.stMedium1. intern
usControl
intern


start addr.
addr. (*1)
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[8].
450127 450126 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[9].
450128 450127 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID. Busbar2 Dead Busbar Detection
staLoadshare[10].
450129 450128 intern
stData.stMedium1.
usControl intern


start addr.
addr. (*1)
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[11].
450130 450129 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[12].
450131 450130 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID.
staLoadshare[13]. intern
450132 450131
stData.stMedium1. intern
usControl
intern


start addr.
addr. (*1)
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[14].
450133 450132 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[15].
450134 450133 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[16].
450135 450134 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern


start addr.
addr. (*1)
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[17].
450136 450135 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[18].
450137 450136 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[19].
450138 450137 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
450139 450138 no ID. Status from Device 21


start addr.
addr. (*1)
staLoadshare[20]. Generator Voltage and Frequency ok
stData.stMedium1.
usControl
intern
intern
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[21].
450140 450139 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[22].
450141 450140 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID. Status from Device 24
450142 450141


start addr.
addr. (*1)
stData.stMedium1. Busbar Voltage and Frequency ok
usControl Mains Voltage and Frequency ok
intern
intern
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[24].
450143 450142 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[25].
450144 450143 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID. Status from Device 27
staLoadshare[26].
450145 450144
stData.stMedium1. Generator Voltage and Frequency ok
usControl Busbar Voltage and Frequency ok


start addr.
addr. (*1)
intern
intern
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[27].
450146 450145 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[28].
450147 450146 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID.
450148 450147
stData.stMedium1. Busbar Voltage and Frequency ok
usControl


start addr.
addr. (*1)
intern
intern
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[30].
450149 450148 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
no ID. intern
staLoadshare[31].
450150 450149 intern
stData.stMedium1.
intern
intern
450151 450150 0 (reserve)
450152 450151 0 (reserve)
450153 450152 0 (reserve)
450154 450153 0 (reserve)
450155 450154 0 (reserve)


start addr.
addr. (*1)
450156 450155 0 (reserve)
450157 450156 0 (reserve)
450158 450157 0 (reserve)
450159 450158 0 (reserve)
450160 450159 0 (reserve)
450161 450160 0 (reserve)
450162 450161 0 (reserve)
450163 450162 0 (reserve)
450164 450163 0 (reserve)
450165 450164 0 (reserve)
450166 450165 0 (reserve)
450167 450166 0 (reserve)
450168 450167 0 (reserve)
450169 450168 0 (reserve)
450170 450169 0 (reserve)
450171 450170 0 (reserve)
450172 450171 0 (reserve)
450173 450172 0 (reserve)
450174 450173 0 (reserve)
450175 450174 0 (reserve)
450176 450175 0 (reserve)
450177 450176 0 (reserve)
450178 450177 0 (reserve)
450179 450178 0 (reserve)
450180 450179 0 (reserve)
450181 450180 0 (reserve)
450182 450181 0 (reserve)
AC System A (32 bits)
450183 450182 135 Total system A power 1 W
450185 450184 136 Total system A reactive power 1 var
450187 450186 137 Total system A apparent power 1 VA
450189 450188 170 Av. system A Wye-Voltage 0.1 V
450191 450190 171 Av. system A Delta-Voltage 0.1 V
450193 450192 185 Av. system A Current 0.001 A
450195 450194 111 System A current 1 0.001 A
450201 450200 108 System A voltage L1-L2 0.1 V
450207 450206 114 System A voltage L1-N 0.1 V
450213 450212 125 System A active power 1-N 1 W
450219 450218 0 (reserve)
450221 450220 0 (reserve)
450223 450222 0 (reserve)


start addr.
addr. (*1)
450225 450224 0 (reserve)
450227 450226 0 (reserve)
AC System B (32 bits)
450229 450228 140 Total system B power 1 W
450231 450230 150 Total system B reactive power 1 var
450233 450232 173 Av. system B Wye-Voltage 0.1 V
450235 450234 174 Av. system B Delta-Voltage 0.1 V
450237 450236 207 Av. system B Current 0.001 A
450239 450238 134 0 (prepared system B current L1) 0.001 A
450241 450240 118 System B voltage L1-L2 0.1 V
450247 450246 121 System B voltage L1-N 0.1 V
450253 450252 0 (reserve)
450255 450254 0 (reserve)
AC System values (32 bits)
450257 450256 0 (reserve)
450259 450258 0 (reserve)
450261 450260 0 (reserve)
450263 450262 0 (reserve)
450265 450264 0 (reserve)
450267 450266 0 (reserve)
CAN Bus
Protocol 5301 (Basic Visualization)
Daten Daten Parameter ID Description Multiplier Units

Byte 0 Byte
(Mux)
0 0 Mux Identifier
1..2 Protocol-Identifier (always 5301)
3..6 136 System A total reactive power 1 Var
Mux 1
1 0 Mux Identifier
1,2 160 System A power factor (cos.phi) 0.001
3...6 170 System A average wye voltage 0.1 V
Mux 2
2 0 Mux Identifier
1,2 144 System A frequency 0.01 Hz
3...6 171 System A average delta voltage 0.1 V
Mux 3
3 0 Mux Identifier
1,2 10202 Operation modes
13280 = CB A request
13264 = Unloading CB A
13210 = CB A Dead bus closure
13260 = Synchronization CB A
13205 = Mains settling time running
13257 = Open CB A
13279 = Synchron. Network close CB A
13265 = Synchronization Permissive
13266 = Synchronization Check
13267 = Synchronization OFF
3...6 135 System A total active power 1 W
Byte 0 Byte
(Mux)
Mux 4
4 0 Mux Identifier
1,2 10107 Digital outputs 1 to 6
Relay-Output 1 (inverted) Mask: 8000h
Relay-Output 2 Mask: 4000h
internal Mask: 0200h
3...6 185 System A current average 0.001 A
Mux 5
5 0 Mux Identifier
1,2 8018 Digital information
3...6 111 System A current 1 0.001 A
Mux 6
6 0 Mux Identifier
10110 Battery voltage 0.1 V
112 System A current 2 0.001 A
Mux 7
7 0 Mux Identifier
11.07 Active second Mask: 0008h
11.06 Active minute Mask: 0010h
11.05 Active hour Mask: 0020h
11.04 Active day in month Mask: 0040h
11.03 Active weekday Mask: 0080h
04.05 Acknowledge was executed Mask: 0800h
01.09 Shutdown alarm active (alarm C-F) Mask: 1000h
3...6 113 System A current 3 0.001 A
Mux 8
8 0 Mux Identifier

Byte 0 Byte
(Mux)
3...6 108 System A voltage 1-2 0.1 V
Mux 9
9 0 Mux Identifier
00.15 LM External acknowledge Mask: 0010h
00.16 LM Operation mode AUTOMATIC Mask: 0004h
00.17 LM Operation mode MANUAL Mask: 0002h
3...6 114 System A voltage 1-N 0.1 V
Mux 10
10 0 Mux Identifier
04.04 Lamp test Mask: 0800h
01.10 Centralized alarms active (alarm B-F) Mask: 0400h
01.07 All alarm classes are active Mask: 0200h
01.08 Warning alarms active (alarm A, B) Mask: 0100h
Mux 11
11 0 Mux Identifier

Byte 0 Byte
(Mux)
Mux 12
12 0 Mux Identifier
01.11 New Alarm triggered Mask: 0002h
Mux 13
13 0 Mux Identifier
00.38 LM Synchronization mode CHECK Mask: 0004h
00.39 LM Synchronization mode PERMISSIVE Mask: 0002h
00.40 LM Synchronization mode RUN Mask: 0001h
Mux 14
14 0 Mux Identifier
Alarm class F latched Mask: 0020h
Alarm class E latched Mask: 0010h
Alarm class D latched Mask: 0008h
Alarm class C latched Mask: 0004h
Alarm class B latched Mask: 0002h
Alarm class A latched Mask: 0001h
3...6 - reserved for System A positive active energy - -

Byte 0 Byte
(Mux)
Mux 15
15 0 Mux Identifier
State Digital Input 8 latched Mask: 8000h
3...6 173 System B average wye voltage 0.1 V
Mux 16
16 0 Mux Identifier
1,2 147 System B frequency 0.01 Hz
3...6 174 System B average delta voltage 0.1 V
Mux 17
17 0 Mux Identifier
1,2 10111 AI 1 Input
3...6 - reserved for System B current average - -
Mux 18
18 0 Mux Identifier
1,2 - reserved for System B power factor (cos.phi) - -
3...6 - reserved for System B total reactive power - -
Mux 19
19 0 Mux Identifier
reserved for 10.01 AI 1 out of range Mask: 0002h
3...6 - reserved for System B total reactive power - -
Mux 20
20 0 Mux Identifier
04.59 [extended group] Interface control 16 Mask: 8000h

Byte 0 Byte
(Mux)
3...6 - reserved for System B current 1 - -
Mux 21
21 0 Mux Identifier
3...6 118 System B voltage 1-2 0.1 V
Mux 22
22 0 Mux Identifier
02.03 System B voltage in range (based on System B Op- Mask: 8000h
erating voltage window)
02.04 System B frequency in range (based on System B Mask: 4000h
Operating frequency window)
02.05 System B voltage and frequency in range (ready for Mask: 2000h
operation, 02.03 AND 02.04 are TRUE)
02.09 Sytem A voltage in range (based on System A vol- Mask: 1000h
tage window)
02.10 System A frequency in range (based on System A Mask: 0200h
frequency window)
02.11 System A voltage and frequency in range (ready for Mask: 0040h
operation, 02.09 AND 02.10 are TRUE)
3...6 121 System B voltage 1-N 0.1 V
Mux 23
23 0 Mux Identifier
02.12 System A phase rotation: Counter Clock Wise (CCW, Mask: 0080h
reverse, left turn)
02.13 System A phase rotation: Clock Wise (CW, forward, Mask: 0040h
right turn)

Byte 0 Byte
(Mux)
Mux 24
24 0 Mux Identifier
02.14 System B phase rotation: Counter Clock Wise (CCW, Mask: 0080h
reverse, left turn)
02.15 System B phase rotation: Clock Wise (CW, forward, Mask: 0040h
right turn)
Mux 25
25 0 Mux Identifier
1,2 internal
Mux 26
26 0 Mux Identifier
08.30 reserved for Timeout Synchronisation CB B (LS5X2) Mask: 8000h
08.31 Timeout Synchronisation CB A Mask: 4000h
08.33 System A / System B phase rotation different Mask: 0800h
08.20 reserved for CAN bus overload Mask: 0400h
08.17 Number of member mismatch Mask: 0008h
05.15 EEPROM corrupted Mask: 0004h
Mux 27
27 0 Mux Identifier
04.29 Unloading CB B is active (LS5X2) Mask: 2000h
04.28 Unloading CB A is active Mask: 1000h
04.23 reserved for Close command CB B is active (LS5X2) Mask: 0800h
04.22 reserved for Open command CB B is active (LS5X2) Mask: 0400h
04.21 Synchronisation CB B procedure is active (LS5X2) Mask: 0200h
04.20 Close command CB A is active Mask: 0100h
04.19 Open command CB A is active Mask: 0080h
04.18 Synchronisation CB A procedure is active Mask: 0040h
04.11 Mains settling is active Mask: 0020h
24.37 Isolation Switch is open (LS5X1) or 04.06 CB B is Mask: 0010h
closed (LS5X2)
04.07 CB A is closed Mask: 0008h
04.04 Lamp test request Mask: 0004h

Byte 0 Byte
(Mux)
04.03 Operating Mode Manual Mask: 0002h
04.01 Operating Mode Automatic Mask: 0001h
02.23 System A is dead Mask: 8000h
02.24 System B is dead Mask: 4000h
02.25 Mains parallel operation Mask: 2000h
System B Mains connected Mask: 1000h
System A Mains connected Mask: 0800h
Mains at "right" position (directly or isolation switch) for Mask: 0400h
Tookit grid indication
Mains at "left" position (directly or isolation switch) for Tookit Mask: 0200h
grid indication
28.06 Command 6 to LS5 (OR'ed) Mask: 0100h
04.61 Synchronous Mains Closure Procedure is active Mask: 0004h
04.62 Dead Bus Closure Procedure is active Mask: 0002h
Increment Close Counter CBA Mask: 0001h
Syst. B Phase rotation CCW (for ToolKit) Mask: 8000h
Syst. B Phase rotation CW (for ToolKit) Mask: 4000h
Syst. A Phase rotation CCW (for ToolKit) Mask: 2000h
Syst. A Phase rotation CW (for ToolKit) Mask: 1000h
Syst. A Phase rotation CW (for ToolKit) Mask: 0008h
Syst. A Phase rotation CCW (for ToolKit) Mask: 0004h
Syst. B Phase rotation CW (for ToolKit) Mask: 0002h
Syst. B Phase rotation CCW (for ToolKit) Mask: 0001h
Mux 28
28 0 Mux Identifier
08.05 CB B close not successful (LS5X2) Mask: 0100h
08.06 CB B open not successful (LS5X2) Mask: 0080h
08.07 CB A close not successful Mask: 0040h
08.08 CB A open not successful Mask: 0020h
08.18 CANopen error interface 1 Mask: 0001h
24.45, Flag 5 LS 5 Mask: 1000h
24.44, Flag 4 LS 5 Mask: 0800h
24.43, Flag 3 LS 5 Mask: 0400h
24.42, Flag 2 LS 5 Mask: 0200h
24.41, Flag 1 LS 5 Mask: 0100h
24.38, load transfer to system B Mask: 0080h
24.37, load transfer to system A Mask: 0040h

Byte 0 Byte
(Mux)
24.36, immediate open CB B (LS5X2) Mask: 0020h
24.35, open CB B (LS5X2) Mask: 0010h
24.34, enable to close CBA Mask: 0008h
24.33, immediate open CB A Mask: 0004h
24.32, open CBA Mask: 0002h
24.31, enable mains decoupling Mask: 0001h
06.21 System B Phase Rotation mismatch Mask: 0400h
Mux 29
29 0 Mux Identifier
07.14 System A Phase shift Mask: 0080h
07.25 System A decoupling Mask: 0040h
07.26 System A voltage asymmetry (with negative se- Mask: 0008h
quence)
07.05 System A phase rotation mismatch Mask: 0004h
07.15 System A df/dt Mask: 0080h
5,6 - Digital information

Byte 0 Byte
(Mux)
Protocol 6003 (LS-5 Communication)
General
The LS-5 communication message contains all data, which is required to operate the LS-5 system. This commu-
nication protocol works parallel to the load share communication.
In order to lower the bus load, the messages are divided into "fast", "normal", and "slow" refreshed data. The
mux is identified accordingly with "F", "N", and "S" (refer to the following tables). The load share message con-
tains one fast, two normal, and four slow messages, which are made up as shown in Table 7-5.
Timing
The time interval between two fast messages (TFast , i.e. the time for refreshing a fast message) is configured with
the parameter "Transfer rate LS fast message" (parameter 9921). The time intervals between refreshing a normal
or slow messages depend on this parameter as well according to the following sequence:
S0 F N0 F N1 F S1 F N0 F N1 F S2 F N0 F N1 F S3 F N0 F N1 F
TFast = time interval between refreshing the fast message

TNormal = time interval between refreshing a normal message = 3 x TFast
TSlow = time interval between refreshing a slow message = 12 x TFast
Example:
The parameter "Transfer rate LS fast message" (parameter 9921) is configured to "0.10 s".
The sequence of the sent messages for TFast = 100 ms (i.e. 0.10 s) is shown in Table 7-5. This means that a new
message is sent every 50 ms.
Time [ms] 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550
Sent message S0 F N0 F N1 F S1 F N0 F N1 F
Mux # 0 3 1 3 2 3 4 3 1 3 2 3
Time [ms] 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150
Sent message S2 F N0 F N1 F S3 F N0 F N1 F
Mux # 5 3 1 3 2 3 6 3 1 3 2 3
Table 7-5: Load share message - example
The maximum length of the CAN bus load share line depends on this parameter as well. The values in Table 7-6
are valid for 32 participants and a bus load of approx. 40 %. *1
TFast [ms] TNormal [ms] TSlow [ms] Baud rate Distance

100 300 1200 250 kBaud 250 m
200 600 2400 125 kBaud 500 m
300 900 3800 50 kBaud 1000 m
Table 7-6: Load share line - max. length (32 participants)

The maximum length of the CAN bus load share line depends on this parameter as well. The values in Table 7-7
are valid for 48 participants and a bus load of approx. 40 %. *1
TFast [ms] TNormal [ms] TSlow [ms] Baud rate Distance

100 300 1200 250 kBaud 250 m
200 600 2400 125 kBaud 500 m
Table 7-7: Load share line - max. length (48 participants)
*1 = This approach incorporates two transmit PDO (remote control bits) by a PLC on CAN interface 3 with a refresh time same as the confi-
gured TFast - setting in the easYgen / LS-5.
Correlation Of Protocols:
The easYgen handles parallel to the load share message protocol also the LS-5 communication protocol.
easYgen LS-5
Load Share Message (protocol 6000) Transmit / Receive Receive
LS-5 Communication (protocol 6003) Receive Transmit / Receive
Load share bus communication - "fast" refreshed data

Mux Byte Bit Function Remark
F 0 3 Mux identifier
1 Frequency of connected mains or frequency to which is to synchron- Frequency in 00.00 Hz
2 ize
3 Phase angle between system A and B Phase angle [1/10]
4 Phase angle compensation is incorporated
5 0 System A in range
1 System B in range
2 System A is black
3 System B is black
4 Breaker 1 closed
5 Isolation switch or breaker 2 closed
6 Synchronous networks detected Between system A an B
7 Not used
6 1 Wish to open the breaker
2 Wish to close the breaker
3 Wish is for breaker
0 = Breaker 1
1 = Breaker 2
4 Execution of wish
5 Variable system
0 = System A
1 = System B
6 Synchronizing mode
0 = Slip frequency
1 = Phase matching
7 Not used
7 Not used
Load share bus communication - "normal" refreshed data

N0 0 1 Mux identifier
1 Voltage setpoint Voltage of the fixed system in the percentage format
2 (000.00 %) of the 2 rated voltage setting
3 Active power system A Long [W]
4
5
6
7 Not used

Load share bus communication - "normal" refreshed data
N1 0 2 Mux identifier
1 Not used
2 0 Logic bit 1
1 Logic bit 2
2 Logic bit 3
3 Logic bit 4
4 Logic bit 5
5 Mains settling active
6-7 Not used
3 Reactive power system A Long [var]
4
5
6
7 Not used

Load share bus communication - "slow" refreshed data
S0 0 0 Mux identifier
1 Protocol-Identifier 6003
2
3 Not used
4
5
6
7 Not used
1 0-1 Mains wiring
0 = No mains wiring
1 = Mains wiring at system A
2 = Mains wiring at system B
3 = Mains wiring at isolation switch
2-3 0 = Off
1 = System A
2 = System B
3 = Not used
4-6 Visualization message definition
0 = No valid information
1 = Average delta voltage of mains (visualization
message 1) and average wye voltage of mains (visualization
message 2)
7 Mains power measurement valid This means the power of system A is
used for mains import/export control
2 0-4 Segment number isolation switch Max. 32 nodes possible
5 Extended bit for segment number isolation switch Max. 64 nodes possible
6-7 Not used
3 Not used
4
5
6
7
1 0-4 Segment number system A 1 to 32
5 Extended bit for segment number system A Max. 64 nodes possible
6-7 Not used
2 0-4 Segment number system B Max. 32 nodes possible
5 Extended bit for segment number system B Max. 64 nodes possible
6-7 Not used
3 Visualization message 1 Dependent on visualization message defined in mux
4 "S1"
5
6
7 Not used
1 Not used
2 Not used
3 Visualization message 2 Dependent of visualization message
4 defined in "Slow 1"
5
6
7 Not used

Appendix E.
Event History
The event history is a 300-entry FIFO (First In/First Out) memory for logging alarm events and operation states
of the unit. As new event messages are entered into the history, the oldest messages are deleted once 300 events
have occurred. Refer to Chapter 4: Operation for additional information about the event history.
Resetting the Event History
NOTE
Be sure to be in the appropriate code level to reset the event history. If you have not entered the cor-
rect password for the required code level, the parameters for resetting the event history are not avail-
able (refer to the System Management section on page 60 for more information).
The event history can be reset using the parameter "Clear event log" via the front panel.
Resetting the Event History Using the Front Panel

Make sure that you are in code level CL2 or higher (refer to the Enter Password section on page 59).
Set the parameter "Clear event log" to Yes (refer to the System Management section on page 60).
The complete event history is now being cleared.
Event List
Index Event text Description
14353 AUTO mode Auto mode became active
14355 MAN mode Manual mode became active
14700 Feedback CBA open Reply CBA open became active
14701 Feedback CBA close CBA close (reply CBA open became )
14724 System A is ok System A became ok (Voltage and frequency in range)
14727 System B is ok System B became ok (Voltage and frequency in range)
14730 Close command CBA CBA close command became active
14731 Open command CBA CBA open command became active
14778 Start up power Power up cycle happened
Table 7-8: Event history - event list
Alarm List
1714 EEPROM failure Internal error. EEPROM checksum corrupted
2623 CBA fail to close Alarm failed to close CBA
2624 CBA fail to open Alarm failed to open CBA
2862 SyA. overfreq.1 Alarm system A overfrequency threshold 1 (for system A decoupling)
2863 SyA. overfreq.2 Alarm system A overfrequency threshold 2 (for system A decoupling)
2912 SyA.underfreq.1 Alarm system A underfrequency threshold 1 (for system A decoupling)
2913 SyA.underfreq.2 Alarm system A underfrequency threshold 2 (for system A decoupling)
2944 Phase rot. mismatch Alarm phase rotation mismatch
2962 SyA. overvoltage 1 Alarm system A overvoltage threshold 1 (for system A decoupling)
2963 SyA. overvoltage 2 Alarm system A overvoltage threshold 2 (for system A decoupling)
3012 SyA.undervoltage 1 Alarm system A undervoltage threshold 1 (for system A decoupling)
3013 SyA.undervoltage 2 Alarm system A undervoltage threshold 2 (for system A decoupling)
3057 SyA. phase shift Alarm system A phase shift for system A decoupling
3074 CBA syn. timeout Alarm timeout synchronization CBA
3106 SyA. df/dt Alarm system A change of rate of frequency (df/dt (ROCOF))
3114 SyA. decoupling Alarm system A decoupling triggered. The system A decoupling function has recognized a
system A failure and tripped the breaker
3928 SyA. volt. asymmetry Alarm system A voltage deviation in different phases.
3955 SyB.phase rotation Alarm system B phase rotation miswired
3975 SyA.phase rotation Alarm system A phase rotation miswired
4064 Missing LS5 Number of load share participants does not match
8834 SyA. volt. incr. Alarm system A slow voltage increase.
8838 CBA unload mismatch Alarm system A power does not fall below the configured unload limit.

10005 Bat.undervoltage 1 Alarm battery undervoltage level 1
10006 Bat.undervoltage 2 Alarm battery undervoltage level 2
10007 Bat. overvoltage 1 Alarm battery overvoltage level 1
10008 Bat. overvoltage 2 Alarm battery overvoltage level 2
10087 CANopen Interface1 No data received on CAN bus 1
10600 Discrete input 1 Alarm DI1 (configurable)
10608 Discrete input 8 Alarm DI8

Appendix F.
Parameter List
Introduction

Parameter List Columns
The parameter list consists of the following columns, which provide important information for each parameter:
NamespaceX
The namespaces 1, 2, and 3 are used to combine all parameters within functional groups. All parameters, which
concern the critical mode operation for example, are grouped using Namespace1 (Config_Application), Names-
pace2 (Automatic_Run), and Namespace3 (Critical_Mode) into one functional group in ToolKit.
Parameter ID
The parameter ID is a unique identifier for each individual parameter. It is mentioned besides each parameter in
ToolKit and also required when configuring the unit via interface.
Parameter Text
The parameter text describes the parameter and appears on the configuration screens of the unit and ToolKit.
Setting Range
The setting range describes the range for possible parameter settings and may either be a range (e.g. 0 to 9), or a
selection of different options (e.g. Yes or No). If the respective parameter allows configuring different options,
the number behind each option is the number, which needs to be transmitted via interface to select this option.
Default Value
The default value is the parameter setting at delivery of the unit or after resetting the unit to factory settings. If the
parameter allows configuring different options, the default value describes the number of the respective option. If
the parameter is a LogicsManager function, the default value describes the seven words, which are transmitted
for a configuration of a LogicsManager parameter. If the parameter is an Analog Manager function, the default
value describes the ID of the selected Analog Manager data source .
Data Type
The data type indicates the data type of the respective parameter. The following data types are possible:
UNSIGNED8 unsigned 8 bit integer
SIGNED32 signed 32 bit integer
INTEGER16 16 bit integer
Analogman Analog Manager parameter
Logman LogicsManager parameter
Text/8 8 character text
Text/16 16 character text
Code Level (CL)

This is the minimum code level, which is required to access the respective parameter.
ID + 2000h
The CANopen address of the respective parameter is composed of the parameter ID + 2000 (hex).
Device
Shows the device type in which the parameter is present.
Parameter

Namespace1 Namespace2 Namespace3 ID Parameter Text Setting Range Default value Data type CL Par. ID
+
2000h
- - - 521 Lamp test No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 0 2209h
Yes ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 1 1201 Operation N.O. ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 24B1h
N.C. ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 1 1202 Alarm class Class A ; 0 6 UNSIGNED 16 2 24B2h
Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Control ; 6
Config_IO Discrete_In 1 1203 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 24B3h
Yes ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 1 1204 Self acknowledge No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 24B4h
Yes ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 2 1221 Operation N.O. ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 24C5h
N.C. ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 2 1222 Alarm class Class A ; 0 6 UNSIGNED 16 2 24C6h
Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Control ; 6
Config_IO Discrete_In 2 1223 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 24C7h
Yes ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 2 1224 Self acknowledge No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 24C8h
Yes ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 3 1241 Operation N.O. ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 24D9h
N.C. ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 3 1242 Alarm class Class A ; 0 6 UNSIGNED 16 2 24DAh
Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Control ; 6
Config_IO Discrete_In 3 1243 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 24DBh
Yes ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 3 1244 Self acknowledge No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 24DCh
Yes ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 4 1261 Operation N.O. ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 24EDh
N.C. ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 4 1262 Alarm class Class A ; 0 6 UNSIGNED 16 2 24EEh
Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Control ; 6
Config_IO Discrete_In 4 1263 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 24EFh
Yes ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 4 1264 Self acknowledge No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 24F0h
Yes ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 5 1281 Operation N.O. ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2501h
N.C. ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 5 1282 Alarm class Class A ; 0 6 UNSIGNED 16 2 2502h
Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Control ; 6
Config_IO Discrete_In 5 1283 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2503h
Yes ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 5 1284 Self acknowledge No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2504h
Yes ; 1
N.C. ; 1

+
2000h
Config_IO Discrete_In 6 1302 Alarm class Class A ; 0 6 UNSIGNED 16 2 2516h
Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Control ; 6
Config_IO Discrete_In 6 1303 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2517h
Yes ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 6 1304 Self acknowledge No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2518h
Yes ; 1
N.C. ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 7 1322 Alarm class Class A ; 0 6 UNSIGNED 16 2 252Ah
Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Control ; 6
Config_IO Discrete_In 7 1323 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 252Bh
Yes ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 7 1324 Self acknowledge No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 252Ch
Yes ; 1
Config_LogicsMan Timers - 1670 Monday active No ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2686h
ager Yes ; 1
Config_LogicsMan Timers - 1671 Tuesday active No ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2687h
ager Yes ; 1
Config_LogicsMan Timers - 1672 Wednesday active No ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2688h
ager Yes ; 1
Config_LogicsMan Timers - 1673 Thursday active No ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2689h
ager Yes ; 1
Config_LogicsMan Timers - 1674 Friday active No ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 268Ah
ager Yes ; 1
Config_LogicsMan Timers - 1675 Saturday active No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 268Bh
ager Yes ; 1
Config_LogicsMan Timers - 1676 Sunday active No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 268Ch
ager Yes ; 1
Config_Admin Clock - 1698 Transfer time to No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 0 26A2h
clock Yes ; 1
Config_Admin Clock - 1699 Transfer date to No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 0 26A3h
clock Yes ; 1
Config_Admin - - 1700 Language Deutsch ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 0 26A4h
English ; 1
; 2
Portugus ; 3
; 4
Russky ; 5
Trke ; 6
Espaol ; 7
Franais ; 8
Italiano ; 9
Polski ; 10
Config_Admin - - 1701 Set factory default No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 0 26A5h
values Yes ; 1
Config_Measurem - - 1750 System rated 50Hz ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 26D6h
ent frequency 60Hz ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_B - 1770 SyB. voltage Ph - Ph ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 26EAh
monitoring Phase - N ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A - 1771 SyA. voltage Ph - Ph ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 26EBh
monitoring Phase - N ; 1
Config_Measurem - - 1850 SyA. current L1 L2 L3 ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 273Ah
ent measuring Phase L1 ; 1
Phase L2 ; 2
Phase L3 ; 3
Config_Measurem - - 1851 SyA. voltage 3Ph 4W ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 273Bh
ent measuring 3Ph 3W ; 1
1Ph 2W ; 2
1Ph 3W ; 3
3Ph 4W OD ; 4
Config_Measurem - - 1853 SyB. voltage 3Ph 4W ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 273Dh
ent measuring 3Ph 3W ; 1
1Ph 2W ; 2
1Ph 3W ; 3
Config_Measurem - - 1858 1Ph2W voltage Phase - N ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2742h
ent measuring Ph - Ph ; 1
Config_Measurem - - 1859 1Ph2W phase rota- CW ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2743h
ent tion CCW ; 1
Config_Admin Counters - 2510 SyA. active power No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 29CEh
0.00MWh Yes ; 1
Config_Admin Counters - 2542 CBA Set number of No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 29EEh
closures Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring Breaker CBA 2620 CBA monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2A3Ch
On ; 1
Config_Monitoring Breaker CBA 2621 CBA alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2A3Dh
Class B ; 1
Config_Monitoring Breaker CBA 2622 CBA monitoring No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2A3Eh
lockable Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Overfrequency 2850 Monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B22h
level 1 On ; 1

+
2000h
Config_Monitoring System_A Overfrequency 2851 Alarm class Class A ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B23h
level 1 Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Config_Monitoring System_A Overfrequency 2852 Self acknowledge No ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B24h
level 1 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Overfrequency 2853 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 4 2B25h
level 1 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Overfrequency 2856 Monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B28h
level 2 On ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Overfrequency 2857 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B29h
level 2 Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Config_Monitoring System_A Overfrequency 2858 Self acknowledge No ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B2Ah
level 2 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Overfrequency 2859 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 4 2B2Bh
level 2 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Underfrequency 2900 Monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B54h
level 1 On ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Underfrequency 2901 Alarm class Class A ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B55h
level 1 Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Config_Monitoring System_A Underfrequency 2902 Self acknowledge No ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B56h
level 1 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Underfrequency 2903 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 4 2B57h
level 1 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Underfrequency 2906 Monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B5Ah
level 2 On ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Underfrequency 2907 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B5Bh
level 2 Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Config_Monitoring System_A Underfrequency 2908 Self acknowledge No ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B5Ch
level 2 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Underfrequency 2909 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 4 2B5Dh
level 2 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring Breaker SyA. / SyB. pha- 2940 Monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B7Ch
se rotation On ; 1
Config_Monitoring Breaker SyA. / SyB. pha- 2941 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B7Dh
se rotation Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Config_Monitoring Breaker SyA. / SyB. pha- 2942 Self acknowledge No ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B7Eh
se rotation Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring Breaker SyA. / SyB. pha- 2945 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B81h
se rotation Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Overvoltage le- 2950 Monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B86h
vel 1 On ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Overvoltage le- 2951 Alarm class Class A ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B87h
vel 1 Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Config_Monitoring System_A Overvoltage le- 2952 Self acknowledge No ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B88h
vel 1 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Overvoltage le- 2953 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 4 2B89h
vel 1 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Overvoltage le- 2956 Monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B8Ch
vel 2 On ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Overvoltage le- 2957 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B8Dh
vel 2 Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Config_Monitoring System_A Overvoltage le- 2958 Self acknowledge No ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2B8Eh
vel 2 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Overvoltage le- 2959 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 4 2B8Fh
vel 2 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Undervoltage 3000 Monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2BB8h
level 1 On ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Undervoltage 3001 Alarm class Class A ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2BB9h
level 1 Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Config_Monitoring System_A Undervoltage 3002 Self acknowledge No ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2BBAh
level 1 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Undervoltage 3003 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 4 2BBBh
level 1 Yes ; 1

+
2000h
Config_Monitoring System_A Undervoltage 3006 Monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2BBEh
level 2 On ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Undervoltage 3007 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2BBFh
level 2 Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Config_Monitoring System_A Undervoltage 3008 Self acknowledge No ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2BC0h
level 2 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Undervoltage 3009 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 4 2BC1h
level 2 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Phase shift 3050 Monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2BEAh
On ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Phase shift 3051 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2BEBh
Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Config_Monitoring System_A Phase shift 3052 Self acknowledge No ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2BECh
Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Phase shift 3053 Monitoring 3-phase ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2BEDh
1/3-phase ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Phase shift 3056 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 4 2BF0h
Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring Mains SyA. decoupling 3058 Change of Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2BF2h
frequency Ph. shift ; 1
df/dt ; 2
Config_Monitoring Breaker Synchro_CBA 3070 Monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2BFEh
On ; 1
Config_Monitoring Breaker Synchro_CBA 3071 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2BFFh
Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Config_Monitoring Breaker Synchro_CBA 3072 Self acknowledge No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C00h
Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring Breaker Synchro_CBA 3075 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C03h
Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A df/dt 3100 Monitoring Off ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C1Ch
On ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A df/dt 3101 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C1Dh
Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Config_Monitoring System_A df/dt 3102 Self acknowledge No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C1Eh
Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A df/dt 3103 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 4 2C1Fh
Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. decoupling 3111 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C27h
Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. decoupling 3112 Self acknowledge No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C28h
Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring CAN 1 - 3150 Monitoring Off ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C4Eh
On ; 1
Config_Monitoring CAN 1 - 3151 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C4Fh
Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Control ; 6
Config_Monitoring CAN 1 - 3152 Self acknowledge No ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C50h
Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring CAN 1 - 3153 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C51h
Yes ; 1
Config_CAN1 - - 3156 Baudrate 20 kBd ; 0 4 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C54h
50 kBd ; 1
100 kBd ; 2
125 kBd ; 3
250 kBd ; 4
500 kBd ; 5
800 kBd ; 6
1000 kBd ; 7
Config_Serial1 - - 3161 Parity No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C59h
Even ; 1
Odd ; 2
Config_Serial1 - - 3162 Stop bits One ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C5Ah
Two ; 1
Config_Serial1 - - 3163 Baudrate 2400 Bd ; 0 4 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C5Bh
4800 Bd ; 1
9600 Bd ; 2
14.4 kBd ; 3
19.2 kBd ; 4
38.4 kBd ; 5
56 kBd ; 6
115 kBd ; 7

+
2000h
Config_Serial2 - - 3170 Baudrate 2400 Bd ; 0 4 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C62h
4800 Bd ; 1
9600 Bd ; 2
14.4 kBd ; 3
19.2 kBd ; 4
38.4 kBd ; 5
56 kBd ; 6
115 kBd ; 7
Config_Serial2 - - 3171 Parity No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C63h
Even ; 1
Odd ; 2
Config_Serial2 - - 3172 Stop bits One ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C64h
Two ; 1
Config_Application Breaker CBA 3407 CBA auto unlock No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2D4Fh
Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Overvoltage le- 3450 Monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2D7Ah
vel 1 On ; 1
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Overvoltage le- 3451 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2D7Bh
vel 1 Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Control ; 6
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Overvoltage le- 3452 Self acknowledge No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2D7Ch
vel 1 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Overvoltage le- 3453 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2D7Dh
vel 1 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Overvoltage le- 3456 Monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2D80h
vel 2 On ; 1
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Overvoltage le- 3457 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2D81h
vel 2 Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Control ; 6
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Overvoltage le- 3458 Self acknowledge No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 4 2D82h
vel 2 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Overvoltage le- 3459 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 4 2D83h
vel 2 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Undervoltage 3500 Monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2DAC
level 1 On ; 1 h
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Undervoltage 3501 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2DAD
level 1 Class B ; 1 h
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Control ; 6
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Undervoltage 3502 Self acknowledge No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2DAEh
level 1 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Undervoltage 3503 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2DAFh
level 1 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Undervoltage 3506 Monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2DB2h
level 2 On ; 1
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Undervoltage 3507 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2DB3h
level 2 Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Control ; 6
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Undervoltage 3508 Self acknowledge No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 4 2DB4h
level 2 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Undervoltage 3509 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 4 2DB5h
level 2 Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. voltage 3921 Monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2F51h
asymmetry On ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. voltage 3922 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2F52h
asymmetry Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Control ; 6
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. voltage 3923 Self acknowledge No ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 4 2F53h
asymmetry Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. voltage 3926 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2F56h
asymmetry Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_B SyB. phase rota- 3950 Monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2F6Eh
tion On ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_B SyB. phase rota- 3951 Alarm class Class A ; 0 5 UNSIGNED 16 2 2F6Fh
tion Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Config_Monitoring System_B SyB. phase rota- 3952 Self acknowledge No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 4 2F70h
tion Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_B SyB. phase rota- 3953 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2F71h
tion Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_B SyB. phase rota- 3954 SyB. phase rotati- CW ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2F72h
tion on CCW ; 1

+
2000h
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. phase rota- 3970 Monitoring Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2F82h
tion On ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. phase rota- 3971 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2F83h
tion Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. phase rota- 3972 Self acknowledge No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2F84h
tion Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. phase rota- 3973 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2F85h
tion Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. phase rota- 3974 SyA. phase rotati- CW ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2F86h
tion on CCW ; 1
Config_Monitoring Load_Share - 4060 Monitoring Off ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2FDCh
On ; 1
Config_Monitoring Load_Share - 4061 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 2FDDh
Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Control ; 6
Config_Monitoring Load_Share - 4062 Self acknowledge No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 2FDEh
Yes ; 1
Config_Admin Backlight - 4556 Configure display On ; 0 2 UNSIGNED 16 2 31CCh
backlight Off ; 1
Key actv. ; 2
Config_Admin Clock - 4591 Daylight saving ti- Off ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 31EFh
me On ; 1
Config_Admin Clock - 4592 DST begin nth. 1st ; 0 4 UNSIGNED 16 2 31F0h
weekday 2nd ; 1
3rd ; 2
4th ; 3
Last ; 4
LastBut1 ; 5
LastBut2 ; 6
LastBut3 ; 7
Config_Admin Clock - 4595 DST end nth. 1st ; 0 4 UNSIGNED 16 2 31F3h
weekday 2nd ; 1
3rd ; 2
4th ; 3
Last ; 4
LastBut1 ; 5
LastBut2 ; 6
LastBut3 ; 7
Config_Admin Clock - 4598 DST begin Sunday ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 31F6h
weekday Monday ; 1
Tuesday ; 2
Wednesday ; 3
Thursday ; 4
Friday ; 5
Saturday ; 6
Config_Admin Clock - 4599 DST end weekday Sunday ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 31F7h
Monday ; 1
Tuesday ; 2
Wednesday ; 3
Thursday ; 4
Friday ; 5
Saturday ; 6
Config_Application Breaker Synchronization 5728 Synchronization Off ; 0 3 UNSIGNED 16 2 3660h
mode PERMISS. ; 1
CHECK ; 2
RUN ; 3
Ctrl byLM ; 4
Config_Application Breaker CBA 5730 Synchronization Slip freq ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 3662h
CBA Ph.match. ; 1
Config_Interfaces - - 8051 Toolkit Interface Serial 1 ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 3F73h
Serial 2 ; 1
Config_Application Breaker CBA 8800 CBA control 1 Relay ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 4260h
2 Relays ; 1
Config_Application Breaker CBA 8801 Dead bus closure Off ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 4261h
CBA On ; 1
Config_Application Breaker CBA 8802 Connect A dead to Off ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 4262h
B dead On ; 1
Config_Application Breaker CBA 8803 Connect A dead to Off ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 4263h
B alive On ; 1
Config_Application Breaker CBA 8804 Connect A alive to Off ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 4264h
B dead On ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. voltage 8806 Monitoring Off ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 4266h
increase On ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. voltage 8808 SyA decoupling No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 4268h
increase volt.incr. Yes ; 1
Config_Application Segment - 8813 Mains pow. Valid ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 426Dh
config. measurem. Invalid ; 1
Config_Application Segment - 8814 Mains connection None ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 426Eh
config. System A ; 1
System B ; 2
Isol.swi. ; 3
Config_Application Segment - 8815 Isol. switch None ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 426Fh
config. System A ; 1
System B ; 2
Config_Application Segment - 8816 Variable system System A ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 4270h
config. System B ; 1

+
2000h
Config_Application Breaker CBA 8820 Connect No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 4274h
synchronous mains Yes ; 1
Config_Application Breaker CBA 8825 Phase angle Off ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 4279h
compensation On ; 1
Config_Application Automatic_Run - 8827 Startup in mode AUTO ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 427Bh
MAN ; 1
Last ; 2
Config_Application Breaker CBA 8828 Open CBA in ma- With unl. ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 427Ch
nual Immediate ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. voltage 8831 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 427Fh
increase Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Control ; 6
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. voltage 8832 Self acknowledge No ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 4 4280h
increase Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. voltage 8833 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 4281h
increase Yes ; 1
Config_Monitoring Breaker CBA 8836 Alarm class Class A ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 4284h
Class B ; 1
Class C ; 2
Class D ; 3
Class E ; 4
Class F ; 5
Control ; 6
Config_Monitoring Breaker CBA 8837 Self acknowledge No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 4285h
Yes ; 1
Config_Application - - 8840 Application mode LS5 ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 4288h
LS5 L-MCB ; 1
L-GGB ; 2
Single LS5 ; 3
Config_Monitoring System_A - 8844 SyA. decoupling Off ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 428Ch
On ; 1
Config_Monitoring System_A - 8845 SyA. decoupling Off ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 428Dh
On ; 1
Config_Monitoring Breaker CBA 8846 Monitoring lockable No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 428Eh
Yes ; 1
Config_CAN1 - - 8993 CANopen Master Off ; 0 2 UNSIGNED 16 2 4321h
On ; 1
Def.Mstr ; 2
Config_Interfaces - - 9920 Comm. LS5 <- 2xx Hex ; 0 3 UNSIGNED 16 2 46C0h
> gen. CAN-ID 3xx Hex ; 1
4xx Hex ; 2
5xx Hex ; 3
Config_Interfaces - - 9923 Comm. LS5 <- Off ; 0 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 46C3h
> gen. device CAN #1 ; 1
Config_Admin - - 10417 Factory default set- No ; 0 0 UNSIGNED 16 0 48B1h
tings Yes ; 1
Config_IO Discrete_In 1 1200 Delay 000.08 to 650.00 s 000.20 s UNSIGNED 16 2 24B0h
Config_IO Discrete_In 2 1220 Delay 000.08 to 650.00 s 000.50 s UNSIGNED 16 2 24C4h
Config_IO Discrete_In 3 1240 Delay 000.08 to 650.00 s 000.50 s UNSIGNED 16 2 24D8h
Config_IO Discrete_In 4 1260 Delay 000.08 to 650.00 s 000.20 s UNSIGNED 16 2 24ECh
Config_IO Discrete_In 5 1280 Delay 000.08 to 650.00 s 000.50 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2500h
Config_LogicsMan Timers - 1650 Timer 1: Second 00 to 59 s 00 s UNSIGNED 8 2 2672h
ager
Config_LogicsMan Timers - 1651 Timer 1: Minute 00 to 59 min 00 min UNSIGNED 8 2 2673h
ager
Config_LogicsMan Timers - 1652 Timer 1: Hour 00 to 23 h 08 h UNSIGNED 8 2 2674h
ager
Config_LogicsMan Timers - 1655 Timer 2: Second 00 to 59 s 00 s UNSIGNED 8 2 2677h
ager
Config_LogicsMan Timers - 1656 Timer 2: Minute 00 to 59 min 00 min UNSIGNED 8 2 2678h
ager
Config_LogicsMan Timers - 1657 Timer 2: Hour 00 to 23 h 17 h UNSIGNED 8 2 2679h
ager
Config_LogicsMan Timers - 1660 Active second 00 to 59 s 00 s UNSIGNED 8 2 267Ch
ager
Config_LogicsMan Timers - 1661 Active minute 00 to 59 min 00 min UNSIGNED 8 2 267Dh
ager
Config_LogicsMan Timers - 1662 Active hour 00 to 23 h 12 h UNSIGNED 8 2 267Eh
ager
Config_LogicsMan Timers - 1663 Active day 01 to 31 1 UNSIGNED 8 2 267Fh
ager
Config_Admin - - 1702 Device number 033 to 064 33 UNSIGNED 16 2 26A6h
Config_Admin Clock - 1708 Second 00 to 59 s 00 s UNSIGNED 8 0 26ACh
Config_Admin Clock - 1709 Minute 00 to 59 min 00 min UNSIGNED 8 0 26ADh
Config_Admin Clock - 1710 Hour 00 to 23 h 00 h UNSIGNED 8 0 26AEh
Config_Admin Clock - 1711 Day 01 to 31 0 UNSIGNED 8 0 26AFh
Config_Admin Clock - 1712 Month 01 to 12 0 UNSIGNED 8 0 26B0h
Config_Admin Clock - 1713 Year 00 to 99 0 UNSIGNED 8 0 26B1h
Config_Measurem - - 1752 SyA. rated active 00000.5 to 00200.0 UNSIGNED 32 2 26D8h
ent power [kW] 99999.9
Config_Measurem - - 1754 SyA. rated current 00001 to 32000 A 00300 A UNSIGNED 16 2 26DAh
ent
Config_Monitoring - - 1756 Time until horn 0000 to 1000 s 0180 s UNSIGNED 16 0 26DCh
reset
Config_Measurem - - 1758 SyA. rated react. 00000.5 to 00200.0 UNSIGNED 32 2 26DEh
ent pwr.[kvar] 99999.9
Display_Misc Clock - 1760 Second 00 to 59 s 00 s UNSIGNED 8 0 26E0h

+
2000h
Display_Misc Clock - 1761 Minute 00 to 59 min 00 min UNSIGNED 8 0 26E1h
Display_Misc Clock - 1762 Hour 00 to 23 h 00 h UNSIGNED 8 0 26E2h
Display_Misc Clock - 1763 Day 01 to 31 0 UNSIGNED 8 0 26E3h
Display_Misc Clock - 1764 Month 01 to 12 0 UNSIGNED 8 0 26E4h
Display_Misc Clock - 1765 Year 00 to 99 0 UNSIGNED 8 0 26E5h
Config_Measurem - - 1766 SyA. rated voltage 000050 to 650000 000400 V UNSIGNED 32 2 26E6h
ent V
Config_Measurem - - 1768 SyB. rated voltage 000050 to 650000 000400 V UNSIGNED 32 2 26E8h
ent V
Config_Measurem Transformer - 1800 SyA. PT sec. rated 050 to 480 V 400 V UNSIGNED 16 2 2708h
ent voltage
Config_Measurem Transformer - 1801 SyA. PT prim. 000050 to 650000 000400 V UNSIGNED 32 2 2709h
ent rated voltage V
Config_Measurem Transformer - 1803 SyB. PT sec. rated 050 to 480 V 400 V UNSIGNED 16 2 270Bh
ent voltage
Config_Measurem Transformer - 1804 SyB. PT prim. 000050 to 650000 000400 V UNSIGNED 32 2 270Ch
ent rated voltage V
Config_Measurem Transformer - 1806 SyA. CT prim. 00001 to 32000 00500 A/x UNSIGNED 16 2 270Eh
ent rated current A/x
Config_Admin Counters - 2515 Counter value 00000000 towrong 0 UNSIGNED 32 2 29D3h
preset format
Config_Admin Counters - 2541 Counter value 00000 to 65535 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 29EDh
preset
Config_Monitoring System_B - 2801 Mains settling time 0000 to 9999 s 0020 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2AF1h
Config_Monitoring System_A Overfrequency 2854 Limit 100.0 to 140.0 % 100.4 % UNSIGNED 16 2 2B26h
level 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Overfrequency 2855 Delay 00.02 to 99.99 s 00.06 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2B27h
level 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Overfrequency 2860 Limit 100.0 to 140.0 % 102.0 % UNSIGNED 16 2 2B2Ch
level 2
Config_Monitoring System_A Overfrequency 2861 Delay 00.02 to 99.99 s 00.06 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2B2Dh
level 2
Config_Monitoring System_A Underfrequency 2904 Limit 066.6 to 140.0 % 099.6 % UNSIGNED 16 2 2B58h
level 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Underfrequency 2905 Delay 00.02 to 99.99 s 01.50 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2B59h
level 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Underfrequency 2910 Limit 066.6 to 140.0 % 098.0 % UNSIGNED 16 2 2B5Eh
level 2
Config_Monitoring System_A Underfrequency 2911 Delay 00.02 to 99.99 s 00.06 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2B5Fh
level 2
Config_Monitoring System_A Overvoltage le- 2954 Limit 050.0 to 130.0 % 108.0 % UNSIGNED 16 2 2B8Ah
vel 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Overvoltage le- 2955 Delay 00.02 to 99.99 s 01.50 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2B8Bh
vel 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Overvoltage le- 2960 Limit 050.0 to 130.0 % 110.0 % UNSIGNED 16 2 2B90h
vel 2
Config_Monitoring System_A Overvoltage le- 2961 Delay 00.02 to 99.99 s 00.06 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2B91h
vel 2
Config_Monitoring System_A Undervoltage 3004 Limit 050.0 to 130.0 % 092.0 % UNSIGNED 16 2 2BBCh
level 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Undervoltage 3005 Delay 00.02 to 99.99 s 01.50 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2BBDh
level 1
Config_Monitoring System_A Undervoltage 3010 Limit 050.0 to 130.0 % 090.0 % UNSIGNED 16 2 2BC2h
level 2
Config_Monitoring System_A Undervoltage 3011 Delay 00.02 to 99.99 s 00.06 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2BC3h
level 2
Config_Monitoring System_A Phase shift 3054 Limit 1-phase 03 to 30 20 UNSIGNED 16 2 2BEEh
Config_Monitoring System_A Phase shift 3055 Limit 3-phase 03 to 30 08 UNSIGNED 16 2 2BEFh
Config_Monitoring Breaker Synchro_CBA 3073 Delay 003 to 999 s 060 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2C01h
Config_Monitoring System_A df/dt 3104 Limit 0.1 to 9.9 Hz/s 2.6 Hz/s UNSIGNED 16 2 2C20h
Config_Monitoring System_A df/dt 3105 Delay 0.10 to 2.00 s 0.10 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2C21h
Config_Monitoring CAN 1 - 3154 Delay 000.01 to 650.00 s 000.20 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2C52h
Modbus - - 3181 Power [W] expo- 02 to 05 3 INTEGER 16 2 2C6Dh
nent 10^x
Modbus - - 3182 Voltage [V] expo- -01 to 02 0 INTEGER 16 2 2C6Eh
nent 10^x
Modbus - - 3183 Current [A] expo- -01 to 00 0 INTEGER 16 2 2C6Fh
nent 10^x
Config_Serial1 Modbus - 3185 Modbus slave ID 000 to 255 33 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C71h
Config_Serial1 Modbus - 3186 Reply delay time 0.00 to 1.00 s 0.00 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2C72h
Config_Serial2 Modbus - 3188 Modbus slave ID 000 to 255 33 UNSIGNED 16 2 2C74h
Config_Serial2 Modbus - 3189 Reply delay time 0.00 to 2.55 s 0.00 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2C75h
Config_Application Breaker CBA 3417 CBA time pulse 0.10 to 0.50 s 0.50 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2D59h
Config_Monitoring Breaker CBA 3419 CBA maximum at- 01 to 10 5 UNSIGNED 16 2 2D5Bh
tempts of closure
Config_Monitoring Breaker CBA 3421 CBA open 0.10 to 5.00 s 2.00 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2D5Dh
monitoring
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Overvoltage le- 3454 Limit 08.0 to 42.0 V 32.0 V UNSIGNED 16 2 2D7Eh
vel 1
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Overvoltage le- 3455 Delay 00.02 to 99.99 s 05.00 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2D7Fh
vel 1
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Overvoltage le- 3460 Limit 08.0 to 42.0 V 35.0 V UNSIGNED 16 2 2D84h
vel 2
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Overvoltage le- 3461 Delay 00.02 to 99.99 s 01.00 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2D85h
vel 2
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Undervoltage 3504 Limit 08.0 to 42.0 V 24.0 V UNSIGNED 16 2 2DB0h
level 1
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Undervoltage 3505 Delay 00.02 to 99.99 s 60.00 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2DB1h
level 1
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Undervoltage 3510 Limit 08.0 to 42.0 V 20.0 V UNSIGNED 16 2 2DB6h
level 2

+
2000h
Config_Monitoring Battery voltage Undervoltage 3511 Delay 00.02 to 99.99 s 10.00 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2DB7h
level 2
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. voltage 3924 Limit 00.5 to 99.9 % 10.0 % UNSIGNED 16 2 2F54h
asymmetry
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. voltage 3925 Delay 00.02 to 99.99 s 05.00 s UNSIGNED 16 2 2F55h
asymmetry
Config_Monitoring Load_Share - 4063 Number of LS5 02 to 64 2 UNSIGNED 16 2 2FDFh
communicating
Config_Admin Backlight - 4557 Time until backlight 001 to 999 min 120 min UNSIGNED 16 2 31CDh
shutdown
Config_Admin Clock - 4593 DST begin month 01 to 12 3 UNSIGNED 8 2 31F1h
Config_Admin Clock - 4594 DST begin time 00 to 23 h 02 h UNSIGNED 8 2 31F2h
Config_Admin Clock - 4596 DST end month 01 to 12 10 UNSIGNED 8 2 31F4h
Config_Admin Clock - 4597 DST end time 00 to 23 h 03 h UNSIGNED 8 2 31F5h
Config_Application Breaker CBA 5710 Voltage differential 00.50 to 20.00 % 05.00 % UNSIGNED 16 2 364Eh
CBA
Config_Application Breaker CBA 5711 Pos. freq. differen- 00.02 to 00.49 Hz 00.18 Hz INTEGER 16 2 364Fh
tial CBA
Config_Application Breaker CBA 5712 Neg. freq. differen- -00.49 to 00.00 Hz -00.18 Hz INTEGER 16 2 3650h
tial CBA
Config_Application Breaker CBA 5713 Max. positive 000.0 to 060.0 007.0 INTEGER 16 2 3651h
phase angle CBA
Config_Application Breaker CBA 5714 Max. negative -060.0 to 000.0 -007.0 INTEGER 16 2 3652h
phase angle CBA
Config_Application Breaker CBA 5715 Closing time CBA 040 to 300 ms 080 ms UNSIGNED 16 2 3653h
Config_Application Breaker CBA 5717 Phase matching 00.0 to 60.0 s 03.0 s UNSIGNED 16 2 3655h
CBA dwell time
Config_Application Breaker CBA 5718 CBA open time 0.10 to 9.90 s 1.00 s UNSIGNED 16 2 3656h
pulse
Config_Monitoring System_B Operating 5800 Upper voltage limit 100 to 150 % 110% UNSIGNED 16 2 36A8h
voltage /
frequency
Config_Monitoring System_B Operating 5801 Lower voltage limit 050 to 100 % 90% UNSIGNED 16 2 36A9h
voltage /
frequency
Config_Monitoring System_B Operating 5802 Upper frequency 100.0 to 150.0 % 105.0 % UNSIGNED 16 2 36AAh
voltage / limit
frequency
Config_Monitoring System_B Operating 5803 Lower frequency 066.6 to 100.0 % 095.0 % UNSIGNED 16 2 36ABh
voltage / limit
frequency
Config_Monitoring System_A Operating 5810 Upper voltage limit 100 to 150 % 110% UNSIGNED 16 2 36B2h
voltage /
frequency
Config_Monitoring System_A Operating 5811 Lower voltage limit 050 to 100 % 90% UNSIGNED 16 2 36B3h
voltage /
frequency
Config_Monitoring System_A Operating 5812 Upper frequency 100.0 to 150.0 % 110.0 % UNSIGNED 16 2 36B4h
voltage / limit
frequency
Config_Monitoring System_A Operating 5813 Lower frequency 066.6 to 100.0 % 090.0 % UNSIGNED 16 2 36B5h
voltage / limit
frequency
Config_Monitoring System_A Operating 5814 Hysteresis upper 000 to 050 % 2% UNSIGNED 16 2 36B6h
voltage / volt.limit
frequency
Config_Monitoring System_A Operating 5815 Hysteresis lower 000 to 050 % 2% UNSIGNED 16 2 36B7h
voltage / volt.limit
frequency
Config_Monitoring System_A Operating 5816 Hysteresis upper 00.0 to 50.0 % 00.5 % UNSIGNED 16 2 36B8h
voltage / freq.limit
frequency
Config_Monitoring System_A Operating 5817 Hysteresis lower 00.0 to 50.0 % 00.5 % UNSIGNED 16 2 36B9h
voltage / freq.limit
frequency
Config_Application Breaker - 5820 Dead bus detection 000 to 030 % 10% UNSIGNED 16 2 36BCh
max. volt.
Config_Application Breaker CBA 8805 Dead bus closure 00.0 to 20.0 s 05.0 s UNSIGNED 16 2 4265h
delay time
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. voltage 8807 Limit 100 to 150 % 110% UNSIGNED 16 2 4267h
increase
Config_Application Segment - 8810 Segment number 01 to 64 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 426Ah
config. Sy.A
Config_Application Segment - 8811 Segment number 01 to 64 2 UNSIGNED 16 2 426Bh
config. Sy.B
Config_Application Segment - 8812 Segment number 01 to 64 1 UNSIGNED 16 2 426Ch
config. isol. switch
Config_Monitoring Breaker CBA 8819 Unload trip level 00.5 to 99.9 % 03.0 % UNSIGNED 16 2 4273h
CBA
Config_Application Breaker CBA 8821 Max. phase angle 00 to 20 20 UNSIGNED 16 2 4275h
Config_Application Breaker CBA 8822 Delay time phi 00 to 99 s 01 s UNSIGNED 16 2 4276h
max.
Config_Application Breaker CBA 8824 Phase angle -0180 to 0180 0000 INTEGER 16 2 4278h
Config_Monitoring Breaker CBA 8835 Delay 001 to 999 s 030 s UNSIGNED 16 2 4283h
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. voltage 8839 Response time 001 to 650 s 128 s UNSIGNED 16 2 4287h
increase
Config_CAN1 - - 8940 Producer 00000 to 65000 00020 ms UNSIGNED 16 2 42ECh
SYNCMessage ti- ms
me
Config_CAN1 - - 8950 Node-ID CAN bus 001 to 127 33 UNSIGNED 16 2 42F6h
1
Config_CAN1 CANopen Transmit PDO 1 8962 Selected Data 00000 to 65535 5301 UNSIGNED 16 2 4302h
Protocol

+
2000h
Protocol
Protocol
Config_CAN1 CANopen Receive PDO 1 8970 Selected Data UNSIGNED 16 2 430Ah
Protocol
Config_CAN1 CANopen Receive PDO 2 8971 Selected Data UNSIGNED 16 2 430Bh
Protocol
Config_CAN1 CANopen Receive PDO 3 8972 Selected Data UNSIGNED 16 2 430Ch
Protocol
Config_CAN1 - - 9100 COB-ID SYNC 00000001 to 00000000 <no Unit: UNSIGNED 32 2 438Ch
Message 4294967296 <no Hex>
Unit: Hex>
Config_CAN1 - - 9101 COB-ID TIME 00000001 to 00000000 <no Unit: UNSIGNED 32 2 438Dh
Message 4294967296 <no Hex>
Unit: Hex>
Config_CAN1 - - 9120 Producer heartbeat 00000 to 65500 02000 ms UNSIGNED 16 2 43A0h
time ms
Config_CAN1 CANopen Receive PDO 1 9121 Event timer 00000 to 65500 02000 ms UNSIGNED 16 2 43A1h
ms
Config_CAN1 CANopen Receive PDO 2 9122 Event timer 00000 to 65500 02000 ms UNSIGNED 16 2 43A2h
ms
Config_CAN1 CANopen Receive PDO 3 9123 Event timer UNSIGNED 16 2 43A3h
Config_CAN1 CANopen Receive PDO 1 9300 COB-ID 00000001 to 00000000 <no Unit: UNSIGNED 32 2 4454h
4294967296 <no Hex>
Unit: Hex>
Config_CAN1 CANopen Receive PDO 2 9310 COB-ID 00000001 to 00000000 <no Unit: UNSIGNED 32 2 445Eh
4294967296 <no Hex>
Unit: Hex>
Config_CAN1 CANopen Receive PDO 3 9320 COB-ID UNSIGNED 32 2 4468h
Config_CAN1 CANopen Transmit PDO 1 9600 COB-ID 00000001 to 00000000 <no Unit: UNSIGNED 32 2 4580h
4294967296 <no Hex>
Unit: Hex>
Config_CAN1 CANopen Transmit PDO 1 9602 Transmission type 000 to 255 255 UNSIGNED 8 2 4582h
Config_CAN1 CANopen Transmit PDO 1 9604 Event timer 00000 to 65500 00020 ms UNSIGNED 16 2 4584h
ms
Config_CAN1 CANopen Transmit PDO 1 9605 1. Mapped Object 00000 to 65535 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 4585h
Config_CAN1 CANopen Transmit PDO 1 9609 Number of Mapped 0 to 4 0 UNSIGNED 8 2 4589h
Objects
Config_CAN1 CANopen Transmit PDO 2 9610 COB-ID 00000001 to 00000000 <no Unit: UNSIGNED 32 2 458Ah
4294967296 <no Hex>
Unit: Hex>
Config_CAN1 CANopen Transmit PDO 2 9612 Transmission type 000 to 255 255 UNSIGNED 8 2 458Ch
Config_CAN1 CANopen Transmit PDO 2 9614 Event timer 00000 to 65500 00020 ms UNSIGNED 16 2 458Eh
ms
Config_CAN1 CANopen Transmit PDO 2 9615 1. Mapped Object 00000 to 65535 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 458Fh
Config_CAN1 CANopen Transmit PDO 2 9619 Number of Mapped 0 to 4 0 UNSIGNED 8 2 4593h
Objects
Config_CAN1 CANopen Transmit PDO 3 9620 COB-ID 00000001 to 00000000 <no Unit: UNSIGNED 32 2 4594h
4294967296 <no Hex>
Unit: Hex>
Config_CAN1 CANopen Transmit PDO 3 9622 Transmission type 000 to 255 255 UNSIGNED 8 2 4596h
Config_CAN1 CANopen Transmit PDO 3 9624 Event timer 00000 to 65500 00020 ms UNSIGNED 16 2 4598h
ms
Config_CAN1 CANopen Transmit PDO 3 9626 2. Mapped Object 00000 to 65535 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 459Ah
Config_CAN1 CANopen Transmit PDO 3 9627 3. Mapped Object 00000 to 65535 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 459Bh
Config_CAN1 CANopen Transmit PDO 3 9628 4. Mapped Object 00000 to 65535 0 UNSIGNED 16 2 459Ch
Config_CAN1 CANopen Transmit PDO 3 9629 Number of Mapped 0 to 4 0 UNSIGNED 8 2 459Dh
Objects
Config_CAN1 CANopen Receive PDO 3 9905 Number of Mapped UNSIGNED 8 2 46B1h
Objects
Config_CAN1 CANopen Receive PDO 3 9906 1. Mapped Object UNSIGNED 16 2 46B2h
Config_CAN1 CANopen Receive PDO 1 9910 Number of Mapped UNSIGNED 8 2 46B6h
Objects
Config_CAN1 CANopen Receive PDO 1 9914 4. Mapped Object UNSIGNED 16 2 46BAh
Config_CAN1 CANopen Receive PDO 2 9915 Number of Mapped UNSIGNED 8 2 46BBh
Objects
Config_CAN1 CANopen Receive PDO 2 9916 1. Mapped Object UNSIGNED 16 2 46BCh
Config_CAN1 CANopen Receive PDO 2 9917 2. Mapped Object UNSIGNED 16 2 46BDh
Config_CAN1 CANopen Receive PDO 2 9918 3. Mapped Object UNSIGNED 16 2 46BEh
Config_CAN1 CANopen Receive PDO 2 9919 4. Mapped Object UNSIGNED 16 2 46BFh
Config_Interfaces - - 9921 Transfer rate fast 0.10 to 0.30 s 0.10 s UNSIGNED 16 2 46C1h
message
Config_Admin Access - 10401 Password serial 1 0000 to 9999 1805 UNSIGNED 16 0 48A1h
Config_Admin Access - 10402 Password CAN 1 0000 to 9999 1805 UNSIGNED 16 0 48A2h
Config_Admin Access - 10404 Password for re- 0000 to 9999 1805 UNSIGNED 16 0 48A4h
mote config.
Config_Admin Access Password sys- 10411 Supercommissioni 0000 to 9999 UNSIGNED 16 5 48ABh
tem ng level code

+
2000h
Config_Admin Access Password sys- 10412 Temp. supercomm. 0000 to 9999 UNSIGNED 16 5 48ACh
tem level code
Config_Admin Access Password sys- 10413 Commissioning 0000 to 9999 UNSIGNED 16 3 48ADh
tem code level
Config_Admin Access Password sys- 10414 Temp. 0000 to 9999 UNSIGNED 16 3 48AEh
tem commissioning
code level
Config_Admin Access Password sys- 10415 Basic code level 0000 to 9999 UNSIGNED 16 1 48AFh
tem
Config_Admin Access - 10430 Password serial 2 0000 to 9999 1805 UNSIGNED 16 0 48BEh
Config_CAN1 CANopen Additional Server 33040 2. Node ID 000 to 127 0 UNSIGNED 8 2 A110h
SDOs
SDOs
SDOs
SDOs
Config_IO Discrete_Out 2 12110 Relay 2 "0,0,0x2010,020,112 Logman 2 4F4Eh
,1,1"
Config_IO Discrete_Out 6 12140 Relay 6 "0,0,0x2010,020,107 Logman 2 4F6Ch
,1,1"
Config_LogicsMan Flags 1 12230 Flag 1 "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 4FC6h
ager 1"
Config_LogicsMan Flags 2 12240 Flag 2 "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 4FD0h
ager 1"
Config_LogicsMan Flags 3 12250 Flag 3 "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 4FDAh
ager 1"
Config_LogicsMan Flags 4 12260 Flag 4 "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 4FE4h
ager 1"
Config_LogicsMan Flags 5 12270 Flag 5 "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 4FEEh
ager 1"
Config_LogicsMan Flags 6 12280 Flag 6 "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 4FF8h
ager 1"
Config_LogicsMan Flags 7 12290 Flag 7 "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 5002h
ager 1"
Config_LogicsMan Flags 8 12300 Flag 8 "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 500Ch
ager 1"
Config_IO Discrete_Out 3 12310 Relay 3 "50,0,0x2000,020,20 Logman 2 5016h
5,1,1"
Config_IO Discrete_Out 4 12320 Relay 4 "0,0,0x2000,020,211 Logman 2 5020h
,1,1"
Config_Monitoring - - 12490 Ext. acknowl. "0,0,0x2010,020,902 Logman 2 50CAh
,1,1"
Config_Application Automatic_Run - 12510 Operat. mode "0,0,0x2010,020,16, Logman 2 50DEh
AUTO 1,1"
Config_Application Automatic_Run - 12520 Operat. mode MAN "0,0,0x2010,020,17, Logman 2 50E8h
1,1"
Config_IO Discrete_Out 1 12580 Ready for op.OFF "0,0,0x3030,030,1,1, Logman 2 5124h
1"
Config_Application Breaker Synchronization 12906 Syn. mode CHECK "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 526Ah
1"
Config_Application Breaker Synchronization 12907 Syn. mode PERM. "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 526Bh
1"
Config_Application Breaker Synchronization 12908 Syn. mode RUN "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 526Ch
1"
Config_LogicsMan Flags 9 12910 Flag 9 "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 526Eh
ager 1"
Config_LogicsMan Flags 10 12911 Flag 10 "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 526Fh
ager 1"
ager 1"
ager 1"
ager 1"
ager 1"
ager 1"
ager 1"
Config_Monitoring System_A SyA. decoupling 12942 Enable SyA dec. "0,0,0x2010,020,903 Logman 2 528Eh
,1,1"
Config_Application Breaker CBA 12943 Open CBA unload "0,0,0x2010,020,906 Logman 2 528Fh
,1,1"
Config_Application Breaker CBA 12944 Open CBA immed. "0,0,0x2010,020,904 Logman 2 5290h
,1,1"
Config_Application Breaker CBA 12945 Enable close CBA "0,0,010,000,907,80 Logman 2 5291h
7,705"
Config_Application Breaker - 12950 Isol.sw open "0,0,0x2010,020,905 Logman 2 5296h
,1,1"
Config_LogicsMan LS5 System 1 12952 Flag 1 LS5 "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 5298h
ager Conditions 1"
Config_LogicsMan LS5 System 2 12953 Flag 2 LS5 "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 5299h
ager Conditions 1"
Config_LogicsMan LS5 System 3 12954 Flag 3 LS5 "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 529Ah
ager Conditions 1"
Config_LogicsMan LS5 System 4 12955 Flag 4 LS5 "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 529Bh
ager Conditions 1"
Config_LogicsMan LS5 System 5 12956 Flag 5 LS5 "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 529Ch
ager Conditions 1"

+
2000h
Config_Application Breaker CBA 12957 Open CBA in MAN "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 529Dh
1"
Config_Application Breaker CBA 12958 Close CBA in MAN "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 529Eh
1"
Config_Monitoring - - 12959 Lock Monitoring "0,0,0x2010,020,901 Logman 2 529Fh
,1,1"
Config_IO LEDs 1 12962 LED 1 "0,0,0x2010,020,211 Logman 2 52A2h
,1,1"
,1,1"
,1,1"
,1,1"
,1,1"
,1,1"
,1,1"
,1,1"
Config_LogicsMan Lock keypad 1 12978 Lock keypad "0,0,0x2030,020,1,1, Logman 2 52B2h
ager 1"
Config_IO Discrete_In 1 1400 Description user-defined Lock monitoring Text/16 2 2578h
Config_IO Discrete_In 2 1410 Description user-defined External Ackn. Text/16 2 2582h
Config_IO Discrete_In 3 1420 Description user-defined Enable decoupling Text/16 2 258Ch
Config_IO Discrete_In 4 1430 Description user-defined Immed. open CBA Text/16 2 2596h
Config_IO Discrete_In 5 1440 Description user-defined Repl. Iso. open Text/16 2 25A0h
Config_IO Discrete_In 6 1450 Description user-defined Open CBA Text/16 2 25AAh
Config_IO Discrete_In 7 1460 Description user-defined En. close CBA Text/16 2 25B4h

Appendix G.
Service Options
Product Service Options

The following factory options are available for servicing Woodward equipment, based on the standard Wood-
ward Product and Service Warranty (5-01-1205) that is in effect at the time the product is purchased from
Woodward or the service is performed. If you are experiencing problems with installation or unsatisfactory per-
formance of an installed system, the following options are available:
Consult the troubleshooting guide in the manual.

Contact Woodward technical assistance (see "How to Contact Woodward" later in this chapter) and discuss
your problem. In most cases, your problem can be resolved over the phone. If not, you can select which
course of action you wish to pursue based on the available services listed in this section.
Returning Equipment For Repair

If a control (or any part of an electronic control) is to be returned to Woodward for repair, please contact Wood-
ward in advance to obtain a Return Authorization Number. When shipping the unit(s), attach a tag with the fol-
lowing information:
name and location where the control is installed;

name and phone number of contact person;
complete Woodward part numbers (P/N) and serial number (S/N);
description of the problem;
instructions describing the desired type of repair.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to electronic components caused by improper handling, read and observe the pre-
cautions in Woodward manual 82715, Guide for Handling and Protection of Electronic Controls, Printed
Circuit Boards, and Modules.

Packing A Control
Use the following materials when returning a complete control:
protective caps on any connectors;

antistatic protective bags on all electronic modules;
packing materials that will not damage the surface of the unit;
at least 100 mm (4 inches) of tightly packed, industry-approved packing material;
a packing carton with double walls;
a strong tape around the outside of the carton for increased strength.
Return Authorization Number RAN

When returning equipment to Woodward, please telephone and ask for the Customer Service Department in
Stuttgart [+49 (0) 711 789 54-0]. They will help expedite the processing of your order through our distributors or
local service facility. To expedite the repair process, contact Woodward in advance to obtain a Return Authoriza-
tion Number, and arrange for issue of a purchase order for the unit(s) to be repaired. No work can be started until
a purchase order is received.
NOTE
We highly recommend that you make arrangement in advance for return shipments. Contact a
Woodward customer service representative at +49 (0) 711 789 54-0 for instructions and for a Re-
turn Authorization Number.
Replacement Parts

When ordering replacement parts for controls, include the following information:
the part numbers P/N (XXXX-XXX) that is on the enclosure nameplate;
the unit serial number S/N, which is also on the nameplate.

How To Contact Woodward

Please contact following address if you have questions or if you want to send a product for repair:
Woodward GmbH
Handwerkstrasse 29
70565 Stuttgart - Germany
Phone: +49 (0) 711 789 54-0 (8.00 - 16.30 German time)
Fax: +49 (0) 711 789 54-100
e-mail: [email protected]
For assistance outside Germany, call one of the following international Woodward facilities to obtain the address
and phone number of the facility nearest your location where you will be able to get information and service.
Facility Phone number

USA +1 (970) 482 5811
India +91 (129) 409 7100
Brazil +55 (19) 3708 4800
Japan +81 (476) 93 4661
The Netherlands +31 (23) 566 1111
You can also contact the Woodward Customer Service Department or consult our worldwide directory on
Woodwards website (www.woodward.com) for the name of your nearest Woodward distributor or service facil-
ity. [For worldwide directory information, go to www.woodward.com/ic/locations.]

Engineering Services

Woodward Industrial Controls Engineering Services offers the following after-sales support for Woodward prod-
ucts. For these services, you can contact us by telephone, by e-mail, or through the Woodward website.
Technical support
Product training
Field service during commissioning
Technical Support is available through our many worldwide locations, through our authorized distributors, or
through GE Global Controls Services, depending on the product. This service can assist you with technical ques-
tions or problem solving during normal business hours. Emergency assistance is also available during non-
business hours by phoning our toll-free number and stating the urgency of your problem. For technical engineer-
ing support, please contact us via our toll-free or local phone numbers, e-mail us, or use our website and refer-
ence technical support.
Product Training is available on-site from several of our worldwide facilities, at your location, or from GE
Global Controls Services, depending on the product. This training, conducted by experienced personnel, will as-
sure that you will be able to maintain system reliability and availability. For information concerning training,
please contact us via our toll-free or local phone numbers, e-mail us, or use our website and reference customer
training.
Field Service engineering on-site support is available, depending on the product and location, from our facility in
Colorado, or from one of many worldwide Woodward offices or authorized distributors. Field engineers are ex-
perienced on both Woodward products as well as on much of the non-Woodward equipment with which our
products interface. For field service engineering assistance, please contact us via our toll-free or local phone
numbers, e-mail us, or use our website and reference field service.

Technical Assistance

If you need to telephone for technical assistance, you will need to provide the following information. Please write
it down here before phoning:
Contact
Your company ____________________________________________________
Your name _______________________________________________________
Phone number ____________________________________________________
Fax number ______________________________________________________
Control (see name plate)

Unit no. and revision: P/N: ____________________ REV: _____________
Unit type LS-________________________________________
Serial number S/N _______________________________________
Description of your problem

________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Please be sure you have a list of all parameters available. You can print this using ToolKit. Additionally you can
save the complete set of parameters (standard values) and send them to our Service department via e-mail.

We appreciate your comments about the content of our publications.
Please send comments to: [email protected]
Please include the manual number from the front cover of this publication.
Woodward GmbH
Handwerkstrasse 29 - 70565 Stuttgart - Germany
Phone +49 (0) 711 789 54-0 Fax +49 (0) 711 789 54-100
[email protected]
Homepage
http://www.woodward.com
Woodward has company-owned plants, subsidiaries, and branches, as well as authorized

distributors and other authorized service and sales facilities throughout the world.
Complete address/phone/fax/e-mail information

for all locations is available on our website (www.woodward.com).
2011/03/Stuttgart

888788918-LS5 RE Eng NEW

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

888788918-LS5 RE Eng NEW

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

888788918-LS5 RE Eng NEW

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

37527

Page 2/275 Woodward

Rev. Date Editor Changes

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL INFORMATION ..................................................................................... 10

Woodward Page 3/275

Page 4/275 Woodward

APPENDIX C. LOGICSMANAGER ........................................................................................... 195

Woodward Page 5/275

Figures and Tables

Page 6/275 Woodward

Woodward Page 7/275

Page 8/275 Woodward

Glossary And List Of Abbreviations

Woodward Page 9/275

Type English German

Page 10/275 Woodward

Electrostatic Discharge Awareness

Follow these precautions when working with or near the control.

4. Opening the control cover may void the unit warranty.

Do not touch any part of the PCB except the edges.

Woodward Page 11/275

Marine Usage (Pending)

The LS-5 Series has no internally isolated power supply.

Page 12/275 Woodward

Woodward Page 13/275

Figure 2-1: Housing - panel-board cutout

Measure Description Tolerance

The maximum permissible corner radius is 3.5 mm.

Page 14/275 Woodward

Figure 2-2: Plastic housing LS-521 dimensions

Woodward Page 15/275

Clamp Fastener Installation

3. Insert screws in clamps

4. Insert unit into cutout

6. Tighten clamping screws

Page 16/275 Woodward

Screw Kit Installation

Proceed as follows to install the unit using the screw kit:

Figure 2-3: Plastic housing - drill plan

Woodward Page 17/275

Sheet Metal Housing

Figure 2-4: Sheet metal housing LS-511 dimensions

Figure 2-5: Sheet metal housing - drill plan

Page 18/275 Woodward

Figure 2-6: LS-5 Series wiring diagram

Woodward Page 19/275

AWG mm AWG mm AWG mm AWG mm AWG mm AWG mm

Page 20/275 Woodward

Figure 2-7: Power supply

Figure 2-8: Power supply - crank waveform at maximum load

Woodward Page 21/275

Voltage Measuring: System A

Figure 2-9: Voltage measuring system A

Page 22/275 Woodward

Voltage Measuring: System A, Parameter Setting '3Ph 4W' (3-phase, 4-wire)

Figure 2-11: Voltage measuring system A measuring inputs, 3Ph 4W

Voltage Measuring: System A, Parameter Setting '3Ph 3W' (3-phase, 3-wire)

Figure 2-13: Voltage measuring system A measuring inputs, 3Ph 3W

2 For different voltage systems, different wiring terminals have to be used.